Professional Documents
Culture Documents
7955 Gas Flow Computer Operating Manual 1540 Software en 133108
7955 Gas Flow Computer Operating Manual 1540 Software en 133108
HB551540
May 2010 7955 Flow Computer
Introduction:
The 7955 gas flow computer can be used for
applications with up to four streams.
Software Version:
1540 – Gas Applications.
Emerson Process Management (EPM) pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement. The
information contained in this document is, therefore, subject to change without notice. To the best of our knowledge,
the information contained in this document is accurate. However, EPM cannot be held responsible for any errors,
omissions or inaccuracies, or any losses incurred as result of them.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because we are continuously improving our products, some of the menus which appear on your
instrument’s display may not be exactly as illustrated and described in this manual. However,
because the menus are simple and intuitive, this should not cause any major problems.
This manual is concurrent with embedded software version 551540, issue 4.30.00 (or higher)
Static precautions
Some parts of the instrument (such as circuit boards) may be damaged by static electricity. Therefore, when carrying
out any work which involves the risk of static damage to the instrument, the instructions show the following notice:
CAUTION While carrying out this procedure, you must wear an earthed wrist strap at all
times to protect the instrument against static shock.
At such times you must wear an earthed wrist-strap to protect the instrument.
Safety information
NOTE: This information applies only to those instruments which are mains-powered.
Electricity is dangerous and you risk injury or death if you do not disconnect the power supplies before carrying out
some of the procedures given in this manual. Whenever there is such a hazard, the instructions show a notice similar
to the following:
You must heed any such warnings and make sure that, before you go any further:
All power leads are un-powered.
All power leads are disconnected from the equipment which you are working on unless the instructions
tell you otherwise.
You obey any other common-sense precautions which may apply to your situation.
If you obey these sensible precautions, you can work on the equipment in complete safety.
Replace the battery when the "Low Battery" system alarm is indicated. The procedure is in Chapter 14.
Contents
15.1 What the drawing and parts list tells you 15.1
15.2 How to obtain spare parts 15.1
Appendices
Appendix A Glossary A.1
Appendix B Blank wiring schedule B.1
Quick-start Guide
If you want to... Read....
This manual assumes that all devices or peripherals to be connected to the 7955 have their own
documentation which tells you how to install and configure them. For this reason it is assumed that anything
which you want to link to the 7955 is already installed and working correctly in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Since the instrument can be used for a wide variety of purposes, it is driven by software specially for your
application. This manual gives information about the software which applies to your machine only.
2. Getting Started
2.1 What this Chapter tells you
This chapter shows how to:
Connect different types of instrumentation to a 7955 that is fitted with the D-type rear panel.
Set the DIP-switches inside the 7955.
Select the appropriate software Wizard to configure the 7955.
Important Warnings!!
1. The 7955 Flow Computer is not intrinsically safe and, therefore, can
only be used in officially designated safe (non-hazardous) areas.
Each worked example has a comprehensive set of instructions to establish a successful physical connection.
Instructions also show how to select the correct software Wizard.
Some types of connection require DIP-switches to be set. These internal switches are located on the
processor board (mA/PRT analogue inputs) and the power supply board (8V/16V turbine).
Worked examples explain when to set a DIP switch. Newer models of the 7955 have holes on top of the
housing to access DIP-switches. Older models require the removal of the housing.
Note:
DIP-switches which are not shown in the diagrams have no effect on the field
transmitter shown.
Where a field transmitter can be connected to more than one analogue input, the DIP
switch setting depends on which input you have used.
Use the “Health Check” facility on the 7955 to monitor what is being input. Refer to Chapter 13 to find out
how to locate this facility using the 7955 menu system. Once located, select the particular type of input and
then select the instance of that input to see what is happening.
Example: Display pulse frequency from a turbine (pulse) flowmeter with dual pulse train outputs connected
to Pulse Input 1.
Turn off the power 01. Ensure that the 7955 is NOT powered up.
Set DIP switch 02. Select the voltage, 8V or 16V, which is required by all the turbine flowmeters.
This diagram shows the 8V selection:
(only if powering the
flowmeter using the
8V 16V
7955 isolated power
source)
Figure 2.1: Typical dual pulse turbine flowmeter with connections shown
Turbine Power +
Power
Turbine Power -
supply unit
Pickup 'A'
Turbine
Table 2.1: 7955 Pin groups for use with turbine flowmeters
Connection label Pin Group #1 Pin Group #2 Pin Group #3 Pin Group #4
Turbine Power + SK3/4 SK3/4 SK3/4 SK3/4
Turbine Power - SK3/20 SK3/20 SK3/20 SK3/20
Turbine Signal ‘A’ + SK1/42 SK1/27 SK1/12 SK1/46
Turbine Signal ‘A’ - SK1/43 SK1/28 SK1/13 SK1/47
Turbine Signal ‘B’ + SK1/10 SK1/44 SK1/29 SK1/15
Turbine Signal ‘B’ - SK1/11 SK1/45 SK1/30 SK1/14
† th
There is a 5 pulse input, which is reserved for the future support of Master Meter Proving.
Important Notes:
Flowmeters with a single pulse train output should only use the 7955 pins applicable to the pickup
nominated as ‘A’. These are labelled as: “Turbine Signal ‘A’ +”, “Turbine Signal ‘A’ -”.
Application software use of pulses from these flowmeter (pulse) inputs will depend on the particular
release of the software that is concurrent with this Operating Manual. Refer to Chapter 3 (About The
7955) and the configuration chapters for details on use of these inputs.
(Instructions continued…)
Turn on the power 04. Turn on the power to the system. The system goes through a Power On Self
Test (POST) routine which takes less than 30 seconds. When it is finished,
ignore any flashing alarm lights which may appear.
Visit the Wizards 05. Press the MAIN MENU key to visit page 1 of the top-level menu (if you are not
selection menu there already).
06. Press the DOWN-ARROW key several times until the word “Configure” is
displayed on one of the four lines.
07. Press the single-lettered key that is alongside “Configure”. This action selects
the principal configuration menu.
08. Press the ‘a’-key twice to arrive at the Wizard selection screen.
Select the Wizard 09. Press the ‘b’-key. (This action starts the selection process)
10. Use the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key (repeatedly) to scroll through a list
of Wizards. Stop when “Flow meter” is displayed.
11. Press the ‘b’-key to select and start the “Flow meter” Wizard.
Proceed with 12. Press the ‘d’-key to answer “Yes” to the prompt of “Edit Stream 1?”.
Wizard
13. Press the ‘c’-key to select “Turbine”.
14. Press the ‘b’-key.
15. Use the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key until “Dual pulse (A+B)” is seen.
16. Press the ENTER key to confirm the selection and proceed to the next prompt.
17. Press the ‘c’-key and then use the arrow keys until “Live” is displayed.
18. Press the ENTER key to confirm the selection and proceed to the next prompt.
19. Press the ENTER key several times until “Edit Turbine Linearisation?” appears.
20. Continue to press the ‘c’-key to answer “NO” until the Wizard exits back to the
selection screen. Guidance on interacting with Wizards is in Chapter 10.
Check on results 21. Press the MAIN MENU key to visit page 1 of the top-level menu.
22. Press the DOWN-ARROW key several times until “Health check” is displayed on
one of the four lines.
23. Press the single-lettered key that is alongside “Health check”.
24. Press the single-lettered key that is alongside “Flowmeter inputs”.
25. Press the single-lettered key that is alongside “Turbine”.
26. Press the single-lettered key that is alongside “Turbine freq.”.
27. Monitor the calculated pulse frequency value.
Note:
If the digit next to the triangular-shaped mark on the last display line does not
show a “1”, use the STREAM/RUN SELECT key until “1” appears.
(End of instructions)
Example: Display pulse frequency from an ultrasonic flowmeter with a single pulse train output connected to
Pulse Input 1.
Turn off the power 01. Ensure that the 7955 Flow Computer is NOT powered up.
Set DIP switch 02. Select the voltage, 8V or 16V, which is required by the flowmeter. This
diagram shows the 8V selection:
(only if powering the
flowmeter using the
8V 16V
7955 isolated power
source)
Signal 'A' +
Signal 'A' -
Pickup 'A'
Table 2.2: 7955 Pin groups for use with an ultrasonic flowmeter
Connection label Pin Group #1 Pin Group #2 Pin Group #3 Pin Group #4
Power + SK3/4 SK3/4 SK3/4 SK3/4
Power - SK3/20 SK3/20 SK3/20 SK3/20
Signal ‘A’ + SK1/42 SK1/27 SK1/12 SK1/46
Signal ‘A’ - SK1/43 SK1/28 SK1/13 SK1/47
Important Notes
Flowmeters with a single pulse train output should only use the 7955 pins applicable to the pickup
nominated as ‘A’. These are labelled as: “Signal ‘A’ +”, “Signal ‘A’ -”.
Application software use of pulses from these flowmeter (pulse) inputs will depend on the particular
release of the software that is concurrent with this Operating Manual. Refer to Chapter 3 (About The
7955) and the configuration chapters for details on use of these inputs.
(Instructions continued…)
Turn on the power 04. Turn on the power to the system. The system goes through a Power On Self
Test (POST) routine which takes less than 30 seconds. When it is finished,
ignore any flashing alarm lights which may appear.
Visit the Wizards 05. Press the MAIN MENU key to visit page 1 of the top-level menu (if you are not
selection menu there already).
06. Press the DOWN-ARROW key several times until the word “Configure” is
displayed on one of the four lines.
07. Press the single-lettered key that is alongside “Configure”. This action selects
the principal configuration menu.
08. Press the ‘a’-key twice to arrive at the Wizard selection screen.
Select the Wizard 09. Press the ‘b’-key. (This action starts the selection process)
10. Press the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the list of
Wizards. Stop when “Flow meter” is displayed.
11. Press the ‘b’-key to select and start the “Flow meter” Wizard.
Proceed with Wizard 12. Press the ‘d’-key to answer “Yes” to the prompt “Edit stream 1?”.
13. Press the DOWN-ARROW key once.
14. Press the single-lettered that is alongside “Ultrasonic”.
15. Press the ‘b’-key.
16. Use the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key until “Single pulse (A)” is seen.
17. Press the ENTER key several times until “Flow meter frequency” appears.
18. Press the ‘c’-key and then use the arrow keys to make “Live” appear.
19. Press the ENTER key twice (to confirm selection and make the next prompt
appear.)
20. Press the ENTER key several times until “Edit ultrasonic general corrections?”
appears.
21. Continue to press the ‘c’-key to answer “No” until the Wizard exits back to the
selection screen. Guidance on interacting with Wizards is in Chapter 10.
Check on results 22. Press the MAIN MENU key to visit page 1 of the top-level menu.
23. Press the DOWN-ARROW key several times until “Health check” is displayed
on one of the four lines.
24. Press the single-lettered key that is alongside “Health check”.
25. Press the single-lettered key that is alongside “Flowmeter inputs”.
26. Press the single-lettered key that is alongside “Ultrasonic”.
27. Press the single-lettered key that is alongside “Ultrasonic freq.”.
28. Monitor the calculated pulse frequency value.
Note:
If the digit next to the triangular-shaped mark on the last display line does not
show a “1”, use the STREAM/RUN SELECT key until “1” appears.
(End of instructions)
The maximum number of cells supported by the application software is indicated in Chapter 3. For the
purpose of the example below, 2 DP cells are used.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
There are complete pin designation lists at the end of this Chapter. Note that the
signal pins of analogue inputs 1 4 are labelled with the term “PRT”. These
particular pins have a dual role - PRT or mA. Setting a DIP switch (belonging to
an analogue input) will determine the function.
Care is needed when preparing to use any of the first four analogue inputs with a
loop powered (0-20mA or 4-20mA) field transmitters:
Ensure that the DIP switch on the processor board is set for mA (per analogue
input used)
Ensure that only the analogue power pins are used. The reason for this is that
PRT power is only applied when a measurement is required and, therefore, not
suitable for loop powered mA devices.
Example:
Two metering-run #1 cells (high range and low range) connected to Analogue Inputs ‘1’ and ‘2’. They are
powered by the 7955 (24V isolated supply).
Follow these instructions to work through the example:
Turn off the power 01. Ensure that the 7955 instrument is NOT powered up.
Set DIP switches as 02. Ensure that the DIP switch for analogue input 1 is set for mA.
shown on page 2.8.
03. Ensure that the DIP switch for analogue input 2 is set for mA.
Connect the first 04. Wire the first cell to Analogue Input ‘1’.
Differential Pressure
cell
+ Analogue Power +
- Signal +
Signal -
Analogue Power -
The diagram features connection labels, for example “Analogue Power +”,
which will each identify one pin from any pin group of Table 2.3.
Analogue Input ‘1’ pins are listed under the “Input #1 Pin Group” column.
Table 2.3: 7955 (D-type) pins for the first four mA inputs
(Instructions continued…)
Connect the second 05. Wire the second cell to Analogue Input ‘2’.
Differential Pressure
cell
+ Analogue Power +
- Signal +
Signal -
Analogue Power -
The diagram features connection labels, for example see “Analogue Power +”,
which will each identify one pin from any pin group of Table 2.3
Analogue Input ‘2’ pins are listed under the “Input #2 Pin Group” column.
SW1
A 1 DIP switch settings of analogue inputs 1 and 2 for this example. The
B 2
“SW2” block must be set to match the “SW1” block.
4-20mA PRT
C 3
D 4
A 1
B 2
C 3
D 4
SW2
Turn on the power 06. Turn on the power to the system. The system goes through a Power-On-Self-
Test (POST) routine that takes less than 30 seconds. When it is finished, ignore
any flashing alarm lights that may appear.
Visit the Wizards 07. Press the MAIN MENU key to visit page 1 of the top-level menu (if you are not
selection menu there already).
08. Press the DOWN-ARROW key several times until the word “Configure” is
displayed on one of the four lines.
09. Press the single-lettered key that is alongside “Configure”. This action selects
the principal configuration menu.
10. Press the ‘a’-key twice to arrive at the Wizard selection screen.
Select the Wizard 11. Press the ‘b’-key. (This action starts the selection process)
12. Press the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the list of
Wizards. Stop when “Flow meter” is displayed.
13. Press the ‘b’-key to select and start the “Flow meter” Wizard.
Proceed with Wizard 14. Press the ‘d’-key to answer “Yes” to the prompt of “Edit stream 1?”
15. Press the lettered-key that is alongside “Orifice”.
16. Press the ‘b’-key and then use the arrow keys until “Plate” appears.
17. Press the ENTER (or ‘b’-key) twice.
18. Press the ‘b’ key and then use the numeric keypad to type in a value for the
pipe internal diameter.
19. Press the ENTER (or ‘b’-key) twice.
20. Repeat steps 18 and 19 for Orifice diameter.
21. Press the ENTER (or ‘b’-key) repeatedly until “Orif mass flow calc” appears.
22. Press the ‘b’-key and then use the arrow keys until “AGA 3” appears.
23. Press the ENTER repeatedly until “Edit differential pressure?” appears.
(Instructions continued…)
24. Press the ‘d’-key to answer “Yes”.
25. Press the ‘b’-key and then use the arrow keys until “H=DP:1 L=DP:2” appears.
26. Press the ENTER key twice.
27. Press the ‘b’-key and then use the arrow keys until “Analog input 1” appears.
28. Press the ENTER key three times.
29. Press the ‘b’ key and then use the numeric keypad to type in a percentage of
the low range for automatic switching up to the high range cell. (e.g. 90.0%)
30. Press the ENTER (or ‘b’-key) twice.
31. Press the ‘b’ key and then use the numeric keypad to type in a percentage of
the low range for automatic switching down to the low range cell. (e.g. 95.0%)
32. Press the ENTER (or ‘b’-key) twice.
33. Repeat steps 31 and 32 for each differential pressure range (of the two cells).
33. Press the ‘b’-key and then use the arrow keys until “4-20mA input” appears
34. Press the ENTER (or ‘b’-key) twice.
35. Repeat steps 33 to 34 for the 2nd input.
36. Press the ENTER key or ‘c’-key to answer “NO” until the Wizard exits back to
the selection screen. Guidance on interacting with Wizards is in Chapter 10.
Check on results 37. Press the MAIN MENU key to visit page 1 of the top-level menu.
38. Press the DOWN-ARROW key several times until “Health check” is displayed on
one of the four lines.
39. Press the single-lettered key that is alongside “Health check”.
40. Press the single-lettered key that is alongside “Flowmeter inputs”.
41. Press the single-lettered key that is alongside “Orifice”.
42. Press the single-lettered key that is alongside “DP value”.
43. Monitor the “Live” calculated differential pressure value.
Note:
If the digit next to the triangular-shaped mark on the last display line does not show
a “1”, use the STREAM/RUN SELECT key until a “1” appears.
(End of instructions)
The maximum number of temperature transmitters supported by the application software is indicated in
Chapter 3. For the purpose of the example below, 1 transmitter is used.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
There are complete pin designation lists at the end of this Chapter. Note that the
signal pins of analogue inputs 1 4 are labelled with the term “PRT”. These
particular pins have a dual role – PRT or mA. Setting a DIP switch (belonging to
an analogue input) will determine the function.
Care is needed when preparing to use any of the first four analogue inputs with a
loop powered (0-20mA or 4-20mA) field transmitters:
Ensure that the DIP switch on the processor board is set for mA (per analogue
input used)
Ensure that only the analogue power pins are used. The reason for this is that
PRT power is only applied when a measurement is required and, therefore, not
suitable for loop powered mA devices.
Example:
Metering-run #1 temperature, read from 1 loop powered temperature transmitter connected to Analogue Input ‘3’.
The transmitter is powered by the 7955 (24V isolated supply).
Table 2.4: 7955 (D-type) pins for the first four mA inputs
SW1
A 1
DIP switch settings of Analogue Input ‘3’ for this example. The “SW2”
block must be set to match the “SW1” block.
B 2
4-20mA PRT
C 3
D 4
A 1
B 2
C 3
D 4
SW2
(Instructions continued…)
Turn on the power 04. Turn on the power to the system. The system goes through a Power On Self
Test (POST) routine which takes less than 30 seconds. When it is finished,
ignore any flashing alarm lights which may appear.
Visit the Wizards 05. Press the MAIN MENU key to visit page 1 of the top-level menu (if you are not
selection menu there already).
06. Press the DOWN-ARROW key several times until the word “Configure” is
displayed on one of the four lines.
07. Press the single-lettered key that is alongside “Configure”. This action selects
the principal configuration menu.
08. Press the ‘a’-key twice to navigate to the Wizard selection screen.
Select the Wizard 09. Press the ‘b’-key. (This action starts the selection process)
10. Press the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the list of
Wizards. Stop when “Temperature” is displayed.
11. Press the ‘b’-key to select and start the “Temperature” Wizard.
Proceed with Wizard 12. Press the ‘d’-key to answer “Yes” to the prompt of “Edit stream 1?”.
13. Press the ‘d’-key to answer “Yes” to the next prompt of
“Edit line temperature?”.
14. Press the ‘b’-key.
15. Use the UP-ARROW key or DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the list of
options. Halt when “Analogue input 3” is seen.
16. Press the ENTER key twice.
17. Repeat steps 14 to 16 for selecting the appropriate analogue input type.
18. Press the ‘b’-key and then use the numeric keypad to type in the maximum
temperature supported by the transmitter.
19. Press the ENTER key twice.
20. Press the ‘b’-key and then use the numeric keypad to type in the minimum
temperature supported by the transmitter.
21. Press the ENTER key twice.
22. Press the ‘c’-key to answer “No” to the all further prompts until the Wizards
exits back to the selection screen.
Check on results 23. Press the MAIN MENU key to visit page 1 of the top-level menu (if you are not
there already).
24. Press the DOWN-ARROW key several times until “Temperature” is displayed
on one of the four lines.
(Instructions continued…)
(End of instructions)
The maximum number of temperature transmitters supported by the application software is indicated in
Chapter 3. For the purpose of the example below, 1 transmitter is used.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
There are complete pin designation lists at the end of this Chapter. Note that the
signal pins of analogue inputs 1 4 are labelled with the term “PRT”. These
particular pins have a dual role - PRT or mA. Setting a DIP switch (belonging to
an analogue input) will determine the function.
Care is needed when preparing to use any of the first four analogue inputs with a
PRT-type field transmitters:
Ensure that the DIP switch on the processor board is set for PRT (per analogue
input used)
Ensure that only the PRT power pins are used.
Example:
Metering-run #2 temperature read from 1 PRT-type temperature transmitter connected to Analogue Input 4.
The transmitter is powered by the 7955 (isolated supply).
Signal -
PRT Power -
The diagram features 4 connection labels, for example see “PRT Power +”,
which will each identify one pin from any pin group of Table 2.5.
Analogue Input ‘4’ pins are listed under the “Input #4 Pin Group” column.
Table 2.5: 7955 (D-type) pins for the four PRT inputs
SW1
DIP switch settings of analogue input 4 for this example. The “SW2”
A 1 block must be set to match the “SW1” block.
B 2
4-20mA PRT
C 3
D 4
A 1
B 2
C 3
D 4
SW2
Turn on the power 04. Turn on the power to the system. The system goes through a Power On Self
Test (POST) routine which takes less than 30 seconds. When it is finished,
ignore any flashing alarm lights which may appear.
Visit the Wizards 05. Press the MAIN MENU key to visit page 1 of the top-level menu (if you are not
selection menu there already).
06. Press the DOWN-ARROW key several times until the word “Configure” is
displayed on one of the four lines.
07. Press the single-lettered key that is alongside “Configure”. This action selects
the principal configuration menu.
08. Press the ‘a’-key twice to arrive at the Wizard selection screen.
Select the Wizard 09. Press the ‘b’-key. (This action starts the selection process)
10. Use the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the list of
Wizards. Halt when “Temperature” is displayed.
11. Press the ‘b’-key to select and start the “Temperature” Wizard.
Proceed with Wizard 12. Press the ‘c’-key to answer “No” to the prompt of “Edit stream 1?”.
13. Press the ‘d’-key to answer “Yes” to the prompt of “Edit stream 2?”.
14. Press the ‘d’-key to answer “Yes” to the prompt of “Edit line temperature?”.
15. Press the ‘b’-key.
16. Use the UP-ARROW key or DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the list of
options. Halt using the arrow keys when “Analogue input 4” is seen.
17. Press the ENTER key twice.
18. Repeat steps 15 to 17 for selecting the “PT100 input” option.
19. Use the ‘c’-key to answer “No” to the all further prompts until the Wizard exits
to the selection screen. A guide to interacting with a Wizard is in Chapter 10.
Check on results 20. Press the MAIN MENU key to visit page 1 of the top-level menu.
21. Use the DOWN-ARROW key until “Temperature” is displayed on one of the
four lines.
22. Press the single-lettered key that is alongside “Temperature”.
23. Press the single-lettered key that is alongside “Line temperature”.
24. Monitor the “Live” calculated temperature value.
Note:
If the digit next to the triangular-shaped mark on the last display line does not
show a “2”, use the STREAM/RUN SELECT key until a “2” appears.
(End of instructions)
The maximum number of pressure transmitters supported by the application software is indicated in Chapter 3.
For the purpose of the example below, 1 transmitter is used.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
There are complete pin designation lists at the end of this Chapter. Note that the
signal pins of analogue inputs 1 4 are labelled with the term “PRT”. These
particular pins have a dual role - PRT or mA. Setting a DIP switch (belonging to
an analogue input) will determine the function.
Care is needed when preparing to use any of the first four analogue inputs with a
loop powered (0-20mA or 4-20mA) field transmitters:
Ensure that the DIP switch on the processor board is set for mA (per analogue
input used)
Ensure that only the analogue power pins are used. The reason for this is that
PRT power is only applied when a measurement is required and, therefore, not
suitable for loop powered mA devices.
Example:
Metering-run #2 pressure read from 1 loop powered pressure transmitter connected to Analogue Input ‘3’.
The transmitter is powered by the 7955 (24V isolated supply).
The diagram features 4 connection labels, for example “Analogue Power +”,
which will each identify one pin from any pin group of Table 2.6.
Analogue Input ‘3’ pins are listed under the “Input #3 Pin Group” column.
Table 2.6: 7955 (D-type) pins for the first four mA inputs
SW1
DIP switch settings of Analogue Input ‘3’ for this example. The
A 1
“SW2” block must be set to match the “SW1” block.
B 2
4-20mA PRT
C 3
D 4
A 1
B 2
C 3
D 4
SW2
(Instructions continued…)
Turn on the power 04. Turn on the power to the system. The system goes through a Power-On-Self-
Test (POST) routine that takes less than 30 seconds. When it is finished, ignore
any flashing alarm lights that may appear.
Visit the Wizards 05. Press the MAIN MENU key to visit page 1 of the top-level menu (if you are not
selection menu there already).
06. Press the DOWN-ARROW key several times until the word “Configure” is
displayed on one of the four lines.
07. Press the single-lettered key that is alongside “Configure”. This action selects
the principal configuration menu.
08. Press the ‘a’-key twice to arrive at the Wizard selection screen.
Select the Wizard 09. Press the ‘b’-key. (This action starts the selection process)
10. Use the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the list of
Wizards. Halt when “Pressure” is displayed.
11. Press the ‘b’-key to select and start the “Pressure” Wizard.
Proceed with Wizard 12. Press the ‘c’-key to answer “No” to the prompt of “Edit stream 1?”
13. Press the ‘d’-key to answer “Yes” to the prompt of “Edit stream 2?”
14. Press the ‘d’-key to answer “Yes” to the prompt of “Edit line pressure?”
15. Press the ‘b’-key.
16. Use the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the list of options.
Halt when “Analogue input 3” is displayed.
17. Press the ENTER key twice.
18. Repeat steps 15 to 17 for selecting the appropriate mA range.
19. Press the ‘b’-key and then use the numeric keypad to type in the maximum
static pressure measurement supported by the transmitter.
20. Press the ENTER key twice.
21. Press the ‘b’-key and then use the numeric keypad to type in the minimum static
pressure measurement supported by the transmitter.
22. Press the ENTER key twice.
23. Press the ‘c’-key to answer “No” to all the further prompts until the Wizard exits
to the selection screen. A guide on interacting with a Wizard is in Chapter 10.
Check on results 24. Press the MAIN MENU key to visit page 1 of the top-level menu.
25. Use the DOWN-ARROW key until “Pressure” is displayed.
26. Press the single-lettered key that is alongside “Pressure”.
(Instructions continued…)
(End of instructions)
Example:
Prime metering-run ‘1’ gas density (always from channel ‘1A’), read from a gas density transducer (7812)
connected to Time Period Input ‘1’.
Prime metering-run ‘2’ gas density (always from channel ‘2A’), read from a gas density transducer
(7810 or 7811) connected to Time Period Input ‘2’.
Transducers are powered by the 7955 (24V isolated supply).
1 +24V Power
SIG A
2
Signal +
3
SIG B 0V Power
4
Signal -
The diagram features four connection labels, for example see “+24V Power”,
which will each identify one rear panel pin from any pin group of Table 2.7.
Time Period Input ‘1’ pins are listed under the “Input #1 Pin Group” column.
Note: For hazardous area connections, always refer to the documentation
supplied by the manufacturer of the transmitter/transducer.
Connect the second 03. Wire the 7810 (or 7811) to Time Period Input ‘2’.
transducer to the 7955
SIG Signal +
NEG Signal -
0V Power
The diagram features four connection labels, for example see “+24V Power”,
which will each identify one rear panel pin from any pin group of Table 2.7.
Time Period Input ‘2’ pins are listed under the “Input #2 Pin Group” column.
Note: For hazardous area connections, always refer to the documentation
supplied by the manufacturer of the transmitter/transducer.
Table 2.7: 7955 (D-type) pins for the 4 time period inputs
(Instructions continued…)
Turn on the power 04. Turn on the power to the system. The system goes through a Power-On-Self-
Test (POST) routine that takes less than 30 seconds. When it is finished,
ignore any flashing alarm lights that may appear.
Visit the Wizards 05. Press the MAIN MENU key to visit page 1 of the top-level menu (if you are not
selection menu there already).
06. Press the DOWN-ARROW key several times until the word “Configure” is
displayed on one of the four lines.
07. Press the single-lettered key that is alongside “Configure”. This action selects
the principal configuration menu.
08. Press the ‘a’-key twice to arrive at the Wizard selection screen.
Select the Wizard 09. Press the ‘b’-key. (This action starts the selection process)
10. Use the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW keys to scroll through the list of
Wizards. Halt when “Line Density” is displayed.
11. Press the ‘b’-key to select and start the “Line Density” Wizard.
Proceed with Wizard 12. Press the ‘d’-key to answer “Yes” to the prompt of “Edit stream 1?”
13. Press the ‘b’-key to select “A”. (Prime value always from channel ’1A’)
14. Press the ENTER key
15. Press the ‘d’-key to answer “Yes” to the prompt of “Edit line density A calc?”
16. Press the ‘b’-key and then use the numeric keypad to enter the value of
factor K0 from the correct calibration certificate of the first transducer.
17. Press the ENTER key twice
18. Repeat steps 16 to 17 for factors K1 and K2 (also from the same certificate)
19. Press the ENTER key twice (to skip past the next two prompts)
20. Press the ‘c’-key to answer “No” until the prompt of “Edit stream 2?”
21. Press the ‘d’-key to answer “Yes” to the prompt of “Edit stream 2?”
22. Press the ‘b’-key to select “A”. (Prime value always from channel ’2A’)
23. Press the ENTER key
24. Press the ‘d’-key to answer “Yes” to the prompt of “Edit line density A calc?”
25. Press the ‘b’-key and then use the numeric keypad to enter the value of
factor K0 from the correct calibration certificate of the second transducer
26. Press the ENTER key twice
26. Repeat steps 23 to 24 for factors K1 and K2 (also from the same certificate)
27. Press the ENTER key twice (to skip past the next two prompts)
28. Press the ‘c’-key to answer “No” to all subsequent prompts until the Wizard
exits back to the selection screen. A guide on interacting with a Wizard is in
Chapter 10.
Check on results 29. Press the MAIN MENU key to visit page 1 of the top-level menu (if you are not
there already)
30. Use the DOWN-ARROW key until “Line density” is displayed
31. Press the single-lettered key that is alongside “Line density”
32. Press the single-lettered key that is alongside “Prime line density”
33. Monitor the “Live” calculated value for metering-runs ‘1’ and ‘2’.
Note:
If the digit next to the triangular-shaped mark on the last display line does not
show a “1” or a “2”, use the STREAM/RUN SELECT key until a “1” or “2” appears.
(End of instructions)
Example:
Prime metering-run ‘2’ specific gravity measurements (always from channel ‘2B’), read from a transducer
(3096 or 3098) connected to Time Period Input ‘2’ in a non-hazardous area.
Transducer is powered by the 7955 (isolated 24V supply).
Connect the first 02. Wire the transducer terminals to Time Period Input ‘2’.
transducer to the 7955
(a) 2 wire arrangement:
3096/3098
transducer
330 ohms
1 +24V Power
SIG A
2 Signal +
0V Power
3
SIG B
Signal -
4
3096/3098
transducer
40 ohms
1 +24V Power
SIG A
2
Signal +
3
SIG B 0V Power
4
Signal -
The diagram features connection labels, for example see “+24V Power”,
which will each identify one pin of any pin group in Table 2.8.
Time Period Input ‘2’ pins are listed under the “Input #2 Pin Group” column.
Note: For hazardous area connections, always refer to the documentation
supplied by the manufacturer of the transmitter/transducer.
Table 2.8: 7955 (D-type) pins for the 4 time period inputs
(Instructions continued…)
Turn on the power 04. Turn on the power to the system. The system goes through a Power-On-Self-
Test (POST) routine that takes less than 30 seconds. When it is finished,
ignore any flashing alarm lights that may appear.
Visit the Wizards 05. Press the light grey MENU key to visit page 1 of the Main Menu (if you are not
selection menu there already).
06. Press the DOWN-ARROW key several times until the word “Configure” is
displayed on one of the four lines.
07. Press the single-lettered key that is alongside “Configure”. This action selects
the principal configuration menu.
08. Press the ‘a’-key twice to visit the Wizard selection screen.
Select the Wizard 09. Press the ‘b’-key. (This action starts the selection process)
10. Use the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the list of
Wizards. Halt when “Specific gravity” is displayed.
11. Press the ‘b’-key to select and start the “Specific gravity” Wizard.
Proceed with Wizard 12. Press the ‘c’-key to answer “No” to the prompt of “Edit stream 1?”
13. Press the ‘d’-key to answer “Yes” to the prompt of “Edit stream 2?”
14. Press the ‘b’-key to select “A”. (Prime SG from SG ‘A’ only)
15. Press the ‘b’-key
16. Use the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the list of
options. Halt when “Time Period 2” is displayed
17. Press the ENTER key twice
18. Press the ‘d’-key to answer “Yes” to the prompt of “Edit SG A calc?”
19. Press the ‘b’-key and enter a value for factor K0 from the correct transducer
calibration certificate.
20. Press the ENTER key twice.
21. Repeat steps 19 to 20 for the factor K2.
22. Press the ‘c’-key to answer “No” to the next prompt. Fallback and limits can
be ignored for this example.
23. Answer “No” to all subsequent prompts until the Wizard exits back to the
selection screen. Guidance on interacting with Wizards is in Chapter 10.
Check on results 24. Press the MAIN MENU key to visit page 1 of the top-level menu.
25. Use the DOWN-ARROW key until “Base density / SG” is displayed.
26. Press the single-lettered key that is alongside “Prime SG”.
27. Monitor the “Live” calculated value.
Note:
If the digit next to the triangular-shaped mark on the last display line does not
show a “2”, use the STREAM/RUN SELECT key until a “2” appears.
(End of instructions)
Work through parts 1, 2 and 3 to understand all the physical connections that need to be made to a 7955:
Full configuration details of digital input settings (logic level, mode level, etc.) and details on supported
functions, activated by an external input, are to be found in Chapter 11.
The 7955 response to an active digital signal from an external system is entirely dependent on the
functionality of an application software version. Refer to Chapter 3 for an introduction to the software
release that is covered by this Operating Manual.
Use the “Health Check” facility on the 7955 to monitor what is being output. Refer to Chapter 12 to find out
how to locate this facility using the 7955 menu system. Once located, select the particular type of output and
then select the instance of that output to see what is happening.
Figure 2.3 shows the recommended method for wiring a pulse output to a relay. Work through parts 1, 2 and 3
to understand all the physical connections that need to be made.
Relay
Pulse output 1
Note:
The +24V and 0V could be
taken from a density supply
Pulse output common
or somewhere else on the
instrument.
0V
By default, parameters (menu data locations) are not pre-allocated to pulse outputs. Refer to Chapter 11
for the configuration information necessary to make an allocation.
Default Parameter
Output 7955 D-Type Pin
Output
1 None Allocated SK1/23
2 None Allocated SK1/24
3 None Allocated SK1/39
4 None Allocated SK1/40
5 None Allocated SK1/41
Figure 2.4 shows the recommended method for wiring up one analogue output. Work through parts 1, 2 and 3
to understand all the physical connections that need to be made:
795x
Analogue Output
Signal
Analogue Output
Commmon
Connections:
1. Analogue Output Common Pin
Use SK2/15 for all analogue outputs.
By default, parameters (menu data locations) are not pre-allocated to analogue outputs for transmission
(of values) to one or more external systems. Refer to Chapter 11 for the configuration information
necessary to make an allocation.
Default Parameter
Output 7955 D-Type Pin
Output
1 None Allocated SK2/16
2 None Allocated SK2/17
3 None Allocated SK2/31
4 None Allocated SK2/32
Note: Refer to section 2.6 (page 2.28) to locate the pins of extra mA outputs.
This output permanently functions as a ‘Watchdog’ for indicating the presence of at least
one active alarm:
The NO - Normally Open - contact is energised when there is an alarm.
The NC - Normally Closed - contact is energised when there are no alarms.
Connections:
Work through parts 1, 2 and 3 to understand all the physical connections that need to be
made to the 7955:
1. Power Usage
(a) External power (Recommended)
Status output
HART Communications
Turn to Chapter 16 for a full guide to HART support on a 7955.
See Appendix ‘C’ for a combined list of all connectors and pin designations.
Note: It is not possible for both option boards 79558 and 79559 to be fitted at the same time.
Note: This table is also valid with the HART option board (79557) fitted.
2.6.2 Pin designations for a 7955 with option board 79556 fitted
1. Keep selecting for “NO” (usually by pressing the ‘c’-key) or, if that option is not available, press the
ENTER key until you can start selecting NO.
2. Carry on with (1) until you return to the Wizards menu where you started.
3. Start the worked example again. The configuration you abandoned is cleared from the memory of
the instrument when you begin again.
Figure 2.7 shows how to find all the keys referred to in the worked examples. The diagram shows those
keys referred to in the worked examples, plus some others you may use. Chapter 5 gives a full
explanation of what all the keys do.
1 Down-arrow 6 Back
2 Up-arrow 7 Enter
3 Multi-view display 8 Main Menu
4 Left-arrow 9 Print Menu
5 Right-arrow 10 Stream/Run Select
Turbine flowmeters with single/dual pick-up connections or Ultrasonic flowmeters with a single pick-up
{Metering-run/Stream ‘1’ uses Pulse Input ‘1’, Metering-run/Stream ‘2’ uses Pulse Input ‘2’, etc.}
2
Requires HART add-on board 79559 to be fitted. Provides hardware support for four HART network loops. See Chapter 16.
Individual metering-run totalling: (Normal flow mode and Maintenance mode totals)
Mass, Corrected Volume, Base Volume and Energy flow totals
Note: Other primary DP devices, such as a Dall Tube, can be used if fixed values are known for
the Discharge coefficient, Velocity of approach and Expansibility factor.
Temperature measurement
Metering temperature (for each metering-run or channel).
{from a HART input, PRT-type analogue input or mA-type analogue input}
‘Density loop’ temperature ‘1’ (for metering-run/channel ‘1’)
‘Density loop’ temperature ‘2’ (for metering-run/channel ‘2’)
‘Density loop’ temperature ‘3’ (for metering-run/channel ‘3’)
‘Density loop’ temperature ‘4’ (for metering-run/channel ‘4’)
{from a HART inputs, PRT-type analogue inputs or mA-type analogue inputs}
Pressure measurement
Metering pressure (for each metering-run or channel)
{from HART input or mA-type analogue input}
Energy
Energy value (for each metering-run)
{from ISO 6976 (1995), AGA5 (1981), mA-type Analogue Input or Chromatograph}
Other features:
Gas composition feeds (from Header or from any or from all of the independent metering-runs)
Passwords and security levels
Multi-page multi-view key (for easy viewing of user selected parameters)
Live CO2 and N2 percentages
{from a mA-type analogue input or MODBUS connected Chromatograph}
Analogue outputs for transmitting parameter values to other systems every cycle
Pulse outputs for transmission of normal-mode totaliser increment values every cycle
Data archiving facility - full coverage is provided in Chapter 9
Tariff totals
3.3 Communications
The 7955 can operate as a MODBUS slave. It can:
download a configuration from a PC, DCS, etc.
upload a configuration
monitor random locations in the 7955
interrogate the alarm and data logger buffers
manipulate the alarm and data logger buffers
set random locations with new data
instigate printed reports.
Note: Chapter 7 contains a full guide to Serial Communications and Networking with the 7955.
The standard 7955 contains four circuit boards. The Processor Board and the Power Supply Board are
mounted horizontally. These are connected by plugs and sockets to the Mother Board, which is mounted
vertically at the back of the case. The Connector Board is parallel to the Mother Board to which it is joined.
The Keyboard and Display are wired to the Processor Board. The Connector Board holds the connectors to
which external devices are linked.
Processor
Power Board
Supply
Board
Pin 1 Pin 15 Pin 1 Pin 50
SK4 SK1
Pin 1 Pin 9
Pin 1 Pin 4 Pin 1 Pin 50
SK6 SK3
PL1
Connector
Board Rear Panel
Mother
Board
Keyboard
and display
Figure 3.2: Four independent metering-runs with a single set of instrumentation on each
7 8 9
DENSITY
DENSITY
xxx.x
a
b
4 5 6 Key to illustration
BASE TEMPERATURE
METER VISCOSITY
xx.x
LINE
METERVISCOSITY
xx.x
PRESSURE 1 2 3
TEMPERATURE
SPECIFIC
xxx.x
GRAVITY
i
V2 Outlet Valve (not under 7955 control)
2
F F
F Flowmeter pick-up
T
V1 SG P MT D
V2
C T
DT
P Pressure Sensor
F F
V1 SG P T
MT D V2 MT Metering Temperature Sensor
C
DT ‘Density Loop’ Temperature Sensor
T
DP DT
T
F F
V1 SG P T
MT D
V2 D Density Transducer
T
DP C
C Chromatograph
DT
T
F F
V1 SG P T
MT D
V2 SG Specific Gravity Transducer
T
DP C DT
T
Figure 3.3: Header with four metering-runs. Single set of instrumentation on each run.
7 8 9
Key to illustration
a
DENSITY XXX.X
DENSITY
4 5 6
BASE DENSITY XXX.X
BASE VISCOSITY b
METER TEMP’ATURE XX.X
LINE VISCOSITY 1 2 3
METER PRESSURE XX.X
TEMPERATURE c
0
d
CLR EXP
+/-
V1 Inlet Valve (not under 7955 control)
i
V2 Outlet Valve (not under 7955 control)
1
DTT V2
D
C DP F F F Flowmeter pick-up
P TT
V1
P Pressure Sensor
DP F F
MT Metering Temperature Sensor
P TT
V1
DT ‘Density Loop’ Temperature Sensor
D Density Transducer
DP F F
M
P TT
C Chromatograph
DP Differential Pressure Switch
DP F F
(using a Digital Input 3)
M P TT
3
Also requires set-up of a user-defined limit alarm.
It does not go into detail about how to install any peripheral devices (such as transducers,
computers or printers) which are connected to the 7955. For this information you must refer to the
documentation supplied with these items.
You must follow the manufacturers instructions and safety recommendations fully.
Item Quantity
Note: If you have ordered optional, additional facilities (such as extra outputs) these are already
installed in the machine.
Each switch in the SW2 block must be the same as the corresponding pair of switches in the SW1
block. The 7955 does not work correctly otherwise.
The 7955 is supplied with the DIP switches in these default settings:
• Turbine power: 8 VOLTS
• Input 1 PRT
• Inputs 2-4: 4-20mA
SW1
A 1
B 2
4-20mA C 3 PRT
D 4
If you want to change the DIP switch settings, you must also configure the inputs. This is
explained in Chapter 10. Later models of 7955 have a small hole in the top of the instrument to
allow access to the switches without removing the cover.
After the configuration has been completed (see Chapters 10 and 11), the 7955 should be
switched into the 'secure' mode to prevent unauthorised or accidental tampering with the
instrument's configuration.
Note: The 7955 is always shipped from the factory with the security lock on the front panel set to
the ‘non-secure’ mode.
1. Firstly, referring to this diagram, cut out an aperture in the front panel for each instrument
which is to be mounted on it.
29±1mm
17.5mm
192±1mm
2. Each instrument is mounted in a clamp which is fixed to the rear of the front panel, as shown
in the two diagrams that follow.
3mm
The 7955 unit
101mm Mounting
Clamp
355mm
Location
Moulding Panel with
aperture
Before assembly
3mm Mounting
7.2mm Clamp
Captive
Clamp
Screws (2)
Rear Panel
113mm of 7955
352mm
12.5mm 221mm
10mm
Note: Sufficient clearance is required for plugs and cables at the rear of the 7955
After assembly
You can mount the clamp so that it is fixed permanently or can be removed later, if required. If you
want the clamp to be fixed permanently, carry out Steps 3 - 8. If you want to be able to remove the
clamp, carry out Steps 9 - 12.
Note that, if you install more than one instrument, it helps to support them if you use a Mounting
Strap to link each clamp to the next one, as shown in the diagram:
Back of Back of
instrument instrument
Inside of
front panel Mounting
strap
1. Insert the location moulding through the aperture in the front panel.
2. Working from the back of the front panel, carefully position the clamp over the location
moulding. Remove the Location Moulding and discard it.
3. Slide the instrument through the front panel. Tighten the two captive screws to secure it into
the clamp.
Note that, if you install more than one instrument, it helps to support them if you use a Mounting
Strap to link each clamp to the next one, as shown in the diagram on the previous page..
2. For each D-type connector, pass the connector hood over the cable and wire up the
connector. Secure the hood and connector body together then connect the earth wire to the
hood. Stick an identifying label on to the connector hood.
3. Check the wiring thoroughly against the schedule and wiring diagram.
Refer to Chapter 2 and Appendix C for examples of field transmitter connections and a full list of
7955 pin designations
NOTE: Incorrect earthing can cause many problems, so you must earth the chassis
and the electronics correctly. However, the way in which you do this depends
almost entirely on the type of installation you have and the conditions under
which it operates. Therefore, because these instructions cannot cover every
possible situation, the manufacturers recommend that earthing procedures
should only be carried out by personnel who are skilled in such work.
The chassis of the 7955 must be earthed in all cases; both for safety reasons and to ensure that
the installation complies with EMC regulations. Do this by connecting an earth lead from the stud
on the rear panel to a local safety earth such as a cabinet earth or some other suitable metal
structure.
Crinkle
washers
Thumb
nut
Nut
Plain
Earth washers
lead
In addition to earthing the chassis, you may have to make extra earth connections in some cases,
depending on the installation requirements.
The instrument goes through the following Power On Self Test (POST) routine:
• The display shows a sequence of characters or patterns to prove that all elements of the
display are working. There is a pause of five seconds between each change of pattern.
• The program ROM is checked against a checksum. The display shows how the test is
proceeding.
• Critical data are checked. The display shows the result of this check.
• The coefficients are checked. The display shows the result of this check.
• The battery-backed RAM is checked. The display indicates progress.
• Any saved programs are checked. The display shows the number of programs and their
status. Note that, for a new machine, there are no stored programs.
• If a battery is fitted, its condition is checked and reported.
Note that, when the power is switched on, the alarms may light up. You can ignore these for the
moment - alarms are explained later in this manual. You can now proceed to configure your 7955
(see Chapters 10 and 11).
If the POST fails to complete, switch off the power supply and check all connections and the DIP
switch settings. Then re-connect the power supply. If the POST still fails to complete, switch off again
and contact your supplier.
Some buttons do different things according to where you are in the menu system. For example:
ENTER button This button does nothing until you get into EDIT mode. After you have
edited the data of a parameter, pressing ENTER accepts the changes
and puts the 7955 back into VIEW mode.
c button When you move through the menu structure this selects any menu
choice shown against the button. However, when in VIEW mode,
pressing c lists the display units.
INFORMATION This button does nothing if you are in EDIT mode. At other times, it
MENU button takes you to a special menu that provides information on alarms,
events, flow status and 7955 operating mode.
PRINT MENU This button does nothing if you are in EDIT mode. At other times, it takes
button you to a special menu dealing with data archiving and printing of reports.
The sections that follow tell you more about what the buttons do and how you use them.
UP-ARROW Moves the display up to the previous page of the menu. If there is no
previous page, this button does nothing.
DOWN-ARROW Moves the display down to the next page of the menu. If there is no
next page, this button does nothing.
a - d buttons Each of these buttons selects the menu choice next to it. If there is no
: menu choice next to a button, that button does nothing.
PRINT MENU Takes you to a special menu dealing with data archiving and printing
of reports.
MULTI-VIEW You can define one or more display pages, each showing up to four
items of data, lines of descriptive text, or both. Pressing MULTI-
VIEW shows the first display page you have defined. Use the
up/down arrow buttons to page up and page down.
Note: All other buttons have no effect when moving around the menus.
Line 2: Shows the present value (or text for indirection type).
Line 3: Shows the measurement units (if any). This line is blank if there are no units.
Line 4: The right-hand side shows LIVE, SET, FB (FALLBACK) or FAIL to indicate the state of the
present value shown in Line 2, where appropriate. These indications mean:
LIVE – The data shown is live data received from the transducer/transmitter connected to
the 7955 or calculated by the 7858 rather than a set value.
SET – There is a fixed value for the data; this value does not change unless you enter a
new fixed value or make it live.
FB – A fallback or default value has been used to obtain the value for the data.
FAIL – The live input has failed, most likely due to no transducer/transmitter being
connected or a calculation failed to complete due to incorrect configuration.
An alarm will be raised causing the Input Alarm LED to flash on the front panel. For
troubleshooting this alarm, see chapter 8.
Optionally, Line 4 may also show the parameter’s unique identification number (location ID), which is required when
setting up certain features e.g. Multi-view. You can toggle this information on/off by the ‘a’ button.
‘a’ button On/off toggle for displaying the parameter’s unique identification number
(location ID). This is displayed to the left of the status indication on line 4.
‘b’ button Puts the 7955 into EDIT mode so that you can edit the data on line 2. The
data being edited is left justified whilst in EDIT mode. (See next section)
‘c’ button Puts the 7955 into EDIT mode so that you can select from a list of the units
in which the data can be displayed. The units are left justified whilst in
EDIT mode. (See next section)
‘d’ button Puts the 7955 into EDIT mode so that you can select a status (Set or Live).
The status is left justified whilst in EDIT mode. (See next section)
STREAM / RUN If there is more than one stream (metering-run) and there is a number on
SELECT the far left of display line 4, this button will select another stream (metering-
run). The screen will be refreshed with attributes (value, units and status)
for that stream (metering-run).
LEFT-ARROW Moves the cursor to the left, along the line of text you are editing.
RIGHT-ARROW Moves the cursor to the right, along the line of text you are editing.
UP-ARROW This button changes the character at the current cursor position. It scrolls
forwards through the alphanumeric character set. Stop when the
character you want is displayed.
‘b’ button If you are satisfied with the changes you have made, press b to accept the
changes and go back to VIEW mode. (The ENTER button also does this.)
ENTER If you are satisfied with the changes you have made, press ENTER to
accept the changes and go back to VIEW mode. (The ‘b’ also does this.)
BACK If you do not want to keep the changes you have made, press the BACK
button to abandon the changes and go back to VIEW mode.
‘b’ button If editing the data (on display line 2) and you are satisfied with the
change you have made, press the ‘b’ to accept the change and go
back to VIEW mode. (Note: The ENTER button also does this.)
‘c’ button If editing the measurement unit selection and you are satisfied with the
change you have made, press the ‘c’ to accept the change and go back
to VIEW mode. (Note: The ENTER button also does this.)
‘d’ button If editing the status selection and you are satisfied with the change you
have made, press the ‘d’ to accept the change and go back to VIEW
mode. (Note: The ENTER button also does this.)
ENTER If you are satisfied with the change you have made, press the ENTER
button to accept the change and go back to VIEW mode.
BACK If you do not want to keep the changes you have made, press the
BACK button to abandon the changes and go back to VIEW mode.
PLUS / MINUS This changes the sign of the number. Pressing it will toggle between
PLUS and MINUS signs.
EXPONENT Use this button if you want to show numbers in exponent form.
‘b’ button If you want to accept the changes you have made, press the ‘b’. The
7955 will then revert to VIEW mode. (Note: ENTER also does this.)
ENTER If you want to accept the changes you have made, press the ENTER key.
The 7955 will then revert to VIEW mode. (Note: ‘b’ also does this.)
BACK If you do not want to keep the changes you have made, press the BACK
button to abandon the changes and go back to VIEW mode.
Numerical entry
When you type in a number the first digit appears at the left of the display and each successive digit is then
positioned to the right of the one just entered. A number being entered over-types any existing number.
‘b’ button If you want to accept the changes you have made, press ‘b’. The
7955 will then revert to VIEW mode. (Note: ENTER also does this.)
ENTER If you want to accept the changes you have made, press ENTER.
The 7955 will then revert to VIEW mode. (Note: ‘b’ also does this.)
BACK If you do not want to keep the changes you have made, press the
BACK button to abandon the changes and go back to VIEW mode.
The new date and time is validated. An invalid date and time is causes the message “Bad date/time” to appear
on-screen for a few seconds before the previous content is restored.
Alarm Indicators These are the Input, System and Limit alarms. For more information about
these, refer to Chapter 8: “Alarms and Events”.
This chapter gives you a general tour, showing how to navigate the menu system to find application
parameter screens and other types of screen such as for entering passwords.
Note:
The menus will differ between software versions, and can differ between releases of a
software version.
Chapter 12 features tables showing the routinely used (operator) parts of the menu system
used in your software.
Press the MAIN MENU button once and page 1 of the top-level menu will appear (see Figure 6.1).
The menu system is a tree-like structure that repeatedly branches to lower levels until a final screen is reached.
Page 1 of a top-level menu shown in Figure 6.1. It comprises four menu choices – Flow rates, Flow totals,
Density and Viscosity.
Each menu choice has a description e.g. “Flow rates” and a triangular icon e.g. alongside to indicate the
type of menu choice. A non-filled, triangular icon ( ) indicates the menu choice leads to a lower-level menu
(sub-menu). A filled, triangular icon ( ) indicates the menu choice leads to a non-menu screen.
Each menu choice is associated by position with a lettered button on the front panel - a, b, c or d. For
example, a menu choice on Display Line 1 is associated with the a button. Similarly, a menu choice on
Display Line 2 is associated with the b button, and so on. If there is no menu choice on a display line, the
associated letter button will not do anything.
When you do make a menu choice from a menu using the lettered buttons, the display changes to show the
selected lower-level menu or a non-menu screen.
Figure 6.2 shows an example where pressing the a button will lead to a lower-level menu for “Flow rates”.
Similarly, the b button leads to a lower-level menu for “Flow totals”.
Using the BACK button will return you to the previous menu level, which, in this example, is the top-level menu
shown in the middle.
Where a menu has more choices than can fit on to the 4-line display, the menu comprises of two or more
pages. Vertical arrow icons appear on the left-hand side of display to indicate there are further pages on the
same menu level. Figure 6.3 shows how you can scroll up or down between the pages by using the
UP-ARROW and DOWN-ARROW buttons. These buttons will do nothing if there is no page to scroll to.
At the lowest levels in each branch of the menu system, there are parameter screens. Figure 6.4 shows how
to navigate to the parameter screen for <MeterRun Temperature>. All parameter screens feature a solid,
black, triangular shaped mark in the bottom-left corner of Display Line 4.
Returning to the top-level menu again, there are menu choices that are common to all software versions
(Figure 6.5). In addition, you’ll encounter them in subsequent chapters.
All other menu choices on the Main Menu (e.g. “Flow rates”) are for operators to quickly find final
measurements and other calculation results. Chapter 12 has tables showing these menus in more detail.
Note: This Chapter is not a guide to the MODBUS and MODBUS/TCP protocols
Ethernet Port
An Ethernet port becomes available when add-on board 79550509 2 is fitted inside the 7955, as guided in
Chapter 14. However, you will first need to check that the firmware (software version) release you intend to
use does feature Ethernet functionality. Secondly, a 10Mbits/s MAU – Media Access Unit - adapter must be
attached to a 15-pin D-type socket on the rear panel (see Section 7.4 on page 7.6).
3
The 10 BaseT (10Mbit/s) Ethernet port is compliant with the IEEE 802.3 standard for TCP/IP . This
connectivity option allows you attach 7955 Flow Computers to any local or wide area network that is using
the TCP/IP protocol.
2
When ordering the Ethernet pack containing the add-on (option) board, use part number 79559
3
TCP/IP is the abbreviation for “Transport Control Protocol/Internet Protocol”, which is a suite of communications protocols.
For connection to 100Mbit/s (or higher speed) Ethernet networks, you can connect the 7955 instrument to a
communication hub for the conversion from 10Mbit/s. However, this speed is very misleading. In practice,
average data transfer rates will be much lower – roughly 9600bps – and stretch machine cycle times as
indicated in Table 7.2 and Table 7.3.
The 7955 can be configured to function as an Ethernet Server, an Ethernet Client, or both.
When the 7955 is functioning as an Ethernet Server it can have concurrent connections (channels) with up to
two registered (known) clients. Registered clients must be MODBUS TCP/IP compliant devices, such as
other 7955 instruments, so that they can access the data services available on the 7955 Ethernet Server.
When the 7955 is functioning as an Ethernet Client and it is registered with a 7955 Ethernet Server, it can
use the ‘Peer-to-Peer Lists’ to communicate parameter values/settings with that Server. Similarly, this
Client/Server set-up can be used by remote meter proving functions. (Proving is explained in Chapter 16)
Available on
Data Services Purpose of Data Service
Master/Slave
Allow any (non-7955) MODBUS Master device to perform
Database Access 7955 Slave
read/writes on an individual parameter in the database of a Slave
Retrieval of LIVE alarm information from the Historical Alarm Log.
Historical Alarm Log 7955 Slave
(Events are explained in Chapter 8 of this manual)
Retrieval of LIVE event information from the Historical Event Log.
Historical Event Log 7955 Slave
(Alarms are explained in Chapter 8 of this manual)
Allow non-7955 MODBUS Master device to perform fast
High Speed List 1 * 7955 Slave
read/writes on an arranged group of up to 150 parameters.
Allow non-7955 MODBUS Master device to perform fast
High Speed List 2 * 7955 Slave
read/writes on an arranged group of up to 150 parameters.
Retrieval of software parameter data from any of the data archives.
Archive Access 7955 Slave
(Archiving is explained in Chapter 9 of this manual)
Allow 7955 MODBUS Master to perform read/writes on software
Peer-to-Peer * 7955 Master
parameters in the database of multiple 7955 MOBUS slaves
* This application data service is fully explained in the extra pages between Chapter 7 and Chapter 8
Available on
Data Services Purpose of Data Service
Client/Server
Allow Ethernet Clients to perform read/write operations on an
Database Access 7955 Server
individual software parameter in the database of the Server
Retrieval of LIVE alarm information from the Historical Alarm Log.
Historical Alarm Log 7955 Server
(Events are explained in Chapter 8 of this manual)
Retrieval of LIVE event information from the Historical Event Log.
Historical Event Log 7955 Server
(Alarms are explained in Chapter 8 of this manual)
Allow Ethernet Clients to perform fast read/writes on an arranged
High Speed List 1 * 7955 Server
group of up to 150 software parameters. (Independent of HSL-2)
Allow Ethernet Client to perform fast read/writes on an arranged
High Speed List 2 * 7955 Server
group of up to 150 software parameters. (Independent of HSL-1)
Retrieval of software parameter data from any of the data archives.
Archive Access 7955 Server
(Archiving is explained in Chapter 9 of this manual)
Allow 7955 Ethernet Client to perform read/writes on software
Peer-to-Peer * 7955 Client
parameters in the database of a 7955 Ethernet Server
* This application data service is fully explained in the extra pages between Chapter 7 and Chapter 8
Data stored within a 7955 is represented by one or more 16-bit registers. Where registers contain a
collection of bits, the 16-bit register is still used rather than individual bit (coil) access.
The 7955 supports both single and multiple register access. Each port is configured individually to allow one
type of register access.
Multiple Register Access: ‘write’ command involving a 21-byte character string will specify 11 registers.
Single Register Access: ‘write’ command involving the same character string will specify just 1 register.
WORD '1' WORD '2' WORD '1' WORD '2' WORD '3' WORD '4'
Default Order (16 Bits) (16 Bits) Default Order (16 Bits) (16 Bits) (16 Bits) (16 Bits)
42 C2 3F 0D 40 58 47 E1 9B 90 EA 9E
WORD '2' WORD '1' WORD '4' WORD '3' WORD '2' WORD '1'
Word Swap (16 Bits) (16 Bits) Word Swap (16 Bits) (16 Bits) (16 Bits) (16 Bits)
3F 0D 42 C2 EA 9E 9B 90 47 E1 40 58
MODBUS Slave
The base address of a MODBUS Slave is programmable and is used for accessing the database of
software parameters. It is also possible to configure a 7955 to allow access to further data services
through virtual addressing – consecutive MODBUS addresses offset beyond the base address.
MODBUS/TCP Server
The unit identifier (base address) of a MODBUS/TCP Server is programmable and is used for accessing
the database of software parameters. It is also possible to configure a 7955 Ethernet Client to allow access
to further data services through virtual addressing – consecutive MODBUS addresses offset beyond the
base address.
You do not need to edit these virtual addresses because they are at fixed offsets beyond the programmed
base address. The offsets are illustrated in Table 7.6. A virtual address becomes active when the
corresponding data service is enabled.
Note: There can be different base addresses programmed for each individual port if you require it.
However, the fixed address offsets still apply and will access exactly the same data service.
Unlike the serial RS-232C/485 ports on the 7955, an Ethernet network must never be wired directly to this
Ethernet port. Direct wiring prevents the 7955 instrument from being electrically isolated. Instead, a MAU
(transceiver) device must be attached to socket SK4 and the Ethernet cable is then attached to the MAU.
This can be seen in Figure 7.4.2
Since the MAU will usually not have attachment screws, it is held in place with a slide-lock mechanism that
4
is already integrated into socket SK4 . Once the MAU device is engaged with the socket, the slide-lock is
adjusted to hold it firmly in place.
Depending on the make and model of the MAU device, there will be ports for the various Ethernet plug-in
connectors used by different cable types. Figure 7.4.1 shows a typical MAU that can be ordered with or
without the Ethernet add-on board. This particular device has a port for a RJ45 connector, which is common
for twisted-pair Ethernet cabling.
After successfully connecting the 7955 Flow Computer to the Ethernet network, the next stage is to
configure the communication parameters. This information is in Section 7.7 on page 7.12.
4
Older rear panels have a SK4 socket without an integrated slide-lock mechanism. Flow Computers can be upgraded at our factory.
A simple network can consist of just two devices. They could be an IBM compatible PC and a 7955
connected by a RS-232C ‘straight through’ cable.
PC 7955
Rx Tx
2 SK6/2
Tx Rx
3 SK6/3
5 SK6/5
Signal Ground
PC 7955
Rx Tx
2 SK5/24
Tx Rx
3 SK5/12
Signal Ground
5 SK5/7
RTS
7 SK5/13
CTS
8 SK5/25
Larger and more intricate MODBUS networks are possible. For example, a supervisory system may want
to get flow rates from several 7955 instruments.
A typical MODBUS network with ‘Prover’ 7955 and two ‘Metering’ 7955 Flow computers is shown below:
Tx/Rx+ Tx/Rx+
SK5/8 SK3/1 SK3/1
Tx/Rx- Tx/Rx-
SK5/20 SK3/9 SK3/9
Signal Ground Signal Ground
SK5/7 SK3/5 SK3/5
Objective:
Set-up the basic communication parameters for each serial port with an RS-232 (point-to-point) or RS-485
(multiple-drop) network connection.
What to do here:
Follow these instructions for each port:
1. Navigate to this menu: <“Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/<“Communications”>/<“Ports”>
2. Select the sub-menu for a serial port.
3. Work through this menu data checklist: (Note: Some localised menu searching is required)
4. Repeat all previous steps for each RS-232/485 port that you intend to use.
(End of instructions)
Objective:
Set-up the basic communication parameters for serial ports with an RS-232C connection.
What to do here:
Follow these instructions:
1. Navigate to this menu: <“Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/<“Communications”>/<“Ports”>
2. Select the sub-menu for a serial port with the RS-232C connection
3. Locate the menu data page with a descriptor of “Comms port owner” (or similar)
4. Select an option descriptor
Select the option with “Printer” when the RS-232C device is an ASCII compatible output device, such as a
printer. Otherwise, select either “Master” or “Slave”, depending on which data services are needed.
Objective:
Set-up the 7955 to function as a MODBUS Slave through the port. This will allow for ‘remote’ accessing of
various application data services by a MODBUS Master.
What to do:
Follow these instructions:
1. Ensure that general port parameters have already been configured, as guided in Section 7.6.1
B Table 7.8 shows how the multiple-choice option descriptors relate to enabling access to one or more data
services through a port. A summary of all data services can be found in Section 7.2.2 on page 7.3
D The 7955 Flow Computer can be MODBUS Slaves at different base addresses on each port. It is possible to
have an identical base address on two or more ports when they are not connected to the same network.
None
Alarm
Alarm + List1
Alarm+List1+List2
Alarm + L1+L2+DL
= Enabled; DBM = Database, A&E = Historical Alarm & Event Logs;
HSL = High Speed List; ARCH = Data Archives
What to do:
Decide if the 7955 instrument is to be an Ethernet Server, an Ethernet Client of another 7955
instrument, or both. (Guidance is provided below)
Once you have decided, follow the instructions for configuring the 7955 instrument
Client?
This is similar to the 7955 instrument being a MODBUS Master device. A 7955 Ethernet Client has to be
registered with a 7955 Ethernet Server so it can use ‘Peer-to-Peer Lists’ to update the software parameter
database of that Server. It can also communicate with remote ‘Stream’ Flow Computers during a meter
proving session.
Server?
This is similar to the 7955 instrument being a MODBUS slave device. However, a 7955 Ethernet Server
allows up to two registered (known) Ethernet Clients to access (1) software parameters in the database, (2)
‘High Speed Lists’, (3) ‘Historical Alarm and event logs’ and (4) the parameter archives.
2. Select blue, lettered soft-key alongside the descriptor with “Ethernet server”
3. Work through the parameter checklist of Table 7.9 in the deliberate order shown.
Note: The IP address MUST ALWAYS be the parameter that is edited last of all in this step. Otherwise, a
power cycle is required, followed by re-programming of all the Ethernet server parameters
6. Select blue, lettered soft-key alongside the descriptor with “Ethernet client A” or “Ethernet client B”
7. Work through the parameter checklist of Table 7.10 in the deliberate order shown.
Note: The IP address MUST ALWAYS be the parameter that is edited last of all in this step. Otherwise,
a power cycle is required, followed by re-programming of all the Ethernet Client parameters
8. Locate the menu data page with “Client A configure” (for A) or “Client B configure” (for B)
10. Monitor the <Enet Client status> parameter for a short period
11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 if there is a second client to register
The 7955 Ethernet Server function is now ready to respond to MODBUS TCP/IP requests from the
registered clients (A and B). However, ‘High Speed Lists’ and ‘Peer-to-Peer Lists’ services will require
additional configuring before they can be used. The extra pages after this Chapter will have a full guide to
these services.
Should this 7955 go through a power-cycle, the Ethernet Server re-starts but is free of clients. Connections
with registered clients will need to be re-established using the <Client configure> parameter on the server.
None
Alarm
Alarm + List1
Alarm+List1+List2
Alarm + L1+L2+DL
= Enabled; DBM = Database, A&E = Historical Alarm & Event Logs;
HSL = High Speed List; ARCH = Data Archives
7.8.1 Introduction
There are several types of information that can be obtained from the software parameter database:
1. Parameter value (in base units of measurement)
2. Parameter value status
3. Data size and data type attributes for a parameter (location) value
The 7955 series uses a unique index called a location identification (ID) number. There is a unique ID
number for every stored software parameter. The location ID number is not normally displayed, but
pressing the ‘a’ soft-key when a database variable (menu data page) is displayed, will display the number
on the fourth line.
MODBUS registers are expressed as the database location ID number minus 1. Therefore, a requesting
device will ask for MODBUS register 16 in order to read the data in database location 17.
Notice
Parameter attributes and location identification (ID) numbers of the database with your installed
software is likely to be different to those used in these examples. For a full list of locations, locate
the ASCII text file with the filename extension ‘.MAN’ on your ‘FC CONFIG’ 5 installation disk.
A number of worked examples are provided for each information type. Every example features objectives,
actions, and results. Adapt the examples to suit your requirements.
Objective
For an example, the objective could be to read a value from a specific location.
Action(s)
This consists of one or more ‘read’ and ‘write’ MODBUS protocol commands (framed messages), shown
as a sequence of hexadecimal values. The framed messages need to be transmitted by the MODBUS
Master or Client. Responses are also shown as a sequence of hexadecimal values.
Table 7.13 contains a list of all the abbreviations of meanings that can appear with a sequence. Use
them to distinguish the important elements of the sequence.
Result
This is a brief analysis of the MODBUS response to an action. There may be a reference to additional
information. Some software parameters may have a “No access” security attribute and, therefore, be
permanently unavailable. The response from a command to read such data is shown in Table 7.12.
Receive 0A 83 …
Meaning Slv. Err. …
5
This is a PC-based package for interacting with the 7955. It is available to download from the web site(s) listed on the back page.
Table 7.13: Abbreviations for Interpreting Elements of Transmit and Receive Sequences
Abbreviations Meaning
Slv. The MODBUS slave base address
UI The MODBUS/TCP unit identifier – similar to the slave base address
Err. Error code. E.g. 83 = Error reading / Exception
Fn. MODBUS Function code. E.g. 03 = Read multiple registers
Transact ID Transaction Identifier – this is usually 0 (0x0000)
Protocol ID Protocol Identifier – this is usually 0 (0x0000)
Length Number of bytes that follow (excluding Ethernet packet)
Reg. Cnt Number of registers to read or write / Number of registers read or written
Reg. ID MODBUS Register number
DC Data Count – The number of bytes of data that follow
The Data Data bytes that contain the useful information
Chk sum Calculated checksum - always two bytes at the end
EOT End of text marker
MODBUS/TCP (Client/Server):
Software parameter values are mapped within the first 10,000 registers of the MODBUS register map
directly associated with the unit identifier (UI) – base address – of a 7955 Ethernet Server. Our
examples assume that the server has been configured with a base address (UI) of “09”.
Notes:
Identification (ID) numbers of the software parameters with your installed software may be
different to those used in these examples.
All request and response messages shown here use (1) the ‘default word order’ mode, (2) 32-bit single
precision encoding and (3) multiple read/write register MODBUS functions.
Receive 01 03 04 44 54 A0 00 D7 13
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC The Data Chk. Sum
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 07 09 03 04 44 54 A0 00
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI Fn. DC The Data
Result: The data value part of the reply, 0x4454A000, translates from a 32-bit IEEE number into the
floating-point number 850.50 (in Kg/m3 – base units).
Example 2: Write base density value of 850 Kg/m3 (base units) to location 0787
MODBUS Action: Write to MODBUS register number 0786
Transmit 01 10 03 12 00 02 04 44 54 80 00 53 6A
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt DC IEEE 32-bit data value Chk. Sum
Receive 01 10 03 12 00 02 E1 89
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
Transmit 44 54 80 00
Meaning The Data
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 06 09 10 03 12 00 02
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI Fn Reg. ID Reg. Cnt.
Example 2 Result:
Base density value changes. The 0x44548000, translates from a 32-bit IEEE number into the floating-
point number 850.00 (in Kg/m3 – base units).
Example 3: Read the user alarm summary from read-only location 1579
MODBUS Action:
Read from MODBUS register 1578
Transmit 01 03 01 33 06 2A 53 6A
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
Receive 01 03 16 20 … 20 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 00
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC The Data… A= B= C= D= X= Y= Z= -
Receive 00 DB 96
Meaning - Chk. Sum
MODBUS/TCP Action:
Read from MODBUS register 1578
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 09 03 01 33 06 2A
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt.
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 17 09 16 20 … 20 30 30
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI DC The Data… A= B=
Receive 30 30 30 30 30 00 00
Meaning C= D= X= Y= Z= EOT EOT
Result:
There are 22 (0x16) bytes of returned data. Table 7.14 shows how to interpret the “ABCDXYZ” bytes
are interpreted. The rest of the returned data is padded out with 12 ASCII spaces (0x20).
Note:
The returned data is a character string and is therefore unaffected by the ‘word order’ mode
Alarm State
Alarm Digit Data Comment
(ASCII Char)
A 0x30 ‘0’ 0 = User Alarm ‘A’ inactive
B 0x30 ‘0’ 0 = User Alarm ‘B’ inactive
C 0x30 ‘0’ 0 = User Alarm ‘C’ inactive
D 0x30 ‘0’ 0 = User Alarm ‘D’ inactive
X 0x30 ‘0’ 0 = User Alarm ‘X’ inactive
Y 0x30 ‘0’ 0 = User Alarm ‘Y’ inactive
Z 0x30 ‘0’ 0 = User Alarm ‘Z’ inactive
Receive 01 03 02 00 00 B8 44
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC The Data Chk. Sum
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 09 03 02 00 00
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI Fn. DC The Data
Result:
The returned data value 0x0000 can be interpreted by looking at the following table:
Value Meaning
0x0000 4x5 Matrix Referral selected
0x0001 API Referral selected
Objective:
Select the API referral method for calculating Metering density.
MODBUS Action:
Write value of 0x0001 to MODBUS register 03661 (0x0E4D)
Transmit 01 10 0E 4D 00 01 02 00 01 16 F5
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. DC The Data Chk. Sum
Receive 01 10 0E 4D 00 01 93 36
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
MODBUS/TCP Action:
Write value of 0x0001 to MODBUS register 03661 (0x0E4D)
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 07 09 10 0E 4D 00 01 02
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt DC
Transmit 00 01
Meaning The Data
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 06 09 10 0E 4D 00 01
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt
MODBUS/TCP (Client/Server):
Software parameter states are mapped within registers 30001 to 40000 of the MODBUS register map
directly associated with the unit identifier (UI) – base address – of a 7955 Ethernet Server. Our
examples assume that the server has been configured with a base address (UI) of “09”.
Notes:
Identification (ID) numbers of the software parameters with your installed software may be
different to those used in these examples.
All request and response messages shown here use (1) the ‘default word order’ mode, (2) 32-bit single
precision encoding and (3) multiple read/write register MODBUS functions.
Receive 01 03 02 00 01 79 84
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC The Data Chk. sum
MODBUS/TCP Action: Read MODBUS register 30786 (30000 offset + 0787 - 1):
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 09 03 78 42 00 01
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 09 03 02 00 01
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI Fn. DC The Data
Result: The “00 01” indicates a ‘SET’ status. Refer to Table 7.16 (on page 7.20) for other states.
MODBUS Action: Change status to ‘LIVE’ by writing to 0x0000 to register 30786 (30000 + 0787 - 1)
Transmit 01 10 78 42 00 01 02 00 00 51 75
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. DC The Data Chk. sum
Receive 01 10 78 42 00 01 B9 7D
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
MODBUS/TCP Action: Change status to ‘LIVE’ by writing to 0x0000 to register 30786 (30000 + 786)
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 09 09 10 78 42 00 01 02
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. DC
Transmit 00 00
Meaning The Data
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 06 09 10 78 42 00 01
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt.
Result: Status has changed to “Live”. (See Table 7.15 on page 7.20 for other states)
MODBUS Action:
Read MODBUS register 31578 (30000 offset + 1579 - 1)
Transmit 01 03 7B 5A 00 01 BC FD
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
Receive 01 03 02 00 FF F8 04
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC The Data Chk. Sum
MODBUS/TCP Action:
Read MODBUS register 31578 (30000 offset + 1579 - 1)
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 09 03 7B 5A 00 01
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI Fn. Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 09 03 02 00 FF
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI Fn. DC The Data
Result:
The returned data value, 0x00FF, indicates that there is no status attribute for that location.
See Table 7.16 for other states
Value Selection
0x0000 Live state
0x0001 Set state
7.8.4 7955 Database Information: Size and Type of Software Parameter Value
MODBUS (Master/Slave):
The data size and type of every software parameter value is mapped within registers 20,001 to 29,999 of the
MODBUS register map directly associated with the programmed base address of a 7955 MODBUS slave.
Our examples assume the 7955 MODBUS Slave (port) is configured with a base address of “01”.
MODBUS/TCP (Client/Server):
The data size and type of every software parameter value is mapped within registers 20,001 to 29,999 of
the MODBUS register map directly associated with the unit identifier (UI) – base address – of a 7955
Ethernet Server. Our examples assume the server is configured with a base address (UI) of “09”.
Notes:
Identification (ID) numbers of the software parameters with your installed software may be
different to those used in these examples.
All request and response messages shown here use (1) the ‘default word order’ mode, (2) 32-bit single
precision encoding and (3) multiple read/write register MODBUS functions.
Example 1: Read size and type of data available from location 0787
MODBUS Action:
Read MODBUS register 20786 (20000 offset + 0787 - 1)
Transmit 01 03 51 32 00 01 35 39
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
Receive 01 03 02 07 04 BB B7
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC The Data Chk. Sum
MODBUS/TCP Action:
Read MODBUS register 20786 (20000 offset + 0787 - 1)
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 09 03 51 32 00 01
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt.
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 09 03 02 07 04
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI Fn. DC The Data
Result:
2 bytes of data are returned in the reply: 0x07 and 0x04
* 0x07 = Data Type Code 7 – a 32-bit floating-point number
* 0x04 = 4 bytes needed to represent the floating-point value
Special Note:
For other data type and size codes, refer to Table 7.17 on page 7.22
Example 2: Read size and type of data available from location 1579
Receive 01 03 02 09 16 3F DA
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC The Data Chk. Sum
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 09 03 02 09 16
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI Fn. DC The Data
Result:
2 bytes of data are returned in the reply: 0x09 and 0x16
* 0x09 = Data Type Code 9 – Character String
* 0x16 = 22 bytes – length of character string in bytes
Category Category
Unit Category Unit Category
Code Code
0 (No units) 20 (Not Used)
1 Temperature 21 (Not Used)
2 Pressure 22 (Not Used)
3 Differential Pressure 23 Time
4 Volume 24 Length
5 Standard Volume 25 Speed
6 Mass 26 Fraction
7 Energy 27 Saybolt Universal
8 Density 28 Saybolt Temperature
9 Standard Density 29 Absolute Zero
10 Frequency 30 Temperature Offset
11 Period 31 General
12 Dynamic Viscosity 32 (Not Used)
13 Base Dynamic Viscosity 33 (Not Used)
14 Kinematic Viscosity 34 (Not Used)
15 Base Kinematic Viscosity 35 Expansion Coefficient
16 Flow Factor 36 Youngs Modulus
17 Volume Rate 37 Velocity
18 Standard Volume Rate
19 Mass Rate
MODBUS/TCP (Client/Server):
The data size and type of every software parameter value is mapped within registers 40,001 to 49,999 of
the MODBUS register map directly associated with the unit identifier (UI) – base address – of a 7955
Ethernet Server. Our examples assume the server is configured with a base address (UI) of “09”.
Notes:
Identification (ID) numbers of the software parameters with your installed software may be
different to those used in these examples.
All request and response messages shown here use (1) the ‘default word order’ mode, (2) 32-bit single
precision encoding and (3) multiple read/write register MODBUS functions.
MODBUS Action:
Read MODBUS register 40786 (40000 offset + 0787 - 1)
Transmit 01 03 9F 52 00 02 4B CE
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
Receive 01 03 04 04 07 01 08 BA D0
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC The Data Chk. Sum
MODBUS/TCP Action:
Read MODBUS register 40786 (40000 offset + 0787 - 1)
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 09 03 9F 52 00 02
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt.
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 09 03 02 04 07 01 08
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI Fn. DC The Data
Result:
4 bytes of data are returned in the reply:
* 0x04 = 4 bytes – required to store a 32-bit floating-point number
* 0x07 = Data Type Code 7 – software parameter value is a 32-bit floating-point number
* 0x01 = Status Code 1 – “Live” value state
* 0x08 = Unit of Measurement Category Code 9 – Density units
Special Note:
For interpreting other codes, refer to Table 7.17 (on page 7.22) and Table 7.18 (on page 7.22)
The reply data is unaffected by the ‘word order’ mode
7.9.1 Introduction
Information from the Historical Alarm Log is available to a MODBUS Master through the register map of
Virtual Address ‘1’ (base address + offset of 1).
Warning!
It is not advisable to clear or accept alarms using the front panel while the Historical Alarm
Log is being queried by a MODBUS master. Doing so could result in the MODBUS Master
having an incorrect view of the content.
Worked examples are provided to demonstrate the correct method for (1) obtaining details of an alarm, (2)
accepting that alarm and (3) clearing that alarm
Every example features objectives, request/response sequences, and an explained result. Adapt the
examples to suit your requirements.
Objective
For an example, the objective could be to read a value from a specific location.
Action(s)
This consists of one or more ‘read’ and ‘write’ MODBUS protocol commands (framed messages),
shown as a sequence of hexadecimal values. The framed messages need to be transmitted by the
MODBUS Master or Client. Responses are also shown as a sequence of hexadecimal values.
Table 7.19 contains a list of all the abbreviations of meanings that can appear with a sequence. Use
them to distinguish the important elements of the sequence.
Result
This is a brief analysis of the MODBUS Slave response to an action. There may be a reference to
additional information.
Table 7.19: Abbreviations for Interpreting Elements of Transmit and Receive Sequences
Abbreviations Meaning
Slv. The MODBUS slave base address
UI The MODBUS/TCP unit identifier – similar to the slave base address
Err. Error code. E.g. 83 = Error reading / Exception
Fn. MODBUS Function code. E.g. 03 = Read multiple registers
Transact ID Transaction Identifier – this is usually 0 (0x0000)
Protocol ID Protocol Identifier – this is usually 0 (0x0000)
Length Number of bytes that follow (excluding Ethernet packet)
Reg. Cnt Number of registers to read or write / Number of registers read or written
Reg. ID MODBUS Register number
DC Data Count – The number of bytes of data that follow
The Data Data bytes that contain the useful information
Chk sum Calculated checksum - always two bytes at the end
EOT End of text marker
Example 1 (of 3)
Objectives:
1. Find out how many alarms are in the Historical Alarm Log
2. Retrieve identification numbers for logged alarms
3. Make information on a specific alarm available
4. Get further information about the alarm that was selected in step three
5. Accept the alarm that was selected in step three
6. Clear the alarm that was selected in step three.
Step 1 is to find out how many alarms are in the Historical Alarm Log.
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Count alarms by reading MODBUS register 1,999
Transmit 02 03 07 CF 00 01 B5 72
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
Receive 02 03 02 00 10 FD 88
Meaning Slv. Fn. D.C. The Data Chk. Sum
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 0? 0A 03 02 00 10
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. DC The Data
Result: Reply data indicates that there are 16 (0x0010) alarms in the Historical Alarm Log.
Receive 02 03 02 00 17 BC 4A
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC The Data Chk. Sum
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 0A 03 02 00 17
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. DC The Data
Note:
Identification numbers of presently logged alarms are held in MODBUS registers 0 to 29 of the map for virtual
address ‘1’. The first entry in the Alarm Historical Log is always at MODBUS register 1. For the purpose of
this worked example, one alarm identification number is sufficient.
Step 3 is to make information on an alarm available. This is mandatory for remaining steps.
Receive 02 10 03 E7 00 01 B1 89
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg.ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
Receive 00 17
Meaning The Data
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 10 03 E7 00 01
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. Reg.ID Reg. Cnt.
Result: Reply data indicates that the selection has been made
MODBUS Action 2 of 2:
Check that information is now available by reading MODBUS register 999
Transmit 02 03 03 E7 00 01 34 4A
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
Receive 02 03 02 00 17 BC 4A
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC The Data Chk. Sum
MODBUS/TCP Action 2 of 2:
Check that information is now available by reading MODBUS register 999
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 03 03 E7 00 01
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt.
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 0A 03 02 00 17
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. DC The Data
Result:
Reply data indicates that the current alarm ID is confirmed to be 0x0017.
Note:
A reply of 0x0000 indicates that no alarm has been selected
Step 4 is to get further information about the alarm that was selected in step three. To get information about
another alarm, repeat step three but use another identification number.
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Obtain alarm text length by reading MODBUS register 2000
Transmit 02 03 07 D0 00 01 84 B4
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
Receive 03 03 02 00 12 84 B4
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC The Data Chk. Sum
MODBUS/TCP Action 1 of 1: Obtain alarm text length by reading MODBUS register 2000
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 03 07 D0 00 01
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt.
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 0A 03 02 00 12
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. DC The Data
Result: Reply data indicates that the alarm text length is 18 bytes (0x0012). At present, the length returned
is always 18 bytes. Divide the length by 2 to work out the number of register to request when
asking for the text. Do not assume the length will always be 18 bytes.
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Obtain ASCII alarm text by reading MODBUS register 1011
Transmit 02 03 03 F3 00 09 75 88
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
Receive 02 03 12 53 69 6D 65 70 65 72 69 6F 64 20
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC ‘T’ ‘i’ ‘m’ ‘e’ ‘p’ ‘e’ ‘r’ ‘i’ ‘o’ ‘d’
Receive 6E 6F 20 63 61 6C 00 7C EB
Meaning ‘n’ ‘o’ ‘c’ ‘a’ ‘l’ EOT Chk. Sum
MODBUS/TCP Action 1 of 1: Obtain ASCII alarm text by reading MODBUS register 1011
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 03 03 F3 00 09
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt.
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 15 0A 03 12 53 69 6D 65 70
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. DC ‘T’ ‘I’ ‘m’ ‘e’ ‘p’
Receive 65 72 69 6F 64 20 63 61 6C 00
Meaning ‘e’ ‘r’ ‘I’ ‘o’ ‘d’ ‘c’ ‘a’ ‘l’ EOT
Result: Reply data contains the base alarm message of “Timeperiod no cal”. See next action to find out the
additional character following the base message.
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Obtain alarm text code and qualifier by reading MODBUS register 1010:
Transmit 02 03 03 F2 00 02 65 8F
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg ID Reg Cnt. Chk sum
Receive 02 03 04 00 0B 31 20 65 8F
Meaning Slv. Fn. D.C. The data Chk sum
MODBUS/TCP Action 1 of 1: Obtain alarm text code and qualifier by reading MODBUS register 1010:
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 03 03 F2 00 02
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt.
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 07 0A 03 04 00 0B 31 20
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. DC The Data
Result: 0x000B = A code for the alarm text – not to be confused with the alarm entry ID (from earlier)
0x31 = Represents ASCII character “1” – for metering-point/stream/channel one
0x20 = Alarm Type ‘2’ (2 = Present) + Alarm State ‘0’ (0 = Alarm Not Accepted)
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Retrieve time and date of selected alarm by reading MODBUS register 1009
Transmit 02 03 03 F1 00 08 15 88
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
Receive 02 03 10 00 21 00 06 00 0D 00 0A 07 CE 00 1C
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC The Data
Receive 00 04 01 2D 32 6B
Meaning The Data Chk. Sum
MODBUS/TCP Action 1 of 1: Retrieve time and date of selected alarm by reading MODBUS register 1009
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 03 03 F1 00 08
UI+
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length 1
Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt.
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 12 0A 03 10 00 21 00 06 00 0D
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI Fn. DC 33 seconds 6 minutes 13 hours
Receive 00 0A 07 CE 00 1C 00 04 01 2D
th th
Meaning 10 . Month 1998 28 . (Oct) Wednesday Day of year
Result:
When viewing the Historical Alarm Log entry you would see “28-10-98 13:06:33” on the third line
Special Notes:
The order of date/time character strings in packets are unaffected by the ‘word order’ mode.
Receive 02 10 03 EC 00 01 C0 4B
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
Receive 00 00
Meaning The Data
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 10 03 EC 00 01
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt.
Result: The alarm entry selected through register 999 has been accepted. Information, such as the base
alarm message, remains available until another alarm entry is selected.
Transmit 0B 10 03 EC 00 01 02 00 01 56 CC
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. DC The Data Chk. Sum
Receive 0B 10 03 E7 00 01 C0 4B
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 08 0A 10 03 EC 00 01 02
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. DC
Transmit 00 01
Meaning The Data
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 0A 10 03 E7 00 01
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt.
Result:
The alarm (selected through register 999) has been cleared. However, the conditions that caused the
alarm may still be present and the same alarm would then be raised with a new identification number.
Information such as the alarm text is now unavailable.
Example 2 (of 3)
Objective: Clear all alarms from the Historical Alarm Log
Receive 02 10 07 D1 00 01 50 B7
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
Transmit 00 01
Meaning The Data
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 10 07 D1 00 01
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt.
Result:
All alarms cleared. However, the conditions that caused the logged alarms may still be present and so
the same alarms would be raised again, but with new identification numbers.
Example 3 (of 3)
Objective: Retrieve abbreviated summary of the Historical Alarm Log
Receive 01 03 06 00 00 00 0E 10 00 59 86
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC The Data Chk. Sum
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 08 0A 03 06 00 00 00 0E 10
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. DC The Data
Receive 00
Meaning
Result:
The reply data is interpreted as follows:
0x00 (Byte 1) = Number of system class alarms that have not been accepted = 0
0x00 (Byte 2) = Number of input class alarms that have not been accepted = 0
0x00 (Byte 3) = Number of limit class alarms that have not been accepted = 0
0x0E (Byte 3) = Total number of system class alarms (accepted or otherwise) = 14
0x10 (Byte 5) = Total number of input class alarms (accepted or otherwise) = 16
0x00 (Byte 6) = Total number of limit class alarms (accepted or otherwise) = 0
Note:
The reply data is a character string and is therefore unaffected by the ‘word order’ mode.
7.10.1 Introduction
Information from the Historical Event Log is retrievable through the map of MODBUS registers associated
with ‘Virtual Address 1’ (base address + offset of 1).
Warning!
It is not advisable to clear or accept events using the front panel while the Historical
Event Log is being queried by a MODBUS master. This could otherwise result in the
MODBUS master having an in-correct view of the content.
Worked examples are provided to demonstrate the correct method for (1) obtaining details of an event,
(2) accepting that event and (3) clearing that event
Objective
For an example, the objective could be to read a value from a specific location.
Action(s)
This consists of one or more ‘read’ and ‘write’ MODBUS protocol commands (framed messages),
shown as a sequence of hexadecimal values. The framed messages need to be transmitted by the
MODBUS Master or Client. Responses are also shown as a sequence of hexadecimal values.
Table 7.20 contains a list of all the abbreviations of meanings that can appear with a sequence. Use
them to distinguish the important elements of the sequence.
Result
This is a brief analysis of the MODBUS Slave response to an action. There may be a reference to
additional information.
Table 7.20: Abbreviations for Interpreting Elements of Transmit and Receive Sequences
Abbreviations Meaning
Slv. The MODBUS slave base address
UI The MODBUS/TCP unit identifier – similar to the slave base address
Err. Error code. E.g. 83 = Error reading / Exception
Fn. MODBUS Function code. E.g. 03 = Read multiple registers
Transact ID Transaction Identifier – this is usually 0 (0x0000)
Protocol ID Protocol Identifier – this is usually 0 (0x0000)
Length Number of bytes that follow (excluding Ethernet packet)
Reg. Cnt Number of registers to read or write / Number of registers read or written
Reg. ID MODBUS Register number
DC Data Count – The number of bytes of data that follow
The Data Data bytes that contain the useful information
Chk sum Calculated checksum - always two bytes at the end
EOT End of text marker
Objectives:
1. Find out how many alarms are in the Historical Event Log
2. Retrieve identification numbers for recorded (logged) events
3. Make information available on a specific event
4. Get further information about the event that was selected in step three
5. Accept/Clear the event that was selected in step three.
Step 1 is to find out how many events are in the Historical Event Log.
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Read MODBUS register 11,999
Transmit 02 03 2E DF 00 01 BC EB
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
Receive 02 03 02 00 96 7C 2A
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC The Data Chk. Sum
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 0A 03 02 00 96
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. DC The Data
Result: Returned data indicates that there are 150 (0x0096) events in the Historical Event Log.
Receive 02 03 02 02 D5 3C BB
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC The Data Chk. Sum
MODBUS/TCP Action 1 of 1: Retrieve ID number of the oldest event by reading register 10000
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 03 27 10 00 01
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. Reg. ID. Reg. Cnt.
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 0A 03 02 02 D5
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. DC The Data
Notes: Identification (ID) numbers of recorded events are available from MODBUS registers 10,000 to
10,149. The ID of the oldest recorded entry in the Historical Event Log is at register 10,000.
For the purpose of our worked example, one event identification number is sufficient. In
practice, all identification numbers would need to be retrieved and stored for repeating steps.
Step 3 is to make information available about a specific event. This is mandatory for remaining steps.
MODBUS Action 1 of 2: Make information available for the first event
Write the event identification number (i.e. 0x02D5) to MODBUS register 10,999
Transmit 02 10 2A F7 00 01 02 02 D5 EC DA
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. DC The Data Chk. Sum
Receive 02 10 2A F7 00 01 B8 10
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
Transmit 02 D5
Meaning The Data
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 10 2A F7 00 01
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt.
Result:
Reply indicates that the selection has been made.
MODBUS Action 2 of 2: Check that information for selected event is now available by read register 10,999
Transmit 02 03 2A F7 00 01 3D D3
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
Receive 02 03 02 02 D5 3C BB
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC The Data Chk. Sum
MODBUS Action 2 of 2: Check that information for selected event is now available by read register 10,999
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 03 2A F7 00 01
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt.
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 0A 03 02 02 D5
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. DC The Data
Step 4 is to get further information about the event that was selected in step 3. To get information about
another event, repeat step 3 but use another event identification number.
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Retrieve event text length by reading MODBUS register 12,000
Transmit 02 03 2E E0 00 01 8C E7
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
Receive 03 03 02 00 14 FC 4B
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC The Data Chk. Sum
MODBUS/TCP Action 1 of 1: Retrieve event text length by reading MODBUS register 11,012
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 03 2E E0 00 01
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt.
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 0A 03 02 00 14
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. DC The Data
Result:
Reply data indicates that the event text length is 20 bytes (0x0014). At present, the length returned is always
20 bytes. Divide the length by 2 to work out the number of register to request when asking for the event text.
Do not assume the event text length will always be 18 bytes.
Receive 02 03 14 6D 41 20 4F 2F 50 20 38 20 63
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC The Data... (mA O/P 8 cycle time)
Receive 79 63 6C 65 20 74 69 6D 65 00 3A AD
Meaning The Data… Chk. Sum
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 17 0A 03 14 6D 41 20 4F
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. DC ‘m’ ‘A’ ‘O’
Receive 2F 50 20 38 20 63 79 63 6C 65 20 74 69
Meaning ‘/’ ‘P’ ‘8’ ‘c’ ‘y’ ‘c’ ‘l’ ‘e’ ‘t’ ‘i’
Receive 6D 65 00
Meaning ‘m’ ‘e’ EOT
Result: Reply data contains the ASCII encoded event text. It is unaffected by the ‘word order’ mode.
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Retrieve location ID, event type, and event state by reading register 11,010
Transmit 02 03 2B 02 00 02 6C 1C
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
Receive 02 03 04 00 72 01 01 A9 78
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC The Data Chk. Sum
MODBUS/TCP Action 1 of 1: Retrieve location ID, event type, and event state by reading register 11,010
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 03 2B 02 00 02
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt.
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 07 0A 03 04 00 72 01 01
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. DC The Data
Result:
0x0072 = Location ID 0114
1st. 0x01 = Type (0x00=Auto, 0x01=User, 0x02=Period)
2nd. 0x01 = State (0x00=Pending, 0x01=Accepted)
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Obtain date/time stamp for the same event by reading MODBUS register 11,009
Transmit 02 03 2B 01 00 08 1C 1B
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
Receive 02 03 10 00 04 00 33 00 09 00 06 07 D0
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC = 4 seconds = 51 mins. = 9 hours = June = 2000
Receive 00 08 00 05 00 A0 84 82
th th
Meaning = 8 . (June) = Thursday = 160 . Day Chk. Sum
MODBUS/TCP Action 1 of 1: Obtain date/time stamp for the same event by reading register 11,009
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 03 2B 01 00 08
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 13 0A 03 10 00 04 00 33
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. DC = 4 seconds = 51 mins.
Receive 00 09 00 06 07 D0 00 08 00 05 00 A0
th th
Meaning = 9 hours = June = 2000 = 8 . (June) = Thursday = 160 . Day
Result: When viewing the Historical Event Log entry you would see “08-06-00 09:51:04” on the third line
Special Notes:
The order of this data packet is unaffected by the ‘word order’ mode.
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Retrieve event data for the same event by reading MODBUS register 11,011
Transmit 02 03 2B 03 00 19 7D D7
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
Receive 02 03 32 45 3B 80 00 … 80 53
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC The Data Chk. Sum
MODBUS/TCP Action 1 of 1: Retrieve event data for the same event by reading MODBUS register 11,011
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 03 2B 03 00 19
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt.
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 35 0A 03 32 45 3B 80 00
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. DC The Data
Result: 453B8000 is an 32-bit IEEE number representing 3000.00 (Old = 3000.0) - ignore the other 46 bytes
Special Notes:
The order of this data packet is unaffected by the ‘word order’ mode.
You must use MODBUS function 3 irrespective of whether port is configured for single register access
When the data part of the reply represents an option selection code, the code is in the first byte. You can
retrieve option text by reading 22 bytes from registers 11,013 (old option ) and 11014 (new option)
Step 5 is to clear the selected event from Historical Event Log once all associated data has been retrieved
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Write value of the clearance code (0x0001) to MODBUS register 11,004
Transmit 02 10 2A FC 00 01 02 00 01 EC 9E
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt DC The Data Chk. Sum
Receive 02 10 2A FC 00 01 C9 D2
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Write value of the clearance code (0x0001) to MODBUS register 11,004
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 09 0A 10 2A FC 00 01 02
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. DC
Transmit 00 01
Meaning The Data
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 10 2A FC 00 01
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt.
Result:
Event cleared from the Historical Event Log. All associated data is no longer accessible.
Special Notes:
If you wish to just accept the selected event, use the acceptance code 0x0000
To clear all events in the Historical Event Log, write any 16-bit value to MOBUS register 12,001
7.11.1 Introduction
Information from Archives is retrievable through the map of MODBUS registers associated with ‘Virtual
Address 4’ (base address + offset of 4).
Worked examples in Section 7.11.2 are provided to demonstrate the correct method for (1) selecting an
archive by type, (2) selecting a snapshot in that archive and (3) retrieving values from that snapshot
Objective
For an example, the objective could be to read a value from a specific location.
Action(s)
This consists of one or more ‘read’ and ‘write’ MODBUS protocol commands (framed messages),
shown as a sequence of hexadecimal values. The framed messages need to be transmitted by the
MODBUS Master or Client. Responses are also shown as a sequence of hexadecimal values.
Table 7.20 contains a list of all the abbreviations of meanings that can appear with a sequence. Use
them to distinguish the important elements of the sequence.
Result
This is a brief analysis of the MODBUS Slave response to an action. There may be a reference to
additional information.
Table 7.21: Abbreviations for Interpreting Elements of Transmit and Receive Sequences
Abbreviations Meaning
Slv. The MODBUS slave base address
UI The MODBUS/TCP unit identifier – similar to the slave base address
Err. Error code. E.g. 83 = Error reading / Exception
Fn. MODBUS Function code. E.g. 03 = Read multiple registers
Transact ID Transaction Identifier – this is usually 0 (0x0000)
Protocol ID Protocol Identifier – this is usually 0 (0x0000)
Length Number of bytes that follow (excluding Ethernet packet)
Reg. Cnt Number of registers to read or write / Number of registers read or written
Reg. ID MODBUS Register number
DC Data Count – The number of bytes of data that follow
The Data Data bytes that contain the useful information
Chk sum Calculated checksum - always two bytes at the end
EOT End of text marker
Objectives:
1. Select an archive
2. Find out how many snapshots are stored in that archive
3. Select a snapshot within that archive.
4. Retrieve values from that archive
Step 1 is to select an archive by type and then, optionally, verify it has been selected
MODBUS Action 1 of 2: Select the Interval Archive by writing 0x02 to MODBUS register number 999
Transmit 05 10 03 E7 00 01 02 00 02 31 86
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. DC The Data Chk. Sum
Receive 05 10 03 E7 00 01 B0 3E
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
MODBUS/TCP Action 1 of 2: Select the Interval Archive by writing 0x02 to MODBUS register 999
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 09 0D 10 03 E7 00 01 02
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+4 Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt DC
Receive 00 02
Meaning The Data
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 0D 10 03 E7 00 01
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+4 Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt
Special Note:
Codes – 0x0000 (Alarm Triggered Archive), 0x0001 (Daily Archive), 0x0003 (Manual Trigger Archive)
MODBUS Action 2 of 2: Verify the Archive selection by reading from MODBUS register number 999
Transmit 05 03 03 E7 00 01 35 FD
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
Receive 05 03 02 00 02 C8 45
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC The Data Chk. Sum
MODBUS/TCP Action 2 of 2:
Verify the Interval Archive selection by reading from MODBUS register number 999
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0D 03 03 E7 00 01
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+4 Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 0D 03 02 00 02
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+4 Fn. DC The Data
Result: Reply indicates by type code 0x0002 that the Interval Archive has been selected
Step 2 is to find how many snapshots are stored in the selected archive
MODBUS Action 1 of 1:
Read MODBUS register 39,999
Transmit 05 03 9C 3F 00 01 9B D2
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
Receive 05 03 02 00 07
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC The Data
MODBUS/TCP Action 1 of 1:
Read MODBUS register 39,999
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0D 03 9C 3F 00 01
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+4 Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 0D 03 02 00 07
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+4 Fn. DC The Data
Result:
There are presently 7 (0x0007) snapshots in the selected archive
Step 3 is to select a snapshot from the selected archive and then, optionally, verify it has been selected
MODBUS Action 1 of 2:
Select newest snapshot the Archive by writing 0x0000 to MODBUS register 1000
Transmit 05 10 03 E8 00 01 02 00 00 B0 B8
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. DC The Data Chk. Sum
Receive 05 10 03 E8 00 01 80 3D
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
MODBUS Action 1 of 2:
Select newest snapshot the Archive by writing 0x0000 to MODBUS register 1000
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 09 0D 10 03 E8 00 01 02
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+4 Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt DC
Transmit 00 00
Meaning The Data
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 06 0D 10 03 E8 00 01
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+4 Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt
Result:
Reply indicates that the request was successful
Special Note:
This snapshot selection will not be reflected in archive parameters displayed within the menu system
Other selection codes: 0x0001 (oldest snapshot), 0x0002 (2nd oldest snapshot), etc.
MODBUS Action 2 of 2:
Check on snapshot selection by reading from MODBUS register number 1000
Transmit 05 03 03 E8 00 01 05 FE
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
Receive 05 03 02 00 00 49 84
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC The Data Chk. Sum
MODBUS/TCP Action 2 of 2:
Check on snapshot selection by reading from MODBUS register number 1000
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0D 03 03 E8 00 01
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+4 Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 0D 03 02 00 00
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+4 Fn. DC The Data
Result:
Reply data 0x0000 indicates that the newest (latest) snapshot is selected
Special Note:
This snapshot selection will not be reflected in archive parameters displayed within the menu system
Other selection codes: 0x0001 (oldest snapshot), 0x0002 (2nd oldest snapshot), etc.
Step 4 is to retrieve the newest snapshot value from the first parameter programmed into the archive list
MODBUS Action 2 of 2: Retrieve first parameter attributes by reading MODBUS register 40000
Transmit 05 03 9C 40 00 02 EA 0B
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
Receive 05 03 04 06 04 FF 04 BE 89
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC The Data Chk. Sum
MODBUS/TCP Action 2 of 2: Retrieve first parameter attributes by reading MODBUS register 40000
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0D 03 9C 40 00 02
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+4 Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 07 0D 03 04 06 04 FF 04
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+4 Fn. DC The Data
Result:
0x06 = Data Type ‘6’ – IEEE 32-bit floating-point value
0x04 = Data Size – Parameter value stored in 4 bytes
0xFF = Status – No Status Attribute
0x04 = Units of measurement group 4 – Volumetric units
Special Notes:
The order of this data packet is unaffected by the ‘word order’ mode.
nd. rd.
Other MODBUS registers: 40001 (= 2 listed parameter), 40002 (= 3 listed parameter), etc.
MODBUS Action 2 of 2:
Retrieve value by reading MODBUS register 2000
Transmit 05 03 07 D0 00 02 C5 02
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
Receive 05 03 04 00 0D 46 87 5C 32
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC The Data Chk. Sum
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 07 0D 03 04 00 0D 46 87
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+4 Fn. DC The Data
Result:
0x000D4687 is the hexadecimal value for 870,023 (m3)
Special Note:
nd. rd.
Other MODBUS registers: 2001 (=2 listed parameter), 2002 (=3 listed parameter), etc.
To use this guide effectively, it is essential to be familiar with the 7955 keypad functions, moving around the
menu system and editing. (Chapter 5 can help with this)
The data necessary for configuring a measurement/feature can be found in separate parts of the menu
structure. A notation has been used as a short method of explaining how to move from the present menu to
another menu.
Sometimes, it is convenient to use the MAIN-MENU key (especially if lost). However, use of the BACK-
ARROW key is a much more common method of returning to a menu level.
Note: The menu structure will vary in other software versions and releases.
At present, peer-to-peer communications will operate through one serial port. Configuring another serial
port of the ‘Header’ 7955 to function as a Master device and connecting it to a duplicate MODBUS network
will cause unpredictable results.
(Off) 20 (Off) 20
1
These lists are wholly independent of the High Speed Lists that are set-up on one (or more) 7955 MODBUS slaves for access by
non-7955 MODBUS Master devices.
2
To find out the database location ID for any parameter, navigate the menu system to the applicable menu data page and then
press the ‘a’ soft-key once. The 4-digit database location ID is then displayed on the fourth line of the LCD display.
Each 7955 Slave device is allocated one of the two lists. This is a user-selection and is made when defining
slaves whilst setting up the 7955 Master device.
Once lists are programmed, peer-to-peer operations are commenced on the 7955 Master by a selecting an “Enable”
option (‘soft-command’) through a menu data page. For each correctly listed parameter, a value is then read from
the database, incorporated into a MODBUS ‘write’ command message and transmitted from the 7955 Master device
to the database on designated 7955 Slave devices.
All peer-to-peer lists, in use, are processed in full during a single machine cycle. This is repeated once every cycle
until peer-to-peer operations are stopped by a “disable” ‘soft-command’.
In a network of two 7955 Flow Computers – a Master device and a Slave device, the Master is able to detect all
failures to communicate with the slave and it raises a system alarm. With one slave, every MODBUS (‘write’)
command message is explicitly addressed and that solicits a response from that slave. The absence of a response
after a period (of retries) is how the Master detects a failure 3.
In a network of multiple slaves, MODBUS ‘write’ command messages use an all-slave broadcast address, which
does not solicit any response and, therefore, the Master does not detect a communication failure. In this case, the
system alarm is not raised.
When the system alarm can not be cleared without it re-appearing during the next machine cycle, there are
continuous communication failures. It is advisable to temporarily halt peer-to-peer operations, clear all related
alarms and investigate (and correct) the difficulty before resuming.
MODBUS Logical
7955 MODBUS Commands Link
Master Device
LIST ONE
LIST TWO
LIST ONE
7955 MODBUS
P2 DATABASE
Slave Device 2
RS-485
DATABASE P2
LINK
LIST TWO
7955 MODBUS
P3 DATABASE
Slave Device 3
MODBUS Logical
Commands Link
3
This type of failure is normally the symptom of a faulty/unsuitable cable, incorrect set-up of communication parameters or the
absence of a physical connection to a MODBUS network.
By default, destinations (location IDs) are automatically synchronised with the corresponding sources.
This is ideal for when Flow Computers are running the same software release. However, the source and
destination (IDs) do not have to be the same. For each list, there is a peer-to-peer configuration
4
To avoid the risk of ‘warm restarts’, it is advisable to pre-set the signalling standard – RS-232 or RS-485 – for 7955 serial ports
before establishing the physical connections.
parameter, <PeerLn dest/src>, to stop the synchronising action and enable IDs to be different.
This feature allows 7955 slave devices to run releases other software versions and still get updates from
the Master device. Re-enabling the synchronising will immediately trigger the overwriting of all destination
IDs with the source IDs, losing the destination IDs forever.
Values go directly into the 7955 database of a slave unless serial communications is prohibited. Security
parameters for serial communications are found within <”Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/<”Security”>.
(2f) Inform the 7955 Master about all 7955 slave devices on the network
(Note: Start by programming details of your first slave using parameters within the “Device 1” menu)
Menu Data * Instructions and Comments
Slave device func ** Select the option with “Peer” as the description.
Slv device port no ** Select the serial port that is connected to same the network as the slave
Slv device address ** Use “0” if there are multiple slaves. Otherwise, use the address of the slave
Device word swap Not applicable to the 7955 but may be needed by protocol listening devices
Device precision Use a precision option that is the same as the 7955 MODBUS Master
Device peer list Select the option that corresponds to one of the two peer-to-peer lists
* On-screen version of menu data descriptor includes a digit to identify the directly associated serial port
** Abbreviations: “Slv” = Slave, “func” = Function, “port no” = port number
(End of instructions)
To use this guide effectively, it is essential to be familiar with the 7955 keypad functions, moving around the
menu system and editing. (Chapter 5 can help with this)
The data necessary for configuring a measurement/feature can be found in separate parts of the menu
structure. A notation has been used as a short method of explaining how to move from the present menu to
another menu.
Sometimes, it is convenient to use the MAIN-MENU key (especially if lost). However, use of the
BACK-ARROW key is a much more common method of returning to a menu level.
Note: The menu structure will vary in other software versions and releases.
High-speed list communications facilitate the quick collection and transmission of data from up to 300 user-
nominated parameters. This is achieved by using just a small quantity of MODBUS protocol messages. It
would otherwise require an exchange of hundreds of messages.
The 7955 Flow Computer also helps by collecting all the data of nominated (listed) parameters from its’
database and keeping it ‘local’. This activity is completed during every machine cycle. Keeping parameter
data ‘locally’ allows faster data access, allowing the 7955 to service requests from a Master device as quickly
as possible. Hence, the term of ‘high-speed lists’.
Read about each aspect in the sections that follow this overview and then look at the setting-up instructions
and the guided example.
1
This MODBUS Master device cannot be a 7955 Flow Computer. Direct communication of a parameter value between 7955 Flow
Computers can be performed using the “Peer-To-Peer Lists” feature.
APPLICATION
Direction of flow
(HSL Data)
Serial
Port
7955 MODBUS 1 2 3 50
Slave Device Loc ID: 0661 Loc ID: 0662 Loc ID: 0000 Loc ID: 0000
V 450.015 V 448.011 V - V -
S Live S Live S - S -
LIST ONE
Copying Activity
DATABASE Every Cycle
LIST TWO Loc ID: 0661 Loc ID: 0662 Loc ID: 0663
V 450.015 V 448.011 V -
S Live S Live S -
7955 DATABASE
Each list has the capacity for nominating up to 150 parameters, organised into three blocks of 50 parameters.
Figure 4 on page7b.4 illustrates the three block structure for both lists. The figure shows that blocks are set-up on
an individual basis. Parameters are nominated using their own unique database location identification (ID)
number. Each entry in a block has a dedicated menu data page for editing in a location ID.
The parameter list is primarily for the 7955 slave device to extract data of specific parameters from its’ database
during every machine cycle. All extracted data is stored ‘locally’ for faster and more efficient data access. It is
then accessible only to a Master device by means of MODBUS ‘read’ command messages. Figure 3 on page
7b.4 illustrates the process.
MODBUS ‘read’ command messages must be addressed to either virtual slave ‘2’ or virtual slave ‘3’ through any
MODBUS slave configured port. Virtual slave addressing is explained in Chapter 7.
The register map at each virtual slave is initially in a pre-set format but it can be individually re-organised to suit
applications on the Master device. There are several basic styles available for selection. Follow the links in
Table 1 to get a graphical overview of default register maps for each basic style. You will also get to see how the
blocks of a parameter list are linked to a register map.
2
These lists are wholly independent of the peer-to-peer lists that are set-up on a 7955 MODBUS Master device.
Figure 5: Default Register Mappings for "Old Style" High-speed Lists 1 and 2
50 50 50
50 50 50
50 50 50
BLOCK 'A' SECTIONS BLOCK 'B' SECTIONS BLOCK 'C' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL
(VIRTUAL SLAVE 2 REGISTER M AP) (VIRTUAL SLAVE 2 REGISTER M AP) SLAVE 2 REGISTER M AP)
HSL-1 Grouped
0 50 100
Start Register = 0
Values Values Values
150 49 200 99 250 149
Location IDs Location IDs Location IDs
199 249 299
300 350 400
Types and Sizes Types and Sizes Types and Sizes
349 399 449
450 500 550
Status Status Status
499 549 599
600 650 700
Full Attributes Full Attributes Full Attributes
649 699 749
50 50 50
50 50 50
50 50 50
(3d) View/Edit the number of the first register for each register map section in ‘Block A’ (if applicable)
Note: This step does not apply when the “Old Style” (legacy) register map layout is chosen in step 3c
Table 4 lists descriptors for identifying the menu data pages associated with viewing and editing the
existing register map in ‘Block A’. Alongside the descriptors are default settings for every selectable block
layout style.
3
To avoid the risk of ‘warm restarts’, it is advisable to pre-set the signalling standard – RS-232 or RS-485 – for 7955 serial ports
before establishing the physical connections.
Editing of the start registers is only required when the default settings form a register map that is
unsuitable for the application on the Master device.
Menu Data Default Start Registers Default Start Registers Default Start Registers
(as displayed) (“Old Style” mapping) (“Grouped” mapping) (“Ungrouped” mapping)
L1A vals start reg 1 0 0
L1A locs start reg 10001 150 50
L1A types start reg 20001 300 100
L1A status start reg 30001 450 150
L1A attrs start reg 40001 600 200
Note: Also see Table 5 and Table 6 for the default settings of the other HSL-1 blocks
(3e) View/Edit the number of the first register for each register map section in ‘Block B’ (if applicable)
Note: This step does not apply when “Old Style” (legacy) register map has been chosen in step 3c
Table 5 lists descriptors for identifying the menu data pages associated with viewing and editing the
present register map of ‘Block B’. Alongside the descriptors are the default settings for every selectable
block layout style.
Editing of the start registers is only required when the default settings form a register map that is
unsuitable for the application on the Master device.
Menu Data * Default Start Registers Default Start Registers Default Start Registers
(as displayed) (“Old Style” map) (“Grouped” map) (“Ungrouped” map)
L1B vals start reg 1001 50 250
L1B locs start reg 11001 200 300
L1B types start reg 21001 350 350
L1B status start reg 31001 500 400
L1B attrs start reg 41001 650 450
Note: Also see Table 4 and Table 6 for the default settings of the other HSL-1 blocks
(3f) View/Edit the number of the first register for each register map section in ‘Block C’ (if applicable)
Note: This step does not apply when “Old Style” (legacy) register map has been chosen in step 3c
Table 6 lists descriptors for identifying the menu data pages associated with viewing and editing the
present register map of ‘Block C’. Alongside the descriptors are the default settings for every selectable
block layout style.
Editing of the start registers is only required when the default settings form a register map that is
unsuitable for the application on the Master device.
Menu Data * Default Start Registers Default Start Registers Default Start Registers
(as displayed) (“Old Style” map) (“Grouped” map) (“Ungrouped” map)
L1C vals start reg 2001 100 500
L1C locs start reg 12001 250 550
L1C types start reg 22001 400 600
L1C status start reg 32001 550 650
L1C attrs start reg 42001 700 700
Note: Also see Table 4 and Table 5 for the default settings of other HSL-1 Blocks
(3g) Program the high-speed list with the location ID of each parameter to be made available to the Master
Table 7 lists the descriptors of the menu data pages for programming the ‘Block A’ partition with location
IDs of up to 50 parameters. The menu data pages are easily located within the 7955 menu system under
the <“Block A”> sub-menu.
The menu data pages for programming entries in ‘Block B’ and ‘Block C’ are easily located within the
menu system under the <“Block B”> and <“Block C”> sub-menus.
It is good practice to start with ‘Block A’ before progressing to ‘Block B’. Likewise, start with ‘Block B’
before progressing to ‘Block C’. It is not necessary to fully utilise a block before using another.
When programming in location identification numbers (IDs), it is very important to use the first available
(unused) entry and to not leave gaps. This will avoid inadvertently shortening the list. (See Figure 8)
Programming in a valid location number will immediately result in the number changing to the parameter
descriptor. Editing a location number for a parameter that does not exist is responded with a
“** ERROR **” message appearing briefly and the original setting is then restored.
(End of instructions)
What to do here:
1. Review the 7955 slave configuration
Table 9 and Table 10 (on page 7b.13) show configuration details for this guided example. These checklists
should be used in conjunction with the “Instructions” section on page 7b.9.
MODBUS feature settings for the serial port have been chosen especially to obtain the MODBUS message
sequences that are shown later. For a full list of configuration parameters for serial communications, please
refer to the “Instructions” section on page 7b.9.
For the purpose of this guided example, instructions assume that the Master device is already set-up.
2. Review the MODBUS message sequences
MODBUS message sequences aim to show the best approach to accessing high-speed list parameter data
through a MODBUS register map at a virtual slave address. For this guided example, the “Old Style” default
register map has been used.
Objective(s)
For an example, the objective could be to read a value from two listed parameters.
Action(s)
Actions consist of one or more ‘read’ and ‘write’ MODBUS protocol commands. They are represented in
this documentation as tabulated hexadecimal values in sequence for transmission by the Master device.
Expected replies from the 7955 MODBUS slave device are also shown as tabulated values.
Table 8 is a list of all the abbreviations of meanings that can appear with a sequence. Use them to
distinguish the important elements of the message.
Result
This is a brief analysis of the MODBUS slave response to an action. There may be a reference to
additional information.
3. Experiment
Try out the examples and then adapt them to suit your requirements
Abbreviation Meaning
Slv. Virtual slave address. It is 0x03 for this guided example.
Err. Error code. E.g. 83 = Error reading / Exception
Fn. Function code. E.g. 03 = Read multiple registers
Reg. Cnt Number of registers requested
Reg. ID MOBUS register number
DC Number of ‘data bytes’ in reply
The Data Data bytes that contain the useful information
Chk sum Calculated checksum - always two bytes at the end
HIGH-SPEED
LISTS HIGH-SPEED LIST
HSL BLOCKS
HSL ONE
Block A Block B Block C
HSL TWO
(1a) Objective: Read values from all of the parameters listed in High-speed List One (HSL-1)
Action 1 of 3: Read two registers starting from MODBUS register 1 (Values Section, ‘Block A’)
3
Values expected in the reply are 3600.125 and 3546.123, both in base units of m /hour.
Transmit 03 03 00 01 00 02 94 29
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk Sum
Receive 03 03 08 45 61 02 00 45 5D A1 F8 D7 88
Meaning Slv. Fn. D.C. The Data … The Data … The Data Chk sum
Result:
• 45610200 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 3600.125 (in base units of m3/hour)
• 455DA1F8 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 3546.123 m3/hour
Note:
When using the single register mode, the number of registers to be read is the same as the number of
parameters to be read from the associated block. This happens to be two for ‘Block A’ in this example.
Action 2 of 3: Read four registers starting from MODBUS register 1001 (Values Section, ‘Block B’)
Transmit 03 03 03 E9 00 04 94 5B
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. sum
Receive 03 03 10 46 18 3C 00 3F 19 0A B1 46 15
Meaning Slv. Fn. D.C. The Data … The Data … The Data … The
Receive F4 00 3E E3 40 94 24 24
Meaning Data … The Data … … Chk. Sum
Result:
1st. Volume Flow Total… (Integer + Fraction)
• 46183C00 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 9743 (in base units of m3/hour)
• 3F190AB1 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 0.59781936 (in base units of m3/hour)
nd
2 . Volume Flow Total… (Integer + Fraction)
• 4615F400 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 9597 (in base units of m /hour)
3
• 3EE34094 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 0.44385207 (in base units of m3/hour)
Note:
Fractional values of a rollover total are always accurate to 8 decimal places irrespective of the selected display
format for volume categorised data.
Action 3 of 3: Read 1 register starting from MODBUS register 2001 (Values Section, ‘Block C’)
Transmit 03 03 07 D1 00 01 D4 A5
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk Sum
Receive 03 83 02 61 31
Meaning Slv. Fn. D.C. Chk sum
(1b) Objective: Write new fixed values to the two known parameters listed under ‘Block A’ of High-speed List One
Block A Decimal Value Decimal Value Block A Decimal Value Decimal Value
Entry 1 (Before Update) (After Update) Entry 2 (Before Update) (After Update)
IV rate 0 3664 GV rate 0 3712
Abbreviations: “IV” = Indicated Volume, “GV” = Gross Volume
Action 1 of 1: Write values to two registers starting from MODBUS register 1 (Values Section, ‘Block A’)
• 45650000 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 3664
• 45680000 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 3712
Transmit 03 10 00 01 00 02 08 45 65 00 00 45 68 00
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. DC The Data … The Data … The
Transmit 00 4C 7E
Meaning Data Chk Sum
Receive 03 10 00 01 00 02 11 EA
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk Sum
Result:
• Indicated Volume and Gross Volume rates are updated with new fixed values.
Notes:
• The new parameter values are expected by the slave device to be in base measurement units of m /hour.
3
To find out the base units for other parameter categories, turn to Chapter 9.
(2a) Objective: Read the location IDs of the first three ‘entry’ configuration parameters of Block B
Action 1 of 1: Read three registers starting from MODBUS register 11001 (Loc. IDs Section, ‘Block B’)
Transmit 03 03 2A F9 00 03 DC 00
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk Sum
Receive 03 03 06 09 9B 09 9C 09 9D 59 1B
Meaning Slv. Fn. D.C. The data … The Data … Chk sum
Result:
• 099B is the 16-bit hexadecimal representation for 2459 – the database location ID of <”DBM list 1B ptr 1”>
• 099C is the 16-bit hexadecimal representation for 2460 – the database location ID of <”DBM list 1B ptr 2”>
• 099D is the 16-bit hexadecimal representation for 2460 – the database location ID of <”DBM list 1B ptr 3”>
Note:
2AF9 (Reg. ID) is the hexadecimal representation for 11001
(2b) Objective: Add an entry to ‘High-speed List 1’ via the parameter list of Block C
Action 1 of 1: Write the database location ID of <”Gross std vol rate”> into the database location of
<”DBM list1C ptr 1”> (ID: 2509)
• 09CC is the 16-bit hexadecimal representation for 2508 – the MODBUS address for <”DBM list1C ptr 1”>
• 029D is the 16-bit hexadecimal representation for 0669 – the database location ID of <”Gross std vol rate”>
Transmit 01 10 09 CC 00 01 02 02 9D EE 55
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. DC The Data Chk Sum
Receive 01 10 09 CC 00 01 C2 6A
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk Sum
Note:
• At present, the remote manipulation of a parameter list is achieved through the register map for the 7955
database (at the base slave address). See Chapter 7 for further examples of accessing the database.
(3a) Objective: Read data type and size of a value from all parameters listed in ‘Block A’ of High-speed List One
Action 1 of 1: Read two registers starting from MODBUS register 20001 (Types Section, ‘Block A’)
Transmit 03 03 4E 21 00 02 82 CB
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk Sum
Receive 03 03 04 07 04 07 04 9A B5
Meaning Slv. Fn. D.C. The Data … … Chk Sum
Result:
• 0704: “07” = 32-bit floating-point data type, “04” = 4 bytes for representing the value
Note:
• See Table 12 on page 7b.17 when interpreting other codes for the data type and size
(4a) Objective: Read value status from each parameter listed in ‘Block A’ of High-speed List One
Action 1 of 1: Read two registers starting from MODBUS register 30001 (Status Section, ‘Block A’)
Transmit 03 03 75 31 00 02 8E 2A
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk Sum
Receive 03 03 04 00 01 00 00 88 33
Meaning Slv. Fn. D.C. The Data … … Chk Sum
Result:
There are four bytes of parameter data returned: 0x0001 and 0x0002
• 0x0001 = “Set” value status
• 0x0000 = “Live” value status
Note:
For the interpretation of other codes, refer to Table 11 on page 7b.17.
Now
With the flexibility of the new high-speed lists, it is now possible to get most important data by simulating one
of the other manufacturers. In the future, Wonderware will support the 7955 directly.
For now, here is how you can read floating-point data types and long integers (totals in their most accurate
representation) using Wonderware:
<Configure>/<Other parameters>/<Communications><Ports>
<Port X>/<Modbus parameters>/<Slave features> Ö “Alarm+L1+L2+Dlog” (recommended)
<Port X>/<Modbus parameters>/<Long reg access> Ö “Single register”
<Port X>/<Modbus parameters>/<Real precision> Ö “Single precision”
With this arrangement floating-point values can be read from ‘high-speed list 1’ and long integers read
from ‘high-speed list 2’. If you need to be able to read ‘floats’ and ‘longs’ from the same high-speed list,
you will need to choose the “Ungrouped” style of register map and re-organise the start registers for each
block section as appropriate. You will not be able to read ‘floats’ and ‘longs’ from within the same block,
as they require different address ranges.
(2b) Select the MODBUS slave address - the base address + 2 (for high-speed list 1)
(2c) Select “Omni” as the ‘Slave device type” – Omni’s arrangement is the only one currently which can
be used with the 7955.
You should now be able to use the I/O server via, for example, In Touch.
7C.1 Overview
Chapter 7C is a guide to the software support for 16-bit only MODBUS protocol communications, which
utilises the Gould List in this 7955 menu:
This feature is required when a MODBUS Master 1 is to exchange 16-bit 2 data with one or more 7955 Flow
Computers operating as a MODBUS Slaves, where all are attached to the same MODBUS network.
Note: For MODBUS network topologies and terminal connections, refer to main Chapter 7.
7C.1.1 Groundwork
On the 7955 Flow Computer, integer and floating-point values of parameters (locations) are represented by
16-bits, 32-bits or 64-bits, depending on the data type of the value – see Table 7c.1 and Figure 7c.2 (below).
Note: Data representation theory is outside the scope of this guide – refer to a data communications book.
64-bits (4 Words) = 16-bits (Word) 16-bits (Word) 16-bits (Word) 16-bits (Word)
16-bit communications is unsuitable for accessing a value that is a character string (11x16-bits) or a value
that is a time and date (8x16-bits) – they are therefore not included in Table 7c.1 or this guide.
1
This MODBUS Master device cannot be a 7955 Flow Computer. Direct communication of a parameter value between 7955 Flow
Computers can be performed using the “Peer-To-Peer” communications feature.
2
16 binary bits e.g. 01010101 01010101
The ‘16-bit value’ may be scaled (x10, x100 or x1000) before transmission to the MODBUS Master and
de-scaled (÷10, ÷100 or ÷1000) before being saved to an application parameter (location).
This optional feature is explained in Section 7C.1.9.
In addition, serial port parameters for selecting Single or Multiple (Long) Register Access, MODBUS Word
Order, Single or Double Precision and Totals format affect 16-bit communications – see Section 7C.1.13
for details of their effect.
7C.1.3 16-bit segments (Gould Registers) when using Multiple Register Access
Figure 7c.3 shows how a 16-bit, 32-bit and 64-bit parameter value is viewed as one or more 16-bit
segments. When using Multiple Register Access, each segment is a Gould Register that can be
individually read or written if set-up in a Gould List.
16-bits (1 Word) 16-bits (1 Word) 16-bits (1 Word) 16-bits (1 Word) 64-bit Parameter
(Database Location)
Gould Register Gould Register Gould Register Gould Register
Note: A floating-point number is either single-precision (32-bit) or double-precision (64-bit), depending on the
Real Precision option selected for the serial port.
Figure 7c.3: 16-bit segments (Gould Registers) when using Multiple Register Access
It follows then that the Gould Register access for a 32-bit (or 64-bit) parameter is slightly different to
accessing a 16-bit parameter.
In Figure 7c.4, a 16-bit value is written, as a full value, to the only 16-bit segment (Gould Register) of a
16-bit parameter. Similarly, a whole value can be read from the same Gould Register.
3
The 7955 will prevent writing to parameters (locations) dedicated to incremental totals, such as the Corrected Volume flow total.
Figure 7c.4: Accessing the full value of a 16-bit parameter in one step
In Figure 7c.5, a 16-bit value is read from the first 16-bit segment (Gould Register) of a 32-bit parameter. A
further message (request) is required to read to the second 16-bit segment (Gould Register). With values
from both segments retrieved, the full value can be assembled by the MODBUS Master.
The same principle applies to 64-bit parameters, except there are four of the 16-bit segments.
Note:
More than one Gould Register can be accessed at the same time if the 7955 Gould List is set-up appropriately.
7C.1.4 16-bit segments (Gould Registers) when using Single Register Access
Figure 7c.6 shows how a 16-bit, 32-bit and 64-bit parameter value is viewed as one or more 16-bit
segments. When using Single Register Access, all 16-bit segments – the full value – equate to one Gould
Register that can be individually read or written if set-up in a Gould List.
Therefore, reading a Gould Register will retrieve the full value, irrespective of the parameter data type.
Similarly, a full value can be written to the Gould Register.
Note: More than one Gould Register can be accessed at the same time if the 7955 Gould List is set-up
appropriately.
16-bits (1 Word) 16-bits (1 Word) 16-bits (1 Word) 16-bits (1 Word) 64-bit Parameter
(Database Location)
Gould Register
Note: A floating-point number is either single-precision (32-bit) or double-precision (64-bit), depending on the
Real Precision option selected for the serial port.
Figure 7c.6: 16-bit segments (Gould Registers) when using Single Register Access
The 7955 Gould List can be set-up for Multiple Register Access or Single Register (or a mixture if using
more than one serial port.)
Figure 7c.7 shows an example 7955 Gould List set-up for Multiple Register Access. There are 3 entries
populated with user-entered details.
Gould List entries 1 and 2 are set-up for accessing the first 16-bit segment (Gould Register 40001) and
final 16-bit segment (Gould Register 40002) of a 32-bit parameter (location), perhaps a flow rate.
Since the full value of parameter 0144 is represented in 32-bits, the Word Offset option must be used to
select which 16-bit segment is associated with the nominated Gould Register address.
Word Offset 0 selects first 16-bit segment. Word Offset 1 selects the final 16-bit segment. (Word Offset 2
and 3 are applicable only for a 64-bit parameter.)
Gould List entry 3 is set-up for accessing a 16-bit parameter, but there is a deliberate mistake. The Word
Offset is 1, which is incorrect since there is no second 16-bit segment in a 16-bit parameter. Likewise, Word
Offsets 2 and 3 would also be incorrect as there are no third and fourth segments. To correct the error, Word
Offset 0 must be selected.
Gould List entry 50 is not in use and shows the factory default settings. Note: A location ID of 0 (“Off”) will
terminate the 7955 Gould List – do not skip entries in the 7955 Gould List.
DATABASE
Word Offset: 1
Scaling: No scaling
Note: A floating-point number (e.g. 459.21) is either single-precision (32-bit) or double-precision (64-bit),
depending on the Real Precision option selected for the serial port.
Figure 7c.8 shows an example 7955 Gould List set-up for Single Register Access. Again, there are 3
entries populated with user-entered details.
Gould List entry 1 is set-up for accessing the full value – all 16-bit segments – of Gould Register 40001.
Since the full value of parameter 0144 is read in one go, the Word Offset option is not used and it is kept set
to the factory default of Word Offset 0.
Gould List entry 2 is set-up for accessing the full value – all 16-bit segments – of Gould Register 40002.
Again, since the full value of parameter 0167 is read in one go, the Word Offset option is not used and it is
kept set to the factory default of Word Offset 0.
Since Gould Register 40001 and 40002 have addresses in sequence and are in consecutive entries, they
can both be read at the same time.
Gould List entry 3 is set-up for accessing the full value – a single 16-bit segment – of Gould Register 50001.
Again, the Word Offset option is not used and it is kept set to the factory default of Word Offset 0.
Gould Register 40002 and 50001 are in consecutive entries but the addresses are not in sequence; they
cannot both be read at the same time.
Gould List entry 50 is not in use and shows the factory defaults.
Note: A location ID of 0 (“Off”) will terminate the 7955 Gould List – do not skip entries in the 7955 Gould List.
DATABASE
Word Offset: 0
Location ID: 0167
Scaling: No scaling
Value 2359.54
Note: A floating-point number (e.g. 459.21) is either single-precision (32-bit) or double-precision (64-bit),
depending on the Real Precision option selected for the serial port.
Attempts to enter an address outside this range will be responded to with an “** ERROR **” message, on-
screen for a few seconds, and the original setting is then restored.
When accessing more than one Gould Register at a time, the user-entered addresses must be in sequence
(e.g. 1300, 1301, etc) and in consecutive entries in the Gould List.
When accessing one Gould Register at a time, the addresses of consecutive entries in the Gould List do not
have to be in sequence (e.g. 1300, 1400, etc.)
With Multiple Register Access, each Gould Register equates to a 16-bit segment of data. Therefore, you
select the segment that will equate to the register.
Word Offset 0
The Gould Register is mapped to the only 16-bit segment of a 16-bit parameter value or it is mapped to the
first 16-bit segment of a 32-bit or 64-bit parameter value.
Word Offset 1
The Gould Register is mapped to the second 16-bit segment of a 32-bit or 64-bit parameter value.
Word Offset 2
The Gould Register is mapped to the third 16-bit segment of a 64-bit parameter value.
Word Offset 3
The Gould Register is mapped to the fourth 16-bit segment of a 64-bit parameter value.
Note: With Single Register Access, each Gould Register equates to the whole value (all 16-bit segments).
If selected for a Gould Register, the factor is applied, therefore converting it into a whole number (integer)
before or transmitted or vice versa if being saved.
If no scaling factor is to be applied, select “No Scaling” – this is the factory default for each Gould List entry.
The purpose of this feature is for systems that cannot handle float conversions – they may ask for
temperature x 100 (as an integer). You cannot get scaled values as a floating-point value.
To access the registers, it must transmit a read or write MODBUS protocol message addressed to the
7955 MODBUS slave. The slave will then reply with a MODBUS protocol message.
Note: Write messages can be broadcast to all 7955 MODBUS slaves with a MODBUS slave address of 0.
Gould registers can be accessed through any serial port configured to be a MODBUS slave and the Gould List
access is enabled by the port MODBUS feature parameter. (Full configuration details are in Section 7C.2.)
06 03 9C 41 00 02 X X
Figure 7c.9: MODBUS message for reading from Gould Registers 40001 and 40002
Slave Address – On the 7955, this is a Virtual Slave address: Base Slave Address +5 (= 06 if factory default)
Function – 03 (0x03) is the function code for MODBUS read messages.
G. Reg. – Address of Gould Register, e.g. 40001 (Decimal) or 0x9C41 (Hexadecimal)
# of Reg. – Specify number of Gould Registers to be read, e.g. 0002 (Decimal and Hexadecimal)
EC – Error check number, generated is accordance with the MODBUS specification
LRC – Longitudinal redundancy check number, generated in accordance with the MODBUS specification
Slave Funct. G. Reg. G. Reg. Quantity Byte 16-bit data 16-bit data EC LRC
Add. (H.O.) (L.O.) Count
Figure 7c.10: MODBUS message for writing to Gould Registers 40001 and 40002
Slave Address – On the 7955, this is a Virtual Slave address: Base Slave Address +5 (= 06 if factory default)
Function – 16 (0x10) is the function code for MODBUS write messages.
Gould Register – Address of Gould Register, e.g. 40001 (Decimal) or 0x9C41 (Hexadecimal)
Quantity – Specify number of Gould Registers to be write to, e.g. 2 for 40001 (0x9C41) and 40002 (0x9C42)
Byte Count – Specify number of bytes of data e.g. 0x02 for a 16-bit value, 0x04 for two 16-bit values, etc.
16-bit data – Up to fifty 16-bit IEEE values, dependent on Quantity field
EC – Error check number, generated is accordance with the MODBUS specification
LRC – Longitudinal redundancy check number, generated in accordance with the MODBUS specification
Figure 7c.11 shows the effect of the Default Order option and Word Swap option for single-precision (32-
bit) and double-precision (64-bit) values. For 64-bit values, the second double Word is the most significant.
WORD '1' WORD '2' WORD '1' WORD '2' WORD '3' WORD '4'
Default Order (16 Bits) (16 Bits) Default Order (16 Bits) (16 Bits) (16 Bits) (16 Bits)
42 C2 3F 0D 40 58 47 E1 9B 90 EA 9E
WORD '2' WORD '1' WORD '4' WORD '3' WORD '2' WORD '1'
Word Swap (16 Bits) (16 Bits) Word Swap (16 Bits) (16 Bits) (16 Bits) (16 Bits)
3F 0D 42 C2 EA 9E 9B 90 47 E1 40 58
<Real Precision>
Floating-point values (e.g. flow rates) are made available as a 32-bit IEEE (single-precision) number or as a
64-bit IEEE (double-precision) number. The precision level is individually selectable for each serial port.
<Total Format>
Each incremental total can be read as two separate 32-bit integers or as a single floating-point value,
depending on the option selected. The format is individually selectable for each serial port.
When a flow total value (e.g. 2983.54) is to be read as a 32-bit integer, there is one parameter (location)
with the “2953” and another parameter (location) with the “54”.
When a flow total value (e.g. 2983.54) is to be read as a floating-point value, there is just one parameter
(location) with the “2953.54”.
1. Ensure that 7955 Flow Computers and MODBUS Maste device are already interconnected to form a
MODBUS network. (Guidance on the necessary RS-232 or RS-485 wiring 4 is in the main Chapter 7.)
(2b) Select a Serial Port menu, as appropriate for the serial port connected to the MODBUS network.
(2c) Configure the basic communication parameters for that serial port, as shown in Table 7c.2.
(Some localised menu navigation is required to find the parameter screen.)
(3c) Configure each list entry, as guided in Table 7c.3. Start with configuring Entry 1, then configure Entry
2, and so forth. Avoid skipping an entry, since the list is terminated by a location ID of 0.
(End of instructions)
The MODBUS Master can read and write to the Gould Registers.
4
To avoid the risk of flow computer restarts, it is advisable to pre-set the signalling standard – RS-232 or RS-485 – for 7955 serial
ports before establishing the physical connections.
Comms port owner Select the multiple-choice option with “Modbus slave”. “MODBUS slave”
Select a rate that will be the same for the MODBUS Master
Port Baud rate “19200”
device and all 7955 MODBUS slave devices.
Select a character transmission format (as agreed for the
Port char format “8 bits none 1 stop”
MODBUS network). If unsure, keep the factory default.
Select either “None” or “XonXoff” unless the cable supports
Port handshaking “None”
“CTS/RTS”. (If unsure, keep the factory default.)
Port RS232 / 485 *** Select signalling standard for the MODBUS network ** “RS 232”
P MODB slave add Edit the Base Slave Address of this slave. 1
P Modbus features Select the multiple-choice option that includes “Gou“ (Gould) “None”
P long reg access Choose single or multiple Gould Register access. “Multiple registers”
List1 Gould reg Enter a numeric address for the Gould Register e.g. 40001. 0
What to do here:
1. Ensure that the 7955 Flow Computer is suitably configured as guided in Section 7C.2.
In the examples, MODBUS message sequences aim to show the how to read from Gould Registers
and write to Gould Registers. Every example features an objective, an action and a result
Objective(s)
For an example, the objective could be to read a 16-bit parameter value.
Action(s)
Actions consist of one or more MODBUS protocol commands. They are represented in this
documentation as tabulated hexadecimal values in sequence for transmission by the Master device.
Expected responses from the 7955 MODBUS slave device are also shown as tabulated values.
Table 7c.6 is a list of all the abbreviations of meanings that can appear with a sequence. Use them
to distinguish the important elements of the message.
Result
This is a brief analysis of the MODBUS slave response to an action. Note: Values are
communicated in base units, which may not be the same as the displayed units – see Table 7c.7.
3. Experiment
Try out the examples and then adapt them to suit your requirements.
Table 7c.6: Abbreviations for Interpreting Elements of Transmit and Response Sequences
Abbreviation Meaning
Slv. Base Slave Address +5. It is 0x06 for the examples.
Err. Error code. E.g. 83 = Error reading / Exception
Fn. Function code. E.g. 03 = Read Gould Register(s)
Reg. Cnt Quantity of Gould Registers
Reg. ID Gould Register number
D.C. Number of ‘data bytes’ in reply
Data Data byte
EC & LRC Calculated checksum, which is two bytes at the end
This example involves reading two Gould Registers 1300 and 1301; this is to get the two lots of 16-bit data.
Importantly, they are given consecutive entries in the Gould List.
Action
Read Gould Registers 1300 and 1301
Transmit 06 03 05 14 00 02 85 74
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. EC LRC
Response 06 03 04 42 0C 00 00 58 88
Meaning Slv. Fn. D.C. Data Data Data Data EC LRC
Result
• 420C0000 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 35.0 (in base units of °C)
• 420C is the 16-bit data from Gould Register 1300 and 0000 is the 16-bit data from Gould Register 1301
Objective:
Read Meter-run Temperature parameter (database location ID: 0666) which has a 32-bit (single-precision)
floating-point value.
This is similar to example 1, except Gould Registers 1300 and 1301 are not given consecutive entries in
the Gould List. Subsequently, there is an error response transmitted by the 7955 Flow Computer.
Action
Read Gould Registers 1300 and 1301
Transmit 06 03 05 14 00 02 85 74
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk Sum
Response 06 83 02 71 30
Meaning Slv. Fn. D.C. Chk sum
Result
• An error reponse (code 83) is given since Gould Registers 1300 and 1301 are not given consecutive
entries in the Gould List.
Objective:
Read Meter-run Temperature parameter (database location ID: 0666) which has a 32-bit (single-precision)
floating-point value.
This is similar to Example 1, except there is an attempt to read beyond Gould Register 1300 and 1301 by
using the Word Offset 2 option and Word Offset 3 option.
Subsequently, there is an error response transmitted by the 7955 Flow Computer, since the parameter
does not have a 64-bit (double-precision) floating-point value.
Action
Read Gould Registers 1300 and 1301
Transmit 06 03 05 14 00 02 85 74
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. EC LRC
Response 06 83 02 71 30
Meaning Slv. Fn. D.C. EC LRC
Result
• An error response (code 83) is given since parameter does not have a 64-bit (double-precision)
floating-point value.
This example, which is a variation of Example 1, involves reading scaled (x100) values from two Gould
Registers 1300 and 1301.
Action
Read Gould Registers 1300 and 1301
Transmit 06 03 05 14 00 02 85 74
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. EC LRC
Response 06 03 04 00 00 0D AC 88 1E
Meaning Slv. Fn. D.C. Data Data Data Data EC LRC
Result
• 00000DAC is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 3500.0 (in base units of °C)
Importantly, and unlike previous examples, single register access is used – only one Gould Register is required
to get the full value (all 16-bit segments). Therefore, the Word Offset option has no effect.
Action 1
Read whole temperature value from Gould Register 1305
Transmit 06 03 05 19 00 01 54 B6
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. EC LRC
Response 06 03 04 42 0C 00 00 58 88
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC Data Data Data Data EC LRC
Result
• The data, 420C0000, is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 35.0 (in base units of °C)
• 420C is the first 16-bit segment of data read from Gould Register 1305 (i.e. the integer part, 35)
• 0000 is the final 16-bit segment of data read from Gould Register 1305 (i.e. the fractional part, .0)
Action 2
Read Gould Registers 1305 and 1306
Transmit 06 03 05 19 00 02 54 B6
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. EC LRC
Response 06 03 04 42 0C 00 00 42 20 00 00 D3 F8
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data EC LRC
Result
• The data, 420C0000, is the IEEE hexadecimal representation for 35.0 (in base units of °C)
• 420C is the first 16-bit segment of data read from Gould Register 1305 (i.e. the integer part. 35); the
0000 that follows final 16-bit segment of data read from Gould Register 1305 (i.e. the fractional part, .0)
• The data, 42200000, is the IEEE hexadecimal representation for 40.0 (in base units of m3/hour)
• 4220 is the first 16-bit segment of data read from Gould Register 1306; the 0000 is the other segment
This example involves reading four Gould Registers 1300 - 1303; this is to get four lots of 16-bit data.
Importantly, they are given consecutive entries in the Gould List.
Action
Read Gould Registers 1300 and 1301
Transmit 06 03 05 14 00 04
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. EC LRC
Response 06 03 08 40 41 80 00 00 00 00 00
Meaning Slv. Fn. D.C. Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data EC LRC
Result
• 404180000000 is the 64-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 35.0 (in base units of °C)
• 4041 is the 16-bit data from Gould Register 1300, 8000 is the 16-bit data from Gould Register 1301, and
so forth.
Importantly for this example, single register access is used – only one Gould Register is required to get a full
value (i.e. all four 16-bit segments). Therefore, the Word Offset option has no effect.
Response 06 03 08 40 41 80 00 00 00 00 00 C5 57
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data EC LRC
Result
• 4041 8000 0000 0000 is the 64-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 35.0 (in base units of °C)
• The first 8 bytes of data, 4041 8000, is the first and second 16-bit data segments (of the 64-bit value)
read from Gould Register 1305 (i.e. the integer part, 35)
• The last 8 bytes of data, 0000 0000, is the third and fourth 16-bit data segments (of the 64-bit value)
read from Gould Register 1305 (i.e. the fractional part, .0)
Response 06 03 10 40 41 80 00 00 00 00 00 40 44
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data
Response 00 00 00 00 00 00 60 99
Meaning Data Data Data Data Data Data EC LRC
Result
• 4041 8000 0000 0000, is the 64-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 35.0 (in base units of °C)
• 4042 0000 0000 0000, is the 64-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 40.0 (in base units of m3/hour)
Importantly for this example, Multiple Register Access is used – more than one Gould Register is required
to get a full 32-bit value (i.e. all 16-bit data segments). Therefore, the Word Offset option is required.
This example involves reading two whole integer values, requiring four Gould Registers.
Response 06 03 10 45 09 A0 00 3F 7D 0B 5C 51 09
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data EC LRC
Result
• 4509 A000 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 2202.0 (in base units of m3)
• The first 8 bytes of data, 4509 A000, is the first and second 16-bit data segments (of the 32-bit value)
read from Gould Register 1400 (i.e. the integer part, 2202.0)
• 3F7D 0B5C is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 0.98845457 (in base units of m3)
• The last 8 bytes of data, 3F7D 0B5C, is the first and second 16-bit data segments (of the 32-bit value)
read from Gould Register 1401 (i.e. the fractional part, 0.98845457)
Note: Fractional values of a rollover total are always accurate to 8 decimal places irrespective of the
selected display format for volumetric values.
Importantly, single register access is used – only one Gould Register is required to get a full value (i.e. all
16-bit data segments). Therefore, the Word Offset option has no effect.
This example involves reading two whole integer values from two Gould Registers.
* Parameter is not visible within the menu system. For a full location listing, contact factory.
Action 1: Read whole value from Gould Registers 1400 and 1401
Transmit 06 03 05 78 00 02 45 69
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. EC LRC
Response 06 03 08 45 09 A0 00 3F 7D 0B 5C 51 09
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data EC LRC
Result
•
3
4509 A000 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 2202.0 (in base units of m )
• The first 8 bytes of data, 4509 A000, is the first and second 16-bit data segments (of the 32-bit value)
read from Gould Register 1400 (i.e. the integer part, 2202.0)
• 3F7D 0B5C is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 0.98845457 (in base units of m3)
• The last 8 bytes of data, 3F7D 0B5C, is the first and second 16-bit data segments (of the 32-bit value)
read from Gould Register 1401 (i.e. the fractional part, 0.98845457)
Note:
Fractional values of a rollover total are always accurate to 8 decimal places irrespective of the selected
display format for the value.
Importantly, single register access is used – only one Gould Register is required to get a full value (i.e. all four
16-bit segments). Therefore, the Word Offset option has no effect.
This example involves reading the whole double-precision value from one Gould Register.
Response 06 03 08 40 A7 4F 14 44 35 79 DD 84 52
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data EC LRC
Result
•
3
40A7 4F14 4435 79DD is the 64-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 2983.54 (in base units of m )
• The first 8 bytes of data, 40A7 4F14, is the first and second 16-bit data segments (of the 64-bit value)
read from Gould Register 1400 (i.e. the integer part, 2983)
• The last 8 bytes of data, 4435 79DD, is the third and fourth 16-bit data segments (of the 64-bit value)
read from Gould Register 1400 (i.e. the fractional part to 8 decimal places)
Note:
Fractional values of a rollover total are always accurate to 8 decimal places irrespective of the selected
display format for the value.
This example involves writing to two consecutive Gould Registers 1300 and 1301; this is to write two separate
16-bit values (35 and 5). Importantly, they are given consecutive entries in the Gould List.
Action
Write “35” (420E, IEEE hex.) to Gould Register 1300. Write “5” (0000, IEEE hex.) to Gould Register 1301
Transmit 06 10 05 14 00 02 04 42 0E 00 00 A3 CF
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. D.C. Data Data Data Data EC LRC
Response 06 10 05 14 00 02 00 B7
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. EC LRC
Result
• Echo of Gould Register address field, 1300 (0x0514), and Quantity field, 2 (0x02) indicate success.
This example involves writing to four consecutive Gould Registers 1300 - 1303; this is to write four 16-bit
values (50, 2, 3600 and 0). Importantly, they are given consecutive entries in the Gould List.
Action
Write “50” (4248 in IEEE) to Gould Register 1300 and “2” (CCCD in IEEE) to Gould Register 1301
Write “360” (43B4 in IEEE) to Gould Register 1302 and “0” (0000 in IEEE) to Gould Register 1303
Transmit 06 10 05 14 00 04 08 42 48 CC CD 43 B4
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. D.C. Data Data Data Data Data Data
Transmit 00 00 E9 1E
Meaning Data Data EC LRC
Response 06 10 05 14 00 04 80 B5
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. EC LRC
Result
• Echo of Gould Register address field, 1300 (0x0514), and Quantity field, 4 (0x04) indicate success.
This is a variation of Example 2. Importantly, Single Register Access is used – only one Gould Register is
required to get a full value (i.e. all 16-bit segments). Therefore, the Word Offset option has no effect.
This example involves writing whole single-precision values to two Gould Registers.
Action
Write “50.2” (4248CCCD in IEEE) to Gould Register 1300
Write “360.0” (43B40000 in IEEE) to Gould Register 1301
Transmit 06 10 05 14 00 02 08 42 48 CC CD 43 B4
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. D.C. Data Data Data Data Data Data
Transmit 00 00 09 01
Meaning Data Data EC LRC
Response 06 10 05 14 00 02 00 B7
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. EC LRC
Result
• Echo of Gould Register address field, 1300 (0x0514), and Quantity field, 2 (0x02) indicate success.
Importantly with this example, the 36000.0 is de-scaled to be saved as 360.0. Since Multiple Register Access
is to be used, two Gould Registers are required to write the full 32-bit value (i.e. two 16-bit data segments).
Therefore, the Word Offset option is required.
This example involves writing whole single-precision values – 36000.0 and 0.0 – to two Gould Registers.
Actions
1. Write “36000.0” (470C in IEEE hexadecimal) to Gould Register 1300
2. Write “0.0” (A000 in IEEE hexadecimal) to Gould Register 1301
Transmit 06 10 05 14 00 02 04 47 0C A0 00 7A C3
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. D.C. Data Data Data Data EC LRC
Response 06 10 05 14 00 02 00 B7
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. EC LRC
Result
• Echo of Gould Register address field, 1300 (0x0514), and Quantity field, 02 (0x02) indicates success.
Importantly with this example, the 36000.0 is de-scaled to be saved as 360.0. Since Single Register Access is
to be used, only one Gould Register is required to write the full 32-bit value (i.e. all 16-bit data segments).
Therefore, the Word Offset option is not used.
This example involves writing a whole single-precision value, 36000.0, to a Gould Register.
Action
Write “36000.0” (470C A000 0000 0000 in IEEE) to Gould Register 1300
Transmit 06 10 05 14 00 01 04 47 0C A0 00 7A F0
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. D.C. Data Data Data Data EC LRC
Response 06 10 05 14 00 01 40 B6
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. EC LRC
Result
• Echo of Gould Register address field, 1300 (0x0514), and Quantity field, 0001 (0x01) indicates success.
7D.1 Overview
Chapter 7D is a guide to accessing process variables and diagnostic data from an ‘intelligent transmitter’.
The transmitter must have a communication port that supports RS-485 MODBUS® communications.
Data read or written by the 7955 Flow Computer can be in integer or floating-point format. When a floating-
point value is read, it can be ‘forwarded’ to user-specified parameter (database location). In addition to this
forwarding process, a floating-point value can be automatically re-scaled into alternative units.
The monitoring feature operates with ‘intelligent transmitter’s, such as the Micro Motion® Series 2000
(multivariable) digital transmitter (liquid) and Daniel Senior Sonic™ flow meter (gas).
®
In the case of the Micro Motion digital transmitter, it may require some pre-configuring. This is explained
in Section 7D.2, along with a step-by-step procedure.
* An Input alarm, “Modb bad target”, is raised if target parameter is not in a fixed list of parameters
(see Table 7d.1, page 7D-5).
** The alarm message includes slave identification number (1-16) and activity (“R” – read failed or “W” – write failed).
Apart from this menu, basic details of a 7955 serial port must also be configured. The menus for this task
are located in the COMMUNICATIONS menu. Note: The full setting-up procedure is in Section 7D.3.
x2
Configure d
x4
Other parameters c
Communications b
MODBus master c
Transmitter monitor a
Note: Menus illustrated here are for release of software version 1540 at time of publication of manual.
Enable/disable a
b Polling
Registers c
Further menus for detailing up to
Message blocks 48 registers to handle variables
d
with 16-bit integer values.
a
Message block 1 Int registers
Message block 2 Long register
Message block 3 Float registers
Message block 4 c
Note: Menus illustrated here are for release of software version 1540 at time of publication of manual.
Figure 7d.2: TRANSMITTER MONITOR menu map
Monitor On/Off
Switch options are “Enable” or “Disable”.
“Enable” – switches the Monitor on
“Disable” – switches the Monitor off
Monitor Polling
Polling method options are “Optmize” (factory default) or “1 poll/reg”:
“Optmize” – monitor will read registers at successive addresses in single poll
“1 poll/reg” – monitor will read a single register at a time, working through listed registers one-by-one
Note: Forwarding and re-scaling support is not offered for integer values.
Note: Forwarding and re-scaling support is not offered for integer values.
If Value is in units that are not listed in Table 7d.2 and the value is to be forwarded to a Target location,
use Scaling factor to re-scale the forwarded value into base units. The setting for Unit is then ignored.
If Value is in units that are listed in Table 7d.2 and the value is to be forwarded to a Target location, select
only the correct unit code for Unit and ensure that Scaling factor is set to 0.
Note: Attempts to enter any other location ID for Target Location will
result in an input alarm, “MODB bad target”.
On the 7955 Flow Computer, the 7955 Message Block List will allow read or write access to any part of any
Message Block on the Daniel transmitter. Each entry in the list comprises parameters to detail an access:
Start register – address of first register in Daniel Message Block (e.g. 350, for Message Block 8)
Byte size – enter size of Daniel Message Block in bytes: ((End register - Start register +1) x 2)
Number of items – enter quantity of registers that equate to a full value
As an example, consider reading register 392 (flow rate) from Daniel Message Block 12. The details to
set-up on the 7955 Flow Computer are as follows:
The correct setting for Number of items will depend on the configuration of the 795x serial port and the
transmitter, in respect of data type and data size (16-bits, 32-bits or 64-bits) of the value involved.
When the 795x serial port is configured for multiple-register access and single-precision (32-bit)
floating-point values, enter a value of 2 for floating-point value or 1 for an integer value.
When the 795x serial port is configured for multiple-register access and double-precision (64-bit)
floating-point values, enter a value of 4 for floating-point value or 1 for an integer value.
When the 795x serial port is configured for single-register access, simply enter a value of 1.
The Slave Device record informs the 7955 Flow Computer (MODBUS Master) of what MODBUS slave it is
going to be talking to and what communication settings it requires.
Figure 7.3 (below) shows how to navigate from the MAIN MENU to the SLAVE DEVICES menu, with the
keypad strokes needed to arrive at the menu.
With the 7955 Flow Computer acting as the MODBUS Master, as in this case, a MODBUS Slave Device
record must be detailed as follows:
Device function – Select “Transmitter” option.
Port number – Select the 7955 serial port connected to the transmitter.
Slave device address – Enter numerical MODBUS address of the transmitter.
Word ordering – Keep “Modbus default” (factory default), unless transmitter requires Word swap.
Precision – Select “single” if accessing floating-point values that are 32-bit or “double” if 64-bit.
Slave MODBUS commands – Select ‘Offset’ or ‘Full’ addressing method, as appropriate for transmitter.
Other record details are not applicable.
x2
Configure d
x4
Other parameters a
Communications b
MODBus master c
Slave devices c
Note: Menus illustrated here are for release of software version 1540 at time of publication of manual.
This procedure requires a serial cable, a RS232/RS485 converter and Micro Motion’s ProLink II TM
transmitter configuration software on a PC.
Note: Installation, operation, maintenance, etc. and safety instructions for the transmitter are outside the
scope of this supplement and Flow Computer literature. For these details, refer to product literature of
the transmitter. In addition, PC requirements for running ProLink II TM are outside the scope of this
supplement and Flow Computer literature.
Since the Series 2000 transmitter has a universal service port that supports other communication
®
protocols, it must be configured to enable RS-485 MODBUS communications. In addition to enabling this
protocol, the baud rate must be changed from 38400 to 19200. (The minimum for the transmitter is 1200.)
Procedure:
1. Using a suitable cable and a RS232/RS485 converter, interconnect the PC port (e.g. COM1) to
terminals 7 and 8 on the transmitter via the converter.
3. Using Prolink II, establish communication between the PC and the transmitter through the menu
<Connection><Connect to device>.
Select the options, as shown below, and then click on the "Connect" button.
Note: This procedure might have to be repeated, as some RS232/RS485 converters do operate
properly at the baud rate of 38400.
Protocol:
Select “Universal Service Port”.
COM Port:
Select “COM 1” (for PC port COM1).
To do this:
Select the menu <ProLink><Configuration>
Select the tab labelled "485 Comm"
Select the options shown below
Click on “Apply” – repeat this until there are no error messages.
Protocol:
Select “Modbus RTU”
Parity:
Select “None”
Baud Rate:
Select “19200”
Stop Bits:
Select “1”
TM
5. Terminate the program ProLink II
6. Using a suitable cable and a RS232/RS485 converter, connect the PC port (e.g. COM1) to terminals
5 and 6 on the transmitter.
Select options, as shown below, and then click on the "Connect" button.
Protocol: Modbus:
Select “RTU (8-bit)”
Baud Rate:
Select “19200”
Parity:
Select “None”
COM Port:
Select “COM 1”
Stop Bits:
Select “1”
8. Using Prolink II TM, ensure process variables (e.g. Density) can be viewed through the menu
<ProLink><Process variables>
1. Using a suitable cable, connect a 7955 serial port to the transmitter. Note: For details of the 7955
serial ports that support RS485, refer to main Chapter 7.
(b) Select a Serial Port menu, as appropriate for the serial port connected to the transmitter.
(c) Configure the basic communication parameters for that serial port, as shown in Table 7d.3.
(Some localised menu navigation is required to find the parameter screen.)
(d) Select the first available message block menu (e.g. MESSAGE BLOCK 1 menu).
(h) Select the first available register menu (e.g. INT REGISTER 1 menu).
(l) Select the first available register menu (e.g. FLOAT REGISTER 1 menu).
(End of instructions)
* The on-screen parameter descriptor includes a digit to identify the associated serial port.
** A 7955 may perform unexpected ‘restarts’ if it is configured to be “RS 232” when it should be “RS 485”.
*** Parameter is not applicable to serial ports that support RS-232 only.
Abbreviations used: “P” = Port, “reg” = register, “addr” = address, “char” = character, “MODB” = MODBUS
* If attempts to communicate with a slave are unsuccessful and exceed the maximum retries, an input alarm, “Modb failed slv”,
is raised. The number of the slave 1 - 16 is given in the alarm message together with “R” (read failed) or “W” (write failed).
* The on-screen parameter descriptor includes a number to identify the slave device being detailed.
** The “offset” option applies where transmitters automatically add an offset (e.g. 40000) to get a register address specified in a
received MODBUS request. For transmitters that do not do this and require a full address, keep the factory default.
Abbreviations used: “func” = function, “Slv” = Slave, “no” = number, “modb” = Modbus
The duty/standby facility allows for up to two 7955 flow computers to be connected together in an
application where dual-redundancy is required.
Duty/Standby controls the selection of a flow computer that is to be the main fiscal accounting device
(‘Duty 7955’) and a flow computer that is to be the backup device (‘Standby 7955’).
Once a hand-over has occurred, the new ‘Duty’ computer will raise an input alarm to indicate that a hand-
over has occurred. The alarm message is “Dty/Stby handover”. As with all alarms, associated with this
message will be a time and date stamp.
WDop: Watchdog status output for system alarms on this flow computer. This status output goes true for 5
seconds after initialisation and remains true as long as the flow computer is functioning correctly.
DTop: Duty status output for this flow computer. This output is true whenever this flow computer is the
‘Duty 7955’ in the dual-redundancy scheme.
WDip: Watchdog status input from connected flow computer. This flow computer will become the ‘Duty
7955’ if this status input goes false.
DTip: Duty status input from connected flow computer. This flow computer will relinquish Duty control if
this status input goes true.
A menu location is provided to enable you to invoke the Duty/Standby hand-over either by the 7955 keypad,
by an external supervisory system (RS-232/RS-485 MODBUS link) or by the result of a FC-Basic script.
The menu location is toggled between “Be Duty” and “Be Standby”:
Be Duty – By making this location true within the ‘Standby 7955’ it will automatically become the ‘Duty
7955’. This is achieved by utilising the above input output arrangement.
Be Standby – By making this location go true within the ‘Duty’ flow computer it will automatically
become the ‘Standby’ flow computer. This is achieved by utilising the above input output arrangement.
If the ‘Duty 7955’ is part of the way through a prove session when a failure occurs, the ‘Standby 7955’
will take over as the new ‘Duty 7955’. However, the new ‘Duty 7955’ will not able to continue in
finalising the prove-session. Intervention by an operator or a MODBUS connected supervisory system
will be required to start a new proving session.
A hand-over INFO input alarm is raised by the new ‘Duty 7955’ and recorded in the Historical Alarm
Log. As with all alarms, the time and date stamp is also recorded. This alarm can be read by an
attached metering system, which can then invoke a new prove-session if required. The hand-over
INFO alarm will not invoke a hand-over.
Once a prove-session has been completed, the derived ‘Meter factor’ or ‘K-factor’ will be copied into
the respective meter-run location in the ‘Duty 7955’. If configured, peer-to-peer communications will
update locations in the ‘Standby 7955’.
Note: Prover set-up data, such as prover type, limits, etc., will need to be configured into both the
‘Duty 7955’ and ‘Standby 7955’ flow computers.
Note: Prover abort alarms are categorised into Input or Limit alarm types. This prevents an
occurrence of a hand-over if a prove-session has failed.
The ‘Duty 7955’ is responsible for controlling block valves and flow control valves (FCV). The ‘Standby
7955’ calculates the batch transaction in tandem to the ‘Duty 7955’. This will help ensure minimal loss
of the batch count if a hand-over occurs.
If a hand-over is invoked during a batch transaction, the ‘Standby 7955’ will continue to batch count.
All valve control is passed to the new ‘Duty 7955’.
Note: Under Duty/Standby, PID routines can run in the ‘Standby 7955’. This is achieved by sharing
the feedback loop current into the ‘Duty7955’ and ‘Standby 7955’ flow computers. Therefore, all
of the control outputs will be repeated within the ‘Standby 7955’. If a hand-over occurs during a
PID flow controlled batch transaction, the new ‘Duty 7955’ will continue to balance the flow
through the configured meter-runs based on demand, until the batch is complete.
The PID algorithm utilised for flow control is typically a closed-loop routine that requires feedback from the
FCV in the field. Only the ‘Duty 7955’ will be connected to drive the FCV. It is possible to share the
feedback signal from the FCV to the ‘Duty 7955’ and ‘Standby 7955’ via a signal splitter. This method will
allow the two 7955 flow computers to calculate the required drive output but only the ‘Duty’ computer drive
output will be connected to the FCV.
Note: PID parameters, such as the target control variable, can be copied to the ‘Standby 7955’ using
peer-to-peer communications.
When a hand-over is invoked, external relay logic can be used to connect the new ‘Duty 7955 to the FCV
and therefore drive the valve as required. The relay logic may be driven though a user configured status
output that indicates if the flow computer is the ‘Duty 7955’. (For further information on the relay logic
required, contact the factory using the details on the back page.)
The totals from the ‘Duty 7955’ are copied to the ‘Standby 7955’ in one of two ways:
1. When the ‘Standby 7955’ is initially powered up. This is to ensure the totals have been synchronised if
a double hand-over occurs within a periodic interval period.
2. At a periodic time interval configurable by the user. This is to prevent the two flow computers from
drifting apart, e.g. if an analogue input slightly out, particularly from a flow meter analogue output.
The periodic time interval is configurable by the user to one of the following options:
“Disable”, “1 minute”, “2 minutes”, “5 minutes” {default}, “10 minutes”, “15 minutes”, “20 minutes”,
“30 minutes”, “1 hour”, “2 hours”, “3 hours”, “4 hours”, “6 hours”, “8 hours”, “12 hours” and “24 hours”
NOTE: If the period time interval is set to “inactive”, the totals will only be updated when the ‘Standby 7955’
initially comes on-line.
Totals synchronisation will be carried out automatically over the peer link, and will take place after the user
specified time interval has elapsed and at the next execution of the peer link data transfer. The totals do not
require configuration into a peer list. However, other data for example Meter factor (MF), Batch size, etc.
requires configuration into the peer list. (User list 1)
Before the fiscal totals can be transferred to the ‘Standby 7955’, the ‘Duty 7955’ has to write to a location
which will allow the totals to be overwritten via the peer-to-peer communication link. Once the totals have
been updated on the Standby 7955, the location is reset, and in doing so protecting the fiscal totals from any
other communication activity.
A user option menu will allow the user to select which combination of Stream totals, Station totals and Net
flow totals are synchronised across the peer link.
NOTE: Fiscal totals will only be written to if option 3 above is also configured.
Under Duty/Standby, peer-to-peer communications is utilised by the ‘Duty 7955’ to keep the ‘Standby 7955’
up-to-date with data. (You may wish to read Addendum 7A for a full description of peer-to-peer support.)
Duty/standby usage of the peer-to-peer function utilises List One of the two peer-to-peer parameter lists.
The ‘Duty 7955’ is considered to be the master and the ‘Standby 7955’ is the slave.
Note: Data will flow in one direction only – from MODBUS master to the MODBUS slave.
When a hand-over occurs, the new ‘Duty 7955’ will become the MODBUS master on the Duty/Standby
communications link. The ‘Duty 7955’ will enable the peer link within itself and the new ‘Standby 7955’ will
switch off the peer link within itself to inhibit communications contention.
The duty/standby function can also be configured to swap the slave addresses of user selected
communications ports. This feature is particularly useful in metering systems applications whereby only the
‘Duty’ flow computer is required to communicate with the supervisory computer.
In the example below, two flow computers are configured for a Duty/Standby application. Serial ports 1 and
2 are utilised by supervisory computers. Serial port 1 is connected to one system and Port 2 is connected to
the other. The two supervisory systems may also be operating a duty/standby function between themselves.
Configure the Duty slave address and the Standby slave address for each communications port using the
following menu:
Flow computer communication port addresses would be changed when a hand-over occurs to ensure that
the supervisory computer system always accesses data from the ‘Duty’ flow computer.
Port 1 Port 1
Slave add #1 Slave add #3
Port 2 Port 2
Slave add #2 Slave add #4
Duty Standby
Computer Computer
Step 1.
Connect Duty/Standby cabling. This example use status inputs 6 / 7 and status output 10. At this stage,
ensure that the DutyStandby enable location is set to Disable.
<Configure><Duty Standby><Duty/stndby Enable>…Set to Disable
This will ensure that during commissioning of the inputs, the two flow computers will not ‘hunt’ between duty
and standby operation.
SK2
SK2
WDip (ip#6)
WDip (ip#6) SK2-8
SK2-8
DTip (ip#7)
SK2-9
DTip (ip#7)
SK2-9
DTop (op#10) DTop (op#10)
SK2-46 SK2-46
0 Volt 0 Volt
SK2-14 SK2-14
0 Volt 0 Volt
SK2-34 SK2-34
SK3 1 KΩ SK3
1 KΩ
1 KΩ 1 KΩ
Alarm Alarm
SK3-1 SK3-1
Com Common
N/O Relay SK3-3
SK3-3 N/O Relay
SK3-20 SK3-20
0 Volt 0 Volt
WDop from Relay
Notes:
• Status input and Status output common returns must be connected to 0V power.
• Resistor values are 1Kohm.
• System Alarm Relay output is used in the NC mode.
To ensure that the flow computer executes a hand-over during a power outage on the Duty system, some of the
status inputs and outputs must be configured to be either positive or negative logic sense.
The Duty status input (Dtip Input #7) must be set to negative logic sense:
The Duty status output (DTop output #10) must be set to positive logic sense using:
The watchdog output (WDop) is from the NC (Normally Closed) ‘system alarm’ relay output.
Step 2.
With the cable connected, each 7955 flow computer must now be configured. The Duty/Standby feature must have
the inputs and outputs defined under the following menu:
Configure the Duty Input to be from Status input #7. Remember this input is to be negative logic input sense.
Configure the Duty output to be from Digital output #10. Remember this output is to be positive logic output.
Configure the Watchdog input to be from Status input #6. This status input is positive logic input sense.
It is advisable to configure the multi-view facility such that one of the pages displays the relevant locations for
Duty/Standby operation. This will be an aid when commissioning the flow computer to perform this task. Use the
following table:
Once the multi-view page has been configured and steps 1 and 2 have been completed, the Duty/Standby feature
can be tested.
Set-up both flow computers to be a Standby by accessing the multi-view page line 3 and toggle the option to Be
Standby. This forces both the flow computers to be a Standby and will help to prevent hand-over ‘hunting’
Once this is completed, the Duty/Standby feature in one flow computer can be enabled.
This flow computer will now assume the task of ‘Duty 7955’. Once the ‘Duty 7955’ is running as Duty, the Duty/
Standby feature should be enabled on the other flow computer – this flow computer will be forced into the Standby
role by the current Duty 7955.
Duty/Standby will now be operating and can be tested. A Duty/Standby hand-over can be invoked via the multi-view
page line 3. In the Duty 7955, change the option under this location from Idle to Be Standby. The ‘Duty 7955’ will
now become the ‘Standby 7955’ whilst the ‘Standby 7955’ becomes the new ‘Duty 7955’.
Step 3.
When the flow computers are running Duty/Standby, the ‘Duty 7955’ will periodically update the ‘Standby 7955’ via
the Peer to Peer communication link with the contents in Peer List 1. This list can be configured as explained in
Chapter 7B.
This can also be tested during commissioning to ensure correct operation. This is usually accomplished by setting a
process variable that is defined in the peer list and observing it is transferred across to the ‘Standby 7955’ at the
configured cyclic rate (e.g. every cycle).
Note: The peer transfer of data and totals will not be carried out whilst the ‘Standby 7955’ is powered down. If a
hand-over has occurred, due to failure of the ‘Duty 7955’, the new Duty will wait to see that new Standby is running
before it starts to transfer data and totals. This is accomplished by the ‘Duty 7955’ monitoring the watchdog input
(WDip).
However, it is advisable to remove the metering system communications (not the peer link) from any repaired flow
computer before it is powered up as the new standby. This will help to ensure that the connected metering system
does not inadvertently access the new Standby in assuming it is the true Duty.
Step 4.
The Duty/Standby feature allows the ‘Duty 7955’ to update to fiscal totals in the ‘Standby 7955’.
The following totals can be up-dated: stream totals, station totals and net totals. The update of totals on the ‘Standby
7955’ will only be done when the respective stream is in the ‘flowing’ mode. The following menu option allows the
user to configure flow computer.
For a quad-stream system, whereby the flow totals need updating on the Standby, the following must be configured:
If using the ultrasonic flow metering support, whereby the reverse flow totals need updating on the Standby, the
following must be configured:
This facility can be tested by setting the ‘Duty 7955’ into the flowing mode for all streams. This is achieved by
ensuring that the input frequency signal for turbines is above the low flow cut off.
Set nominal test flow rates into the ‘Duty 7955’ and ensure that it is totalising. Monitor the ‘Standby 7955’ and
observe the flow totals updating in the Standby as per the configured total sync period.
7F.1.1 Overview
Gas Flow Computer software version 1540 can be set-up to regularly request raw gas composition
information, the gas calorific value and the gas specific gravity value for a metering-run (stream) directly
from any one of four gas chromatography devices.
Retrieved raw gas composition data is normalised (against the totalled fractions) and then forwarded on
to 7955 MODBUS Slaves for calculations or collection by another system.
Requests are first made to the chromatograph for several status flags (MODBUS registers) so that a brief
series of checks can be performed.
Checks:
1. Has a new gas analysis been completed since the last time raw gas data was obtained?
2. Is data from that new analysis available for retrieval?
3. No errors reported by the Chromatograph?
The answer has to be “yes” to all questions before progressing with a request for new gas data.
Otherwise, the whole cycle re-starts with checking the flags again after a selected, fixed interval.
Table 1 is a list of raw gas components that can be obtained by a Gas Flow Computer:
Each component in the table is identified to the 7955 by a programmed (SET) MODBUS register number.
These numbers are visible within the 7955 menu system and can be edited to correspond to a MODBUS
register map of all four chromatographs.
The raw C6+ component can, optionally, be split by the 7955 Master into ‘weighted’ fractions of C6 (Neo
Hexane), C7 (Neo Heptane) and C8 (Neo Octane). The C6 ‘split/no split’ option and the several
‘weighting’ options are determined during the configuration process.
Newly received raw gas component values are automatically forwarded to all known 7955 MODBUS
Slaves, and then automatically normalised locally by those slaves. Normalisation will also take place on
the 7955 Master.
1
ABB, Daniels 2551 or Hartmann & Braun BTU8000 models supported at present.
The MODBUS Master-Slave arrangement enables two different types of network topology. Two worked
examples are provided as a guide to what can be achieved. Adapt these examples to suit an installation.
Note: Each inter-connected 7955 must be running the same version and issue of application software version 1640.
The ability to have individual chromatography devices, providing a gas composition feed from each supported
metering-run, allows for an expansion of the first two basic network arrangements.
Master Port 2, 3, RS-485 Chromatograph 'A' Master Port 2, 3, RS-485 Chromatograph 'A'
7955 4* or 5* (Slave Device 1) 7955 4* or 5* (Slave Device 1)
(Run #1) (Run #1)
Port 2,3,4* or 5*
7955 Port 2,3,4* or 5*
7955
* 7955 add-on (Slave Device 2) * 7955 add-on (Slave Device 2)
board required board required
Chromatograph 'B' Chromatograph 'B'
(Slave Device 3) (Slave Device 3)
(Run #2) (Run #2)
Port 2,3,4* or 5*
7955 Port 2,3,4* or 5*
7955
(Slave Device 4) (Slave Device 4)
Note: 7955 Slaves do not all have to be connected to the same serial port
7955 7955
Slave Device 8 Slave Device 6
Port 3 Port 3 Port 3
Rx/Tx+ SK5/8 SK5/8
SK5/8
Rx/Tx- SK5/20 Chromatograph SK5/20 Chromatograph
SK5/20
Slave Device 7 Slave Device 5
Signal Ground SK5/7 SK5/7
SK5/7
Note: 7955 Slaves do not all have to be connected to the same serial port
Objectives
1. Configure the 7955 Master with:
• Basic Serial Port Details
• MODBUS Master Details
• MODBUS Slave Details
• Chromatography Device Details
2. Select an appropriate menu for the 7955 serial port that connects the 7955 Master to the same
MODBUS network as the MODBUS Slaves (i.e. chromatography device and 7955 Slaves)
6. Select the maximum allowable interval for the MODBUS Master to transmit a command and then
receive a response, without invoking a time-out condition.
The MODBUS command is re-submitted following a time-out only if the maximum number of command
re-submissions is not exceeded.
8. Select the maximum number of times a MODBUS command can be re-submitted to a slave before it is
discarded and the failure is recorded by a raised alarm. The 7955 will automatically re-attempt to
communicate with the slave when there is a new gas composition analysis.
10. Work through this parameter checklist once for each Slave: (Some menu searching is required)
Slave device func • Select an option descriptor to specify the function of this slave. Note (B)
Port number • Select an option descriptor to specify the serial port of the 7955 Master that
is wired to the same network as this slave device.
Slv device address • Edit (SET) the value to the MODBUS address of this slave device. In the
case of a 7955 Slave, this is the base address as explained in Chapter 7.
Device word swap • Select the option that is compatible with all MODBUS slaves on the network.
Slave device data • Decide if energy values and specific gravity values are required. Note (C)
Notes:
A On-screen parameter names incorporate a number to identify the associated serial port
B Table 3 on page 7f.6 lists applicable options for informing the 7955 Master of what devices are
connected to the network
C Table 4 on page 7f. 6 lists available options
13. Locate the parameter screen with “Cfg new gas reg”.
This is for a 7955 Master to notify the 7955 Slave that a new gas composition has been transmitted to it
and normalisation can be performed.
14. Ensure the value is the same as the location identification (ID) number of the ‘new gas data flag’
location on the 7955 Slave. DO NOT SET THIS VALUE TO ZERO.
15. Table 5 is a checklist of parameters. Ensure that each mapping value matches the location
identification (ID) number of a corresponding parameter in the <“Raw gas data”> menu on a 7955
Slave. Edit (SET) the mapping value to 0 if the data is not required to be transmitted, or is not available.
(Inform 7955 Master about Chromatographs ‘A’, ‘B’, ‘C’ and ‘D’)
18. Navigate to this menu: <“Configure”>/<“Chromat”>
19. Work through this parameter checklist for each chromatograph (A, B, C and D):
Parameters Instructions and Comments
Chromat poll rate • Select the fixed interval between requests for gas composition data.
Chromat C6+ type • Select a code for the weighting of a C6 split. (See Table 6)
Note: On-screen parameter names incorporate a letter to identify a chromatograph
Table 7: Parameter list for editing MODBUS register numbers to match a chromatograph
2. Select an appropriate menu for the 7955 serial port that connects this 7955 Slave to the same MODBUS
network as the chromatography device and the 7955 Master.
Notes:
A On-screen parameters incorporate a number to identify the associated serial port
B Serial port ‘1’ does not support the RS-485 signalling standard.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 on each 7955 Slave
• The Historical Alarm Log This contains an individual entry for every alarm stored in the log.
The Historical Alarm Log can store up to 30 entries. When a new alarm is received, one of two things can happen:
8.1.4 Examining the Alarm Status Display and Historical Alarm Log
Press the INFORMATION MENU (i) key If you want to examine the Alarm Status Display or the Historical Alarm Log.
• To bring up the Alarm Status Display, select the Alarm Summary option.
• To bring up the first entry in the Historical Alarm Log, select the Alarm History option.
• To return to the INFORMATION MENU from the two screens , you can use the BACK key
• New alarms are alarms that have been received but not accepted.
• Live alarms are alarms that refer to conditions still active.
An example of a live alarm is when there is a fault in the system. This produces two alarms - one when the
fault first occurs (‘ON’) and the second when it is put right (‘Off’). If only the first alarm of the pair has been
received, the alarm is said to be live because the condition still exists.
The number of live alarms tells you how many faults are still active. If you look at the Historical Alarm Log this
tells you more about these faults.
8.1.6 What the entries in the Historical Alarm Log tell you
Figure 8.3 shows a typical display and the function of the relevant keys.
Key to figure:
1. Indicates if there are entries BEFORE this one
2. Alarm is either ‘ON’ (fault occurrence) or ‘OFF’ (fault cured).
3. Type of alarm
4. Indicates alarm not accepted
5. Accept this alarm
6. Alarm description and extra identifier to qualify the alarm
7. Clear this alarm entry
8. Date and time that this alarm (message) was raised.
9. Identifies a metering-run/stream - not applicable to single
meter-run/stream software
10. Indicates that there are alarm entries AFTER this one
11. Scroll DOWN through the entries
12. Scroll UP through the alarm entries
13. Clear all alarm entries.
Each alarm has its own entry in the Historical Alarm Log that tells you:
• Type of alarm
Whether it is a System alarm, Input alarm or Limit alarm and if the alarm is ‘on’ or ‘off’.
• A digit This indicates the channel number on which the fault occurred.
• A letter H and L are for high and low Limit alarms, S is for a step alarm.
• Acceptance indication
This is only shown for those entries that have not been accepted. When the entry is accepted, the
indicator disappears.
Configuration task
Follow these instructions if you want to configure a user-defined alarm (X or Y):
1. Navigate to the menu of the parameter to be monitored, and then press the ‘a’ key once to display
the identification (ID) number of the parameter. Make a note of that ID number
2. Navigate to this menu: <“Configure”>/<“Other parameters”>/<“Alarms”>
3. Select the menu for either ‘Alarm X’ or ‘Alarm Y’
4. Locate and edit associated parameters as listed in Table 8.1
5. The user alarm will now appear in the Historical Alarm Log when the parameter value exceeds the limits.
User alarm HI lmt • This parameter defines the highest allowable value for the selected
measurement. A high limit alarm is raised when this upper limit is exceeded.
• Press the ‘b’ key once.
• Edit a value using the numeric keypad.
• Press the ‘b’ key once to confirm your programmed value.
User alarm lo lmt • This parameter defines the lowest allowable value for the selected
measurement. A low limit alarm is raised when this lower limit is exceeded.
• Press the ‘b’ key once.
• Edit a value using the numeric keypad.
• Press the ‘b’ key once to confirm your programmed value.
Configuring involves:
1. Supplying the identification numbers of the two parameters to be monitored
2. Supplying a value for the comparison limit
Configuration task
Follow these instructions if you want to configure a user-defined alarm (A or B):
1. Navigate to the menu pages of the two parameters to be compared. Use the ‘a’ key to display the
parameter identification (ID) number. Make a note of each ID number.
2. Navigate to this menu: <“Configure”>/<“ Other parameters”>/<“Alarms”>
3. Locate and edit parameters as shown in Table 8.2.
4. The user alarm will now appear in the Historical Alarm Log when the difference in value between the
two parameters exceed the comparison limit.
Summary
The up-to-date state of all user-defined alarms are shown in this menu: <“Health check”>/<“User Alarms”>
Support is provided for two general input alarms, nominated as ‘I’ and ‘J’.
Some configuration is required - a status input must be chosen for triggering alarm ‘I’. Another status input
must be chosen for triggering alarm ‘J’. By default, no Status Inputs are selected.
Configuration task
Follow these instructions only if you want to configure the 7955 without using a Wizard.
1. Navigate to this menu: <“Configure”>/<“Other parameters”> /<“Alarms”>
2. Navigate to a “Status in alm src” parameter screen.
3. Press the ‘b’ key
4. Use the UP-ARROW key to scroll through a list of descriptions associated with status inputs. The
objective is to select which status input is to be the alarm trigger.
5. Press the ENTER key when the description for the required status input is on-screen.
Summary
The up-to-date state of all user-defined alarms are summarised in the menu:
<“Health check”>/<“User Alarms”>.
Notes:
1. For further information on Digital (Status) Outputs, refer to Chapter 2 and Appendix ‘C’.
2. The presence of active User-defined Comparison Alarms (‘A’, ‘B’, etc.) are indicated by Status Outputs
nominated to include Limit Alarms.
Tcombust<>0,15,20 Input Combustion temperature must be 0°C, 15°C, 20°C or 25°C for the ISO 6976 (MJ/M3) calc.
Transducer failed or not wired to 7955.
Timeperiod failed Input
Additional message digits: ‘1’=Time Period Input #1, ‘2 =Time Period Input #2, etc.
An anomaly has occurred. There have been unusual frequency readings for longer than is
tolerated. An adjustment to a ‘filter’ value may be required. (Refer to Density configuration pages)
Timeperiod glitch Input
Additional alarm message digits:
‘1’ = Time Period Input #1, ‘2’ = Time Period Input #2, etc.
A Time Period Input (‘Density’ Input) is not been calibrated.
Timeperiod no cal System Additional alarm message digits:
‘1’ = Time Period Input #1, ‘2’ = Time Period Input #2, etc.
Roll-over of a main (standard) total has ocurred.
Additional alarm message letters:
Totaliser limit System
‘I’ = Indicated Volume Total, ‘V’ = Corrected Volume Total, ‘M’=Mass Total,
‘B’=Base Volume Total, ‘E’ = Energy Total, ‘A’ = Alarm Total
Limit for calculated pulse input frequency value exceeded.
Turb freq limit Limit
Additional alarm message digits: ‘M’ = Main turbine
‘K-factor’ could not be linearised from a programmed “Frequency versus ‘K-factor’ ” correction
Turb K-factor err Input
curve profile.
Count of missing pulses from Turbine Flowmeter exceeded ‘Set’ limit.
Turb limit failed Input Additional alarm message digits:
‘1’ = Pulse (Turbine) Input #1, ‘2’ = Pulse (Turbine) Input #2, etc.
Percentage of missing (error) pulses, in terms of pulses accumulated for the pulse frequency
calculation, has exceeded 0.05%.
Turb pcent failed Input
Additional alarm message digits:
‘1’ = Pulse (Turbine) Input #1, ‘2’ = Pulse (Turbine) Input #2, etc.
A Pulse Input is not calibrated.
Turbine no cal System Additional alarm message digits:
‘1’ = Pulse (Turbine) Input #1, ‘2’ = Pulse (Turbine) Input #2, etc.
‘Status Input’ activated alarm. See page 8.7 for details.
User input alarm Input
Additional alarm message letters: ‘I’ = Alarm ‘I’, ‘J’ = Alarm ‘J’
User-defined hi/low limit alarm.
User limit alarm Limit
Additional alarm message letters: ‘X’ = Alarm ‘X’, ‘Y’ = Alarm ‘Y’,
Water content is in excess of a defined limit.
Water cntnt limit Input Additional qualifying letters seen after the base message:
‘H’ = High limit, ‘L’ = Low limit, ‘S’ = Step limit
8.2 Events
8.2.1 Introduction to 7955 events
The 7955 instrument keeps a record of important system changes in an Event Log. This is very similar, in
concept, to the alarm log, but the nature of the information kept is different.
• Historical Event Log This contains an individual entry for every event stored in the log.
There is enough room, in the historical event log, to store up to 150 event records. When a new event is
received, one of two things can happen:
†
This can not be changed. The list of auditable data is fixed.
8.2.6 What the entries in the Historical Event Log tell you
Figure 8.5 shows a typical display and the function of the relevant keys.
Key to figure:
1. Indicates if there are entries BEFORE this one
2. Location identifier
3. Type of event
4. Indicates event not accepted
5. Accept this event
6. Event description
7. Clear this entry
8. Date and time that this event (message) was raised
9. Indicates that there are entries AFTER this one
10. Scroll DOWN through the entries
11. Scroll UP through the entries
12. Clear all event entries.
Each event has its own entry in the Historical Event Log that tells you:
• Type of event
Whether it is Auto or User.
• Acceptance indication
This is only shown for those entries that have not been accepted. When the entry is accepted, the
indicator disappears.
This feature allows a 7955 Flow Computer to continuously monitor and report on changes to existing SET
values, changes to option selections and to changes to several parameter attributes (value status and individual
audit control settings). The facility will report changes by recording Audit User Events and Audit System
Alarms that will enable the back-calculation of fiscal values and account for changes that have occurred.
An example of a “USER” event is the act of manually changing a software parameter status to be “SET”
instead of “LIVE”.
An example of an “AUTO” triggered event is the 7955 automatically changing a software parameter status to
“Fail” when a live input source fails.
Every event has a date and time for the occurrence, an on-screen location descriptor and a summary of the
change.
This information is divided into several pages, as seen in Figure 8.6. Use the arrow keys to navigate around
the pages.
An Audit Control alarm is normally raised whenever the value status attribute of a database location is
changed to “Set”. This alarm entry can be identified visually with the word “ON” on the first display line.
A subsequent value status change, from “SET” to “LIVE”, “FB” or “FAIL” will then raise a matching system
alarm. That matching alarm entry can be identified visually with the word “OFF” on the first display line.
Figure 8.8 shows how the Audit Control alarm message can appear in one of two optional formats.
To change format…
• Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/<”DB attributes”>
• Locate the parameter with “DB loc alarm text” as the descriptor
• Select an option descriptor from the multiple-choice list
• Any change is activated for the next 7955 machine cycle
Less critical “USER” events, such as a valve command selection, can be suppressed by editing the
attribute setting to be “No Audit”.
However, be aware that the 7955 Flow Computer can, by default, automatically override and
change the setting under certain conditions. There is a logic table for this in the “Audit Event
Suppression Control” section on the next page.
Note: An “AUTO” (7955 triggered) event is never suppressed.
However, be aware that the 7955 Flow Computer can, by default, automatically override and
change the setting under certain conditions. There is a logic table for this in the “Audit Alarm
Suppression Control” section on the next page.
Figure 8.9 shows where to find Audit Control attributes. Navigate to any parameter screen and then use the
DOWN-ARROW and UP-ARROW key switch between pages.
There is a third attribute on the same page, which can also be edited; it is the security level required for
editing the software parameter.
Security levels are as explained in Chapter 11. The exception to this is the “Super User” security level,
which is not selectable and is not attainable by anyone apart from the 7955 Flow Computer itself.
The existing setting for each Audit Control attribute is displayed within the menu system and is available for
retrieval by an external Modbus networked device. (See Chapter 7.)
By default, Audit Control attributes are not accessible in the menu system.
To make them accessible, follow these steps:
• Navigate to the menu <”Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/<”DB attributes”>
• Locate the parameter with “Attribute display”
• Select “On” from the multiple-choice option list
Note: This action also automatically enables the auditing control functions (if not already enabled by the
software parameters <Alarm active locs”> and <”Audit inactive locs”>).
Automatic mode is selected by editing the multiple-choice list of the parameter <”Attribute control”>, which
is located within the <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Db attributes”> menu.
Table 8.7: Logic for 7955 changes to attribute settings and if events are recorded
Value Status Attribute Setting Attribute Setting USER Event AUTO Event
Notes?
Change (Before Change) (After Change) on change? on change?
Live to Set No Audit Audit Yes No
Live to Set Audit Audit Yes No
Live to FB No Audit No Audit No Yes
Live to FB Audit Audit No Yes
Live to Fail No Audit No Audit No No Alarm raised instead
Live to Fail Audit Audit No No Alarm raised instead
Fail to Set No Audit Audit Yes No
Fail to Set Audit Audit Yes No
Fail to Live No Audit No Audit No No Alarm raised instead
Fail to Live Audit Audit No No Alarm raised instead
FB to Set No Audit Audit Yes No
FB to Set Audit Audit Yes No
FB to Live No Audit No Audit No Yes
FB to Live Audit Audit No Yes
Set to Live No Audit No Audit No No
Set to Live Audit No Audit Yes No
Set to Fail No Audit No Audit No No
Set to Fail Audit No Audit Yes No
Set to FB No Audit No Audit No Yes
Set to FB Audit No Audit Yes Yes Read Table Note A
Table Notes:
A A “USER” event is generated for a “SET” to “LIVE” action by the user. An “AUTO” event is generated for the
“Live” to “FB” action by the 7955.
B Selecting an alternative unit of measurement (for display) is recorded as a “USER” event even with a “No Audit”
setting.
C An event is recorded for all user initiated changes to the “No Audit” or “Audit” setting.
Table 8.8 shows if an event is logged when a user makes changes to the “No Audit” or “Audit” setting without
changing the value or value status.
D Status changes that are not possible: “FB to Fail” and “Fail to FB”
E Changing a ‘Set’ value to another ‘Set’ value is always recorded as a “USER” event.
Table 8.9 shows if an event is recorded when the value status (e.g. “SET”) is not changed but the value does
change or an option is selected from a multiple-choice list.
Table 8.8: Logic for recording an event when the attribute setting is changed
Table 8.9: Logic for recording events when a value/option selection changes
Automatic mode is selected by editing the multiple-choice list of the <”Attribute control”> parameter, located
within the <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Db attributes”> menu.
Table 8.10: Logic for 7955 changes to attribute settings and if an alarm is recorded
Table Notes:
A The 7955 will also raise a matching “ON” alarm if one does not already exist in the Historical
Alarm Log. This is normal and allows the system alarm to be cleared in the normal manner.
B The 7955 will raise a matching “OFF” alarm if the Audit Alarm Suppression Control setting is
then changed to “No Alarm”. This is matching alarm is normal and allows the system alarm to
be cleared in the normal manner.
C The 7955 will raise an ordinary Live INPUT alarm with an “ON” flag.
D The 7955 will raise an ordinary Live INPUT alarm with an “OFF” flag. This alarm can be
cleared in the normal manner.
E Table 8.11 shows what happens when changes are made to the Audit Alarm Suppression Control
attribute setting without changing the value or (value) status.
F Status changes that are not possible: “FB to Fail” and “Fail to FB”.
G A “USER” classed event is generated for all user initiated changes to the “No Alarm” or “Alarm” setting.
Table 8.12 shows if an event will appear in the Historical Event Log when a user makes changes to the
Audit Alarm Suppression Control setting without changing the value or value status.
Table 8.12: Logic for determining if an event is generated when the “Alarm” or
“No alarm” setting is changed
Value Audit Event Audit Alarm Ctrl Audit Alarm Ctrl USER Event
Status Control Setting Setting (Before) Setting (After) on change?
(Any) Audit No Alarm Alarm Yes
(Any) Audit Alarm No Alarm Yes
(Any) No Audit No Alarm Alarm No
(Any) No Audit Alarm No Alarm No
9. Additional facilities
9.1 Feature: Archiving
9.1.1 Introduction
The 7955 Flow Computer can perform data logging to generate historical records – archives - of parameter
data. The archived data can be retrieved on-demand and displayed within the menu system. It can also be
printed out as a report and data can be retrieved by MODBUS compliant devices.
Values from user-selected parameters can be statistically prepared (e.g. average, maximum, etc.) according to
user requirements. Statistical results are recorded at intervals that are defined by the type of data logging. Each
logging type has a separate archive with a 20-parameter capacity and the ability to keep statistics from the past.
1. Interval
Statistical results are automatically recorded in an “Interval Log” archive at a user-selected time-span.
An interval can be as short as a 7955 machine cycle or as long as twelve hours.
A user-selected date and time marks the start of the very first interval.
2. Daily
Statistical results are automatically recorded in a “Daily Log” archive at the same time each day (i.e. 24-
hour intervals). A user-selected date and time marks the start of the very first 24-hour period.
3. Manual
Statistical results are recorded in a “Manual Log” archive only when triggered manually from the front panel
or over serial communications. The beginning of this variable time-span occurs on enabling this type of
data logging.
4. Alarm
Statistical results are recorded in an “Alarm Snapshot Log” archive whenever an alarm is raised or is
removed. (This is separate from the Alarm History log). The beginning of this variable time-span occurs on
enabling this type of data logging.
5. Monthly
Statistical results are automatically recorded in a “Monthly Log” archive once a calendar month. A user-
selected date and time marks the start of the first month.
The size of an archive is finite but flexible enough to allow re-sizing by hand. Re-sizing actions cause all
previously recorded values to be lost forever and should be done prior to data logging commencing.
Archives can be selectively viewed on screen and printed out as a report. Printouts of reports can also occur
automatically after new statistical results have been archived. Associated parameters (database locations)
can be manipulated or retrieved by MODBUS networked device.
IMPORTANT NOTICE!
The two sections that follow should be read and understood before embarking on the
configuration task. It is also advisable to try out at least one of the worked examples.
1. Time Average Calculate the time-weighted average. Parameter values are sampled once during
every 7955 machine cycle. The resulting time-weighted average is copied to an
archive.
2. Flow Average Calculate the flow-weighted average. Parameter values are sampled once during
every 7955 machine cycle. The resulting flow-weighted average is copied to an
archive.
3. Difference Calculate the difference between the latest sampled parameter value and the result
that was last copied to an archive. The result is copied to an archive.
4. Maximum Results in the largest sampled parameter value (since that last archived statistic) being
copied to an archive.
5. Minimum Smallest sampled parameter value, since that last archived statistic, is copied to an
archive.
Archive space
Each archive has a default amount of memory space in the 7955. The initial amount is the same for each
archive. Archive memory space is 2 dimensional:
• Depth Depth corresponds to the quantity of parameter values that can be kept.
• Width Width corresponds to the total number of bytes required to store a single value from every
nominated parameter. (See Table 9.1.)
Available memory space for archiving can be viewed by pressing the PRINT MENU key and then navigating
to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Re-size archives”>/<“Spare arch. memory”>.
The value shown is always in units of bytes but the actual amount will vary in different software versions.
Width
Parameter Type
(bytes)
1 Selection code for an option in a multiple-choice list.
4 A parameter value without a status e.g. “Set” or “Live”. (This does not include totals.)
5 A parameter value with a status e.g. “Set” or “Live”.
8 Totals only – e.g. Indicated Volume flow total.
16 Dates and/or times.
21 Text only.
It is very important to carefully plan the set-up of all archive space before data logging to archives
commences. Otherwise, be prepared for inevitable data loss when making changes or setting up other
archives at a later stage.
This is best illustrated in the following sequence of diagrams involving one archive:
1. Archive with an initial depth of 8 and a list with Item 1 = Line temperature
one defined item, Line Temperature.
Item 1
Value 1
Width = 5
Value 2
Value 3 Depth = 5
: : :
Value 4
Value 5
T0 T5
T1 = 8s T2 = 8s T3 = 8s T4 = 8s
Notes:
(a) "Interval" type data logging is shown with an 8 second time-span. "Daily" type logging operates in the
same way except T1=24 hours, T2=24 hours, etc.
(b) A sampled value is obtained from each defined item during a 1 second cycle time.
(e) T0 is the date and time that this data logging first began.
Oldest value at
The last possible present
record for a value
in this archive
T0 T9
T1 = 8s T2 = 8s T3 = 8s T4 = 8s T5 = 8s T6 = 8s T7 = 8s T8 = 8s
Notes:
(a) "Interval" type data logging is shown with an 8 second time-span. "Daily" type logging operates in the same way
except T1=24 hours, T2=24 hours, etc.
(b) A sampled value is obtained from each defined item during a 1 second cycle time.
(e) T0 is the date and time that this data logging first began.
14.55 is 1.0132 is
The last possible now lost now lost
record for a value
T0 T4
T1 = 8s T2 = 16s T3 = ?s
Notes:
(a) "Manual" or "Alarm" type data logging is shown here with two complete periods. Third period is unknown until
an alarm is raised (or cleared) or logging is next triggered manually by an operator.
(b) A sampled value is obtained from each defined item during a 1 second cycle time.
(e) T0 is the date and time that this data logging first began.
Oldest value at
The last possible record present
for a value in this archive
T0 T9
T1 = 6s T2= 7s T3 = 9s T4= T5 = 8s T6 = 12s T7 = 8s T8 = ?s
5s
Notes:
(a) "Manual" or "Alarm" type data logging is shown here with two complete periods. Third period is unknown until an
alarm is raised (or cleared) or logging is next triggered manually by an operator.
(b) A sampled value is obtained from each defined item during a 1 second cycle time.
(e) T0 is the date and time that this data logging first began.
Instructions:
1
1. Before proceeding, ensure that you have a list of parameters and their database location IDs . The
identification numbers are important because they will be input to identify parameters to be archived.
(b) Starting with first item, Item 1, manually enter (SET) the location ID of a parameter and then select
a statistical (action) function. (See Table 9.2 for further guidance.)
(c) Repeat step 4b with the next item until all parameters have been nominated.
B Intervals are always synchronised to the 7955 Flow Computer calendar clock. For example, a 10-second
interval will first occur on the minute rollover and then re-occur every multiple of 10 seconds. An interval
start time that is not divisible by the interval will effectively be delayed to the next multiple of the interval.
C Values could be lost if a power failure occurs while they are being logged. The data logging will re-
synchronise to the calendar clock after the re-start.
1
The location identification of a parameter can be seen by navigating to the parameter screen and then pressing the ‘a’-key.
Instructions:
1. Before proceeding, ensure that you have a list of parameters and their database location IDs 2. The
identification numbers are important because they will be input to identify parameters to be archived.
(a) Browse through the “Configure list” menu to locate the ‘Pointer’ and ‘Action’ parameters.
(b) Starting with first item, Item 1, manually enter (SET) the location ID of a parameter and then select
a statistical (action) function. (See Table 9.4 for further guidance.)
(c) Repeat step 4b with the next item until all parameters have been nominated.
B A period that falls within an adjustment for daylight saving will be 24 +/- 1 hour.
C Values could be lost if a power failure occurs while they are being logged. The data logging will re-
synchronise to the calendar clock after the re-start.
2
The identification number of a parameter can be seen by navigating to the parameter screen and then pressing the ‘a’-key.
Instructions:
1. Before proceeding, ensure that you have a list of parameters and their database location IDs 3. The
identification numbers are important because they will be input to identify parameters to be archived.
(a) Browse through the “Configure list” menu to locate the ‘Pointer’ and ‘Action’ parameters.
(b) Starting with first item, Item 1, manually enter (SET) the location ID of a parameter and then select
a statistical (action) function. (See Table 9.6 for further guidance.)
(c) Repeat step 4b with the next item until all parameters have been nominated.
C Values could be lost if a power failure occurs while they are being logged. The data logging will re-
synchronise to the calendar clock after the re-start.
3
The identification number of a parameter can be seen by navigating to the parameter screen and then pressing the ‘a’-key.
Instructions:
4
1. Before proceeding, ensure that you have a list of parameters and their database location IDs . The
identification numbers are important because they will be input to identify parameters to be archived.
(a) Browse through the “Configure list” menu to locate the ‘Pointer’ and ‘Action’ parameters.
(b) Starting with first item, Item 1, manually enter (SET) the location ID of a parameter and then select
a statistical (action) function. (See Table 9.8 for further guidance.)
(c) Repeat step 4b with the next item until all parameters have been nominated.
B Values could be lost if a power failure occurs while they are being logged. The data logging will re-
synchronise to the calendar clock after the re-start.
4
The identification number of a parameter can be seen by navigating to the parameter screen and then pressing the ‘a’-key.
Instructions:
1. Before proceeding, ensure that you have a list of parameters and their database location IDs 5. The
identification numbers are important because they will be input to identify parameters to be archived.
(a) Browse through the “Configure list” menu to locate the ‘Pointer’ and ‘Action’ parameters.
(b) Starting with first item, Item 1, manually enter (SET) the location ID of a parameter and then select
a statistical (action) function. (See Table 9.4 for further guidance.)
(c) Repeat step 4b with the next item until all parameters have been nominated.
B Interval between monthly logging is exactly one calendar month to the day and time on that day. For
example if the start time is “01-03-2004 09:00:00”, the first data logging occurs on “01-04-2004 09:00:00”.
Subsequent data logging then occurs on 1st day of the month at 9am.
C Values could be lost if a power failure occurs while they are being logged. The data logging will re-
synchronise to the calendar clock after the re-start.
5
The identification number of a parameter can be seen by navigating to the parameter screen and then pressing the ‘a’-key.
IMPORTANT NOTICES!
1. Adding a parameter to a data logging list causes all recorded statistics to be immediately
lost from the associated archive. This does not affect other archives.
2. Removing a parameter from a data logging list causes all recorded data to be immediately
lost from the associated archive. This does not affect other archives.
3. Increasing or decreasing space will result in all recorded data being lost from all archives.
Re-size Instructions:
1. Press the PRINT MENU key.
Each ‘re-size’ menu features two parameters; one parameter is for requesting an increase or
decrease to the depth – i.e. the maximum quantity of values per parameter that can be stored. The
other parameter shows the maximum quantity allowed at present.
(4b) Confirm this request for more space by selecting the "Reformat” command through the parameter
under the ”Re-format archives” menu.
Warning! Increasing or decreasing space will cause all recorded values to be lost from all
archives. Use the ‘max snaphot’ parameter to check on the result of a request.
Viewing Archives
Recorded values can be viewed on the 7955 Flow Computer display. No configuration is required for this
feature, just follow the instructions that are provided below.
2. Select the menu associated with the archive you want to view e.g. “Alarm log”.
3. Find out if data has been recorded in the archive by selecting the “Num snaps stored” menu. The
parameter shows how many values (per parameter) are available from data logging.
4. There are menus for displaying a previously recorded value for every listed (nominated) parameter. For
example, the value of the first nominated parameter is found in the “Snap item 1 value” menu.
By default, the most recently recorded values from the last data logging can be seen. The “Select
snapshot” menu is for selecting other data logging occurrences. For example, manually entering a “1” is
for showing the oldest recorded values. Selecting a ‘snapshot’ that does not yet exist will always cause
the most recent recorded values to be selected and then displayed.
5. Select the “View snapshot time” menu to see the date and time of when the presently displayed statistics
were recorded.
Options
Purpose of options
(as displayed)
Print interval arc • Printout the ‘Interval’ archive as a report.
Print daily arc • Printout the ‘Daily’ archive as a report.
Print manual arc • Printout the ‘Manual’ archive as a report.
Print alarm arc • Printout the ‘Alarm’ archive as a report.
Print monthly arc • Printout the ‘Monthly’ archive as a report.
Instructions:
1. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“View/print logs”>
2. Select a menu that is name-associated with the archive.
3. Select the “Print” menu.
4. Select the “Print snapshot” or “Print archive” command.
All methods require an RS-232 Communications Port to be set-up (see Chapter 7). Printouts are
transmitted through the port that is configured exclusively for connection to a printer.
Objective: Set-up 7955 Flow Computer to record the average of line pressure measurements on a daily
basis
Instructions:
1. Add the parameter to the “Daily log” archive list:
(1a) Press the PRINT MENU key.
(1b) Navigate to: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Daily log”>/<“Configure list”>/<“Item 1”>
(1c) Select the “Pointer” menu to displays a parameter, <“Daily snap locn 1”>.
(1d) Press the ‘b’ key and then type in the location ID for the Line Pressure parameter e.g. “0321”.
(1e) Confirm the edited location ID by pressing the ENTER key.
(1f) Select the “Action” menu and then change the parameter option selection to “Averaging”.
Options
Purpose of options
(as displayed)
Log data only • Data copied into the “Daily log” archive. No printed report following archive.
Log and print data • Data copied into the “Daily log” archive. Print a report following archive. *
* An RS-232 port should be configured for connection to a “Printer”.
Parameters
Purposes
(as displayed)
Num daily snapshots • The number of snapshots per parameter inside the “Daily log” archive.
Daily snap, 0=latest • View selection: 0 = recent snap, 1 = oldest snap, 2 = 2nd oldest snap, etc.
Daily snap value n • Selected view of a value from the parameter nominated as Item n.
Daily snapshot at • Shows the date and time of the last daily snapshot.
2. Press the ‘a’ key to display the location number (ID) on line four of the display
8. Edit the value to be one of noted the location numbers e.g. “0321”.
A valid location number is automatically replaced with the parameter name. Attempts to use location
numbers that do not exist are greeted with the message “Bad location ID” or “** Error **” before re-using
the original setting.
CURRENT REPORT
================
Report printing time: 21/01/2008 15:26:29
Tag number HB5X1540
Software Version 1540 Iss 4.30.00
Indicated vol rate 200.000 m3/hour SET
Ind volume total 4039565.849 m3
******************** END OF REPORT ********************
This is automatically included in all reports. By default, the tag number is left blank. Edit a tag number to
avoid this and uniquely identify the 7955.
Note: If you have more than one 7955, it is advisable to define a tag number for each one.
(See MAIN menu: <“Tag number”>)
By default, these are left blank. They automatically appear in all reports once defined.
Header lines 1 to 5
A maximum of five lines can be edited, with free-form text, to appear between the “tag number” line and
the “report printing time” line. Blank lines are not shown.
Footer lines 1 to 5
A maximum of five lines can be edited, with free-form text, to appear prior to the end of report message.
Blank lines are not shown.
To find these options, Press the PRINT MENU key and select the “Headers/Footers” menu.
How to define a list of parameters for a Current report, Alarm report or Event report:
1. Find a parameter within the 7955 menu system e.g. Line Pressure.
2. Press the ‘a’ key to display the location number (ID) on line four of the display.
8. Select a menu relating to an unused entry in the report e.g. “Entry 1”.
You can choose the units and data display formats for:
• Flow rates.
• Flow totals.
• Line density.
• Base density.
• Temperature.
• Static pressure.
• Base pressure.
• Differential pressure.
• Dynamic viscosity.
• Turbine ‘k’ factor.
• Gas data.
• Energy.
• Length.
• Time.
• Periodic time (Frequency).
• Orifice Coefficients.
A full list of the units (metric and imperial) is given at the end of this chapter. Note that, if you change the units,
the values are converted automatically to reflect the change.
9.4 Limits
You can set limits for some parameters so that an alarm is generated if the limits are exceeded.
There are several types of limit:
• High limit
The highest value that the parameter can have before an alarm is generated in the Historical Alarm Log.
• Low limit
The lowest value that the parameter can have before an alarm is generated in the Historical Alarm Log.
• Step limit
The greatest allowable step between successive values before an alarm is generated in the Historical Alarm Log.
• Comparison limit
The greatest allowable difference between values from separate measurement channels before an alarm is
generated in the Historical Alarm Log.
The parameters, and the types of limit that you can set for them, are:
• Mass flow rate: high and low
• Line density: high, low, step and comparison
• Base density: high, low, step and comparison
• Line temperature: high, low and step
• Line pressure: high, low and step
• Alarm X and Y: high and low.
• Alarm A and B: Comparison
• Specific gravity: high, low, step and comparison
• Base volume flow rate: high and low
• Turbine frequency: high
• Differential pressure: high
• None The system uses whatever value is available for the parameter regardless
of whether or not the live input has failed.
• Last good value The system uses, for the parameter, the last value prior to failure.
• Fixed value The system uses whatever fixed value you have specified for the fallback.
• Base units: The 7955 will transmit parameter values in base units (over a MODBUS
link). Parameter values in the 7955 database are stored in base units.
• Default units: Units which the 7955 displays unless you choose an alternative.
• Other units: Units which you can choose instead of the default.
Note that many of the abbreviations used in the tables are defined in the glossary.
• Calibration certificates (and supporting data sheets) for all field instrumentation are available.
• there is a comprehensive list of all the 7955 input and output connections that are being used and
a list of the measurement tasks that are required.
Step 2: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through pages until the “Configure” option appears.
Step 3: Press the blue key that is alongside the “Configure” option.
1
A free PC utility that can be downloaded from the website(s) listed on the back page.
Step 4: Press the ‘a’-key twice so that “Setup Wizard” appears on line one of the display. Do not worry
about what line two is presently displaying.
Step 5: Press the ‘b’-key once to start the wizard selection process.
Step 6: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through all available wizards (on line two).
Step 7: Press the ENTER key twice to select and then start a wizard that was named is on-screen.
Once a Wizard is started, follow the prompts to supply the information it asks for and then, if necessary, use
Chapter 11 and the menu system to edit the resulting configuration to match your exact needs.
After completing a Wizard, the screen with “Setup Wizard” re-appears. Further wizards can then be
selected in the same way as before. Note that it is not necessary for the “None” option to be selected before
proceeding to other 7955 work.
Flow meter • Frequency (Turbine or Ultrasonic Flow) See pages 11.9, 11.13 and 11.33
• Differential pressure (Orifice Flow) of Chapter 11 to find detailed
• Volume (Linear Flow) information.
• Base volume
Flow rate
• Mass
• Gas density ‘A’ (Transducers)
See page 11.53 of Chapter 11 for
Line density • Gas density ‘B’ (PTZ 1, PTZ2, mA, HART)
detailed information.
• Prime Meter Density
• Base density ‘A’ (SG)
See page 11.62 of Chapter 11 to
Base Density • Base density ‘B’ (PTZ1, PTZ2 or mA)
find detailed information.
• Prime base density
• SG ‘A’ (Transducers)
See page 11.69 of Chapter 11 to
Specific gravity • SG ‘B’ (Base Density, mA or Chromat)
find detailed information.
• Prime specific gravity
• Metering temperature (Analogue or HART) See page 11.50 of Chapter 11 to
Temperature
‘Density’ temperatures (Analogue or HART) find detailed information
• Metering pressure (mA or HART) See page 11.52 of Chapter 11 to
Pressure
• Atmospheric pressure (mA or HART) find detailed information.
• Cv/m from ISO6976, AGA5, mA or Chromat
See page 11.72 of Chapter 11 to
Energy Value • Relative density
find detailed information.
• Wobbe Index
See page 11.72 of Chapter 11 to
Transmitters • Live CO2, N2 and Cv/m (mA sources)
find detailed information.
• Special equation type 1 See pages 11.79 - 11.80 of
Special calc.
• Special equation type 2 Chapter 11 for information.
See page 11.76 of Chapter 11 for
Analogue outputs • mA signal outputs
detailed information.
See page 11.78 of Chapter 11 for
Pulse outputs • Pulse outputs
detailed information.
Step 2: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through pages until the “Configure” option appears.
Step 3: Press the blue key that is alongside the “Configure” option.
Step 4: Press the blue key that is alongside this description: “Units wizard”‘
Step 5: Press the ‘b’-key once to start the selection process.
Step 6: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through all available options (see map below).
Step 7: Press the ENTER key twice to select the standard that is named is on-screen.
Units wizard
(Selection)
Choosing this will not do anything. Use scroll up/down keys
Choose option to move through the wizard options.
"Metric"
Metric
"Imperial"
Imperial Exit Wizard
SI
"SI"
It is primarily organised for a structured approach to configuring - the live inputs, the calculations and the
live outputs - after the first power-on.
However, for those in a support role, a ‘quick-find’ index is provided for locating just the reference pages
required for configuring or trouble-shooting a measurement task.
If you are not experienced, return to Chapter 10 (Configuring with Wizards) unless directed here by this
Operating Manual or by someone providing support.
Not all features are covered in this Chapter. For example, configuring the 7955 to work with HART
networked transmitters can be a complex task and is therefore kept in Chapter 16. Other non-core features
can be found in Chapters 7, 8, 9 and 12.
If you require WET GAS ORIFICE METERING support, please use Chapters 11A that
immediately follows this main Chapter 11.
Careful preparation will help ensure that configuration work progresses smoothly. Work through the
preparation and configuration stages that are listed below.
Note: In a multiple stream/run installation, it is strongly advisable to complete and check the configuration
for an individual run before proceeding with another.
2. Read the information on conventions used in this Chapter. (See page 11.6)
3. Browse through the rest of this chapter and see how the reference pages are organised.
(End of preparation stage)
Display Formats
• Display formats are important when decimal places of results are critical. They are categorised under
general headings (e.g. temperature, pressure, etc.). Look in the <“configure”>/<“ Other parameters”>
menu for the appropriate menu and then change the settings if the defaults are not appropriate.
Units of measurement can be changed also.
DO NOT CHANGE ANY SETTINGS UNDER THE CALIBRATION MENUS. SETTINGS ARE
MADE BY SPECIALIST CALIBRATION EQUIPMENT AT THE FACTORY.
3. Switch the 7955 into the maintenance mode of operation on a stream by stream basis.
(Warning! This step will prevent the incrementing of main totals prior to going live)
• Press the INFORMATION MENU (‘I’) key.
• Use the DOWN-ARROW (V) key to page down until “Operating mode” (or similar) is seen.
• Press the BLUE (letter) key that is alongside that description.
• If necessary, use the STREAM/RUN/STREAM SELECT key to switch to another stream/run.
• Change the option description (value) to “Maintenance”.
(Note: Value quickly reverts to “Normal” if the 7955 is not in ‘Flow Stop’ state for the stream/run)
• Repeat the last two steps if configuring for further stream/runs.
• Press the MAIN MENU key.
12. Switch the 7955 into the normal mode of operation on a stream by stream basis.
(Warning! This step will allow the main totals to increment)
• Press the INFORMATION MENU (‘I’) key.
• Use the DOWN-ARROW (V) key to page down until “Operating mode” (or similar) is seen.
• Press the BLUE (letter) key that is alongside that description.
• If necessary, use the STREAM/RUN/STREAM-SELECT key to switch to another stream/run.
• Change the option description (value) to “Normal”.
(Note: Value quickly reverts to “Maintenance” if 7955 is not in a ‘Flow Stop’ state for the stream/run)
• Press the MAIN MENU key.
(End of configuration stage)
These drawings are very important because they show how menu data interacts to get a result. Drawings
are generic for configuring more than one channel or stream/run.
Note: A circled number refers to an entry in the Menu Data / Parameter list. They are NOT location numbers.
The data necessary for configuring a measurement or feature can be found in separate parts of the menu
structure. A list of the applicable menu structure parts, in a simple notation format, is therefore provided to
assist with navigating to a sub-menu. Data can then be quickly located by some localised searching within
that sub-menu.
A notation has been used as a much shorter method of explaining how to move from the present menu to
another menu. As an example, the notation of <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”> translates into these steps:
Step 1: Press the MAIN MENU key
Step 2: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through pages until the word “Configure” is seen.
Step 3: Press the BLUE (letter) key that is alongside “Configure”.
Step 4: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through pages until “Flow rate” is seen.
Step 5: Press the BLUE (letter) key that is alongside “Flow rate”.
Sometimes, it is convenient to use the MAIN-MENU key (especially if lost). However, use of the BACK-
ARROW (curved arrow) key is a much more common method of returning to a higher menu level.
Note: The menu structure will vary in other software versions and releases.
ANALOGUE INPUTS
Features:
• Analogue Inputs supported by 7955:
RTD/PT100 input channels (Analogue inputs 1 to 4)
mA input channels (Analogue inputs 1 to 16)
What to do:
Use this page to configure the analogue channels that are being used by analogue field transmitters. After the menu-
based parameters are configured, check that a live reading is displayed by the “value” parameter.
Later reference pages, which deal with configuring measurement tasks such as temperature, pressure, etc., will
expect transmitters to be connected and supplying a live reading. Configuring a measurement task will involve
providing range (scaling) information and choosing the analogue channel.
Analogue Inputs are not pre-allocated to a measurement or feature and are not directly associated with a stream/run.
DIGITAL INPUTS
Features:
• Digital inputs supported by 7955 - Status Input channels 1 to 26.
What To Do:
This reference page will assist when configuring basic data (see list below) for all the digital input channels that are
supported. Digital inputs are not associated with any stream/run and they do not have a default function allocated.
They can be allocated these functions:
Flow Direction: Indicate flow direction for Ultrasonic Flow Metering. See also the Ultrasonic Flow Metering
section (page 11.34) for all associated menu data / parameters.
Flow Stop: Force the 7955 into a ‘flow stopped’ state. Select a digital input using the menu-based
parameter: <“Configure”>/<“Status inputs”>/<”Flowstop status i/p”>.
(See also the various Flow Metering pages in Chapter 11 for further information .)
Remote Print: Transmit the Current Report (Chapter 8) through a 7955 serial port that is configured for
connection to a printer (Chapter 7). Select a digital input using the menu-based
parameter: <“Configure”>/<“Status inputs”>/<”Print req status i/p”>
Maintenance Mode: Switch to the Maintenance (operating) mode from Normal (operating) mode if the 7955 is
in a 'flow stopped' state. Select a digital input using the menu-based parameter:
<“Configure”>/<“Status inputs”>/<”Maintenance sts i/p”>.
(See also the various Totalising pages in Chapter 11 for further information on these modes.)
What To Do:
Use this page to configure the basic live input information (listed parameter) for each pulse input channel that is being
used by a supported volumetric flowmeter. Later reference pages, for configuring further flow details, will expect the
instrumentation to be wired to the 7955, and expect a pulse frequency value.
After a channel is configured, check on the pulse frequency that is being indicated by the ‘frequency’ parameter. Use
the STREAM/RUN SELECT key to cycle between screens for different streams/runs.
Also, use the <“Health Check”> menu to view other diagnostic information such as the missing pulse counter.
Menu Data / Parameter List: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Pulse Channel Parameter names Pulse Channel Parameter names
Note? Note?
(fixed allocation) (as displayed) (fixed allocation) (as displayed)
Flow meter frequency * c Flow meter frequency * e
Pulse Input 1 Flow meter type c Pulse Input 3 Flow meter type e
(Stream/Run 1) Flow meter error lmt (Stream/Run 3) Flow meter error lmt
Meter pulses c Meter pulses e
Flow meter frequency * d Flow meter frequency * f
Pulse Input 2 Flow meter type d Pulse Input 4 Flow meter type f
(Stream/Run 2) Flow meter error lmt (Stream/Run 4) Flow meter error lmt
Meter pulses d Meter pulses f
Notes:
c Stream/run 1.
d Stream/run 2.
e Stream/run 3.
f Stream/run 4.
A The configurable (Set) error limit for missed pulses is not applicable unless there are dual pulse trains being
received by the 7955.
Where: F is the pulse frequency ................................................... {Menu Data: <”Flow meter frequency”>}
P is the number of accumulated pulses since time ‘t’ ....... {Menu Data: <"Meter pulses">}
t is the elapsed time (seconds) since the last calculation {Not in menu}
If you require WET GAS ORIFICE METERING support, please use Chapter 11A that
immediately follows this main Chapter 11.
FLOW METERING
FLOW METERING
Range Details 33 42 44
To
3 4 5 Intermediate Results
1 2 10 11 12 HI
6 7 8 δP 24
To
31 47 48
Modbus 18 23 45
1..n D.P. Cell
%δP 17 ρ 43 Orifice
Source Scaling 9 Config. & Orifice Method MASS
mA Inputs 1..n δP 22 Calculations OR 44 FLOW
Selection Selection Select Selection
P, t (Plate) RATE
HART Inputs (HART) δP 13 14 15 16 19 33 39 42 44
To AGA 3 or HART or
LO
20 21 46 MODBUS
Intermediate Results
F/B FLOW
STOP To
24 30 47 48
Orifice
P, t Calculations
ρ 43 (V-Cone)
33 To
42
Range Details
HI 43 44
3 4 5 To
1 2 10 11 12 18 40 23 30 ρ 41
6 7 8
Modbus 17 P,t 39
D.P. Cell Orifice Mass Rate MASS
%δP δP
Source Scaling 9 Config. & δP 22 Calculations Calculation 40 FLOW
mA Inputs 1..n 1..n 38 RATE
Selection Selection (Plate) (AGA 3)
Kf
HART Inputs (HART) δP 13 14 15 16 19 31 37
To ISO 5167
LO or HART
20 21 42 Interim or Modbus
Results
F/B Flow
Stop
Menu Data / Parameter List: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes? Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes?
- Select flow meter cÖf 26 Isentropic cÖf K
1 DP cell 1 source cÖf A 27 Pipe expans coeff cÖf
2 DP cell 1 ain/hart cÖf (A) 28 Orif expans coeff cÖf
3 Diff press HI @ 100% cÖf 29 Orifice cal temp
4 Diff press HI @ 0% cÖf 30 Orif tapping code cÖf
5 Diff press med @ 100% cÖf 31 Orif discharge coeff cÖf J
6 Diff press med @ 0% cÖf 32 Orif expansibility cÖf J
7 Diff press LO @ 100% cÖf 33 Vel of approach cÖf J
8 Diff press LO @ 0% cÖf 34 Reynolds number cÖf
9 DP value @ cell n cÖf 35 Corr pipe diameter cÖf
10 Diff press config cÖf B 36 Corr orifice diam cÖf
11 Diff press HI switch C 37 Mass rate Beta cÖf
12 Diff press LO switch C 38 Mass rate K factor cÖf
13 Diff press cal error cÖf D 39 Prime density value * cÖf
14 Diff press cal time cÖf D 40 Mass rate * cÖf H, (O)
15 DP deviation limit E 41 Orif mass flow calc cÖf O
16 DP input alarms F 42 DP flow stop limit cÖf (I)
17 Diff press range cÖf G 43 Adiabatic * cÖf K
18 Diff press HI lmt cÖf 44 Isentropic calc src K
19 Diff press LO lmt cÖf t Line temperature * cÖf P. 11.57
20 Diff press FB type P Line pressure * cÖf P. 11.59
21 Diff press FB value cÖf - Rate flowstop actions cÖf I
22 Diff pressure value * cÖf - Flow mode cÖf I
23 Pipe diameter cÖf
24 Orifice diameter cÖf
25 Dynamic visc * cÖf L
Notes are on page 11.16 cÖf = Multi-stream/run type data (page 11.6) (X) = Indirect reference in Note X
HI
4
1 2 3 MASS
Q CORRECTED
RATE m Corrected QIV
Source Method VOLUME
HART Inputs Qm Qm 6 Volume 9
Selection Selection RATE
(Calculation)
7 8 5 9
ISO 5167, AGA 3 or Modbus
F/B LO
ρb
A (1) Mixing of DP sources (HART/mA input/Modbus) is not supported. Only one type of source can be selected.
(2) When mA Input is the selected source, all mA-type DP transmitters must be wired to analogue inputs in
numerical series. For example, if DP Cell #1 is wired up to the first Analogue Input, DP Cell #2 must then be
wired to the second Analogue Input. Parameter <”DP cell 1 ain/hart”> selects the analogue input that starts
the series. For wiring examples, see Chapter 2.
(3) When HART is the selected source, the HART transmitters providing DP must use the <HART Input n value>
parameters in numeric series. Parameter <”DP cell 1 ain/hart”> selects the HART Input that starts this series.
For all details of the HART support, see Chapter 16.
(4) When Modbus is the selected source, the ‘intelligent’ transmitter monitor (ITM) feature can supply the prime
DP selection block with raw measurements from up to five ‘DP cells’. For all details of the ITM feature, refer
to Chapter 7, Addendum E.
H=DP:1 L=DP:2 Cell #1 covers the high pressure range. Cell #2 covers the low pressure range.
Cell #1 (‘Master’) and Cell #2 (‘Check’) cover the high pressure range.
H=DP:12 L=DP:3
Cell #3 covers the low pressure range.
Cell #1 (on high pressure range). Cell #2 (on medium pressure range).
H=DP1 M=DP2 L=DP3
Cell #3 (on low pressure range).
Cell #1 (‘Master’) and Cell #2 (‘Check’) cover the high pressure range.
H=DP:12 L=DP:34
Cell #3 (‘Master’) and Cell #4 (‘Check’) cover the low pressure range.
Cell #1 (‘Master’), Cell #2 (‘Check’) and Cell #3 (‘Check’) on high pressure range.
H=DP:1p23 L=DP:4p5
Cell #4 (‘Master’) and Cell #5 (‘Check’) cover the low pressure range.
DP A (= cell1) See “Prime Re-Selection Procedure” that follows these notes.
DP B (= cell2) See “Prime Re-Selection Procedure” that follows these notes.
AutoA (=cell1, or 2) See “Prime Re-Selection Procedure” that follows these notes.
AutoB (=cell2, or 1) See “Prime Re-Selection Procedure” that follows these notes.
Avg A/B (=cell1/2) Average of readings from Cell#1 and Cell#2 each cycle is used as the DP value.
C DP cell switching is based on the low range cell. The Flow Computer will automatically switch-up a range when
the low range cell reading exceeds the HIGH SWITCH point. Similarly, the Flow Computer will automatically
switch-down a range when the low range cell reading is less than the LO SWITCH limit
E Deviation refers to difference in differential pressure measurements between two comparable cells e.g. ‘Master’
(or ‘Pay’) DP Cell and ‘Check’ DP Cells, or DP ‘A’ and DP ‘B’.
F Automatic selection of a ‘higher’ range DP Cell can cause a mA input failure alarm to be raised even though the
transmitter has not actually failed. The cause of this alarm is the mA signal from a ‘lower’ range cell exceeding
111% of the 20mA analogue input range as the cell continues to measure beyond it’s effective range. This
alarm condition remains until the lower range cell is re-selected.
The <“DP inputs alarm”> parameter gives the option of suppressing the alarm under this particular situation. By
default, there is no suppression.
Notes continued…
G This is a read-only parameter that identifies the range of the selected (prime) DP Cell.
H The Reynolds Number calculation is iterative and requires a previous value for the Mass Rate. This is why the
Mass Rate is shown by an Orifice calculation block.
I The <“Flow mode”> menu, within the INFORMATION (‘i’) key menu, shows if the Flow Computer considers
there to be either normal flow or zero flow in the stream/run pipe.
• Flow stop (zero flow) thresholds, such as <“DP flow stop limit”>, are used to force live flow rates to 0 and
therefore halt flow totals even when there is negligible flow – <“Flow mode”> will show “Flow stopped”.
However, negligible flow rate values may still be displayed if enabled by <“Rate flowstop actions”>.
• In the case of an Orifice System, the prime differential pressure value must be greater than the setting of
<“DP flow stop limit”> for normal flow, whereby <“Flow mode”> will show the state of “Flowing”.
J Support for the use of other Primary DP devices, such as a Dall Tube, is made possible with the ability to use
fixed (SET) values for the Expansibility factor, the Velocity of approach and the Discharge coefficient.
In the case of a Dall Tube, a Reynolds Number Correction value must be combined with one of those ‘Set’
values if it is not 1.00.
K There are two supported methods for calculating the Isentropic and Adiabatic exponents: the ‘GOSST’ method
and the ‘RD-50-213-80’ method. You may select either method. Also, see the Equation List for terms and
associated parameters.
Configuration Instructions:
• Navigate to the <Isentropic> sub-menu under orifice flowmeter details menu.
• Locate the calculation selection parameter.
• Select either “GOSST” or “RD-50-213-80”.
• Set-up the associated parameters, as listed in the Equation List.
L There are two methods available for calculating gas dynamic viscosity: ‘GOSST’ and ‘VDE/VDI 2040’. You
may select either method. Also, see the Equation List for terms and associated parameters.
Configuration Instructions:
• Navigate to the <Dynamic viscosity> sub-menu under orifice flowmeter details menu.
• Locate the calculation selection parameter.
• Select either “GOSST” or “VDE/VDI 2040”.
• Set-up the associated parameters, as listed in the Equation List.
M Pressure loss is applicable only when using a venturi DP device. There are two methods available for
calculating the pressure loss: ‘ISO5167’ and ‘A.beta^2+B.beta+C”.
Configuration Instructions:
• Navigate to the <”Pressure loss calc”> sub-menu under orifice flowmeter details menu.
• Locate the calculation selection parameter.
• Select either “ISO5167” or “A.beta^2+B.beta+C”.
• Set-up the associated parameters, as listed in the Equation List.
N ISO 5167 related alarms can be suppressed by this parameter. By default, this feature is not enabled.
O When ISO5167 (1991), ISO5167:Am1 (1998) or ISO5167 (2003) is selected, the mass rate is calculated in
accordance with the referenced issue of the ISO 5167 Standard.
When Modbus is selected, the ‘intelligent’ transmitter monitor (ITM) feature can be set-up to supply the mass
flow rate. For all details of the ITM feature, refer to Chapter 7, Addendum E.
When AGA3 is selected, the mass rate is calculated in accordance with AGA report 3 (1992, Third edition).
When HART is selected, the mass rate is supplied by a HART transmitter. For all details of HART support, see
Chapter 16.
• The logic table below is shown in full for the “Auto A” configuration option, where Cell #1 (DP‘A’) is preferred.
DP ‘A’ DP ‘B’ A#B (Comp.) DP ‘A’ input DP ‘B’ input Prime DP Key:
out of limit out of limit out of limit failed failed Selected
A = DP Cell #1 (DP ‘A’)
YES YES YES - - FB
B = DP Cell #2 (DP ‘B’)
- YES YES - - A
YES - YES - - B FB = Fallback
- - YES - - B
YES YES - - A Notes:
- YES - - A
1. The “Auto B”
YES - - - B
- - - - A
configuration option
YES YES YES YES - FB
uses the same logic
- YES YES YES - FB table except DP ‘B’ is
YES - YES YES - B the preferred channel.
- - YES YES - B This preference
YES YES - YES - B reverses the A and B
- YES - YES - FB selection in the last
YES - - YES - B column of this table.
- - - YES - B
YES YES YES - YES FB 2. “Out of limit”
- YES YES - YES A columns 1 and 2 are
YES - YES - YES FB concerned with the HI
- - YES - YES A
or LO alarm limits.
YES YES - - YES FB
- YES - - YES A
YES - - - YES FB 3. The “Input failed”
- - - - YES A columns are
YES YES YES YES YES FB concerned with ‘Live’
- YES YES YES YES FB inputs.
YES - YES YES YES FB
- - YES YES YES FB
YES YES - YES YES FB
- YES - YES YES FB
YES - - YES YES FB
- - - YES YES FB
• The logic table (below) is shown in full for the “DP A” configuration option, where Cell #2 (DP ‘B’) is not involved
• The logic table (below) is shown in full for the “DP B” configuration option, where Cell #2 (DP ‘A’) is not involved
Note: Support for the use of other Primary DP devices, such as a Dall Tube, is made possible with the ability to ‘Set’
values for the Expansibility factor, the Velocity of approach and the Discharge coefficient.
In the case of a Dall Tube, a Reynolds Number Correction value must be combined with one of those ‘Set’
values if it is not 1.00.
⎛ δP ⎞
Using: qm = K* ⎜ * ρ ⎟ * 3600
⎝ 1000 ⎠
Using: K = Cd * E * ε * d2 * N1
Where: K = Mass flow rate ‘K’ factor..................................... {Parameter: <“Mass rate k factor”>}
Cd = Discharge coefficient.......................................... {See equations OR#9a to #9d}
E = Velocity of approach factor................................. {See Equation OR#7}
ε = Expansibility factor............................................. {See Equation OR#6a (Plate), #6b (Venturi) }
d' = Orifice diameter, corrected for expansion.......... {See Equation OR#3a}
Equation OR#3: Correction for area expansion of the orifice and pipe
Using: d' [ ]
= d * 1 + (t − t c ) * E o * 10 −6 ……………………….. #3a
Where: d' = Orifice diameter, corrected for expansion.......... {Parameter: <“Corr orifice diam”>}
d = Orifice diameter at calibration temperature ‘tc’.. {Parameter: <“Orifice diameter”}
t = Temperature at the stream/run....................... {Parameter: <“Meter temperature”>}
tc = Orifice calibration temperature........................... {Parameter: <“Orifice cal temp”>}
Eo = Orifice expansion coefficient.............................. {Parameter: <“Orif expans coeff”>
Using: D' [ ]
= D * 1 + (t − t c ) * EP * 10 −6 …………….………. #3b
Where: D' = Pipe diameter, corrected for expansion............ {Parameter: <“Corr pipe diameter”>}
D = Pipe diameter at calibration temperature ‘toc’... {Parameter: <“Pipe diameter”>}
t = Temperature at the stream/run...................... {Parameter: <“Meter temperature”>}
tc = Orifice plate calibration temperature................. {Parameter: <“Orifice cal temp”>}
EP = Pipe expansion coefficient................................ {Parameter: <“Pipe expans coeff”>}
Using: ε ( (
= 1 − 0.41 + 0.35 * β 4 *)) δP * 10 −3
Kε * P
( )
1
−
Using: E = 1 − β4 2
⎛ q ⎞ ⎛ 4 * 10 6 ⎞⎟
Using: Red = ⎜⎜ m ⎟⎟ * ⎜
⎝ 3600 ⎠ ⎜⎝ π * D * μ ⎟⎠
⎛ q ⎞ ⎛ 4 * 10 6 ⎞
Using: Red = N2 * ⎜⎜ m ⎟⎟ * ⎜ ⎟
⎝ 3600 ⎠ ⎜⎝ D * μ ⎟
⎠
Equation OR#8a: STOLZ (ISO 5167-1:1991) Discharge coefficient for Orifice Plate
• Basic Equation Component
0.75
⎛ 10 6 ⎞
Use: C1 = 0.5959 + 0.312 * β 2. 1
− 0.184 * β + 0.0029 * β
8 2.5
*⎜ ⎟
⎜ R ed ⎟
⎝ ⎠
Where: C1 = Basic equation component
β = Diameter ratio................................................ {See Equation OR#5}
Red = Reynolds number........................................... {See Equation OR#8a}
Use: C = C1
Use: C ( )(
= C1 + 0.039 * β 4 * 1 − β 4 ) − (0.015839 * β )
−1 3
• For Flange Tappings where the pipe diameter (corrected for expansion) is larger than 58.62mm
Use: C ( )(
= C1 + 0.039 * β 4 * 1 − β 4 )−1 ⎛ 0.85598
−⎜
⎝ D
⎞
* β3 ⎟
⎠
• For Flange Tappings where the pipe diameter (corrected for expansion) is less than or equal to 58.62mm
Use: C
⎛ 2.286
= C1 + ⎜
⎝ D
⎞
⎠
(
* β4 ⎟ * 1 − β4 )−1 ⎛ 0.85598
−⎜
⎝ D
⎞
* β3 ⎟
⎠
C=0.985 when there is a rough welded sheet iron convergent section where :-
200mm ≤ D ≥ 1200mm
0.4 ≤ β ≥ 0.7
2 * 105 ≤ Red ≥ 1 * 106
Refer to section 8.3.2.1 of the ISO 5167-1:1991(E)/Amd.1:1998(E) Standard for details of the Reader-
Harris/Gallagher equation.
⎡ PR ² ⎤
μ = 3.24 * [(TF 0.5 + 1.37 - 9.09δS0.125) / ( δS0.5 + 2.08 - 1.5(XB + XY))] * ⎢1 + ⎥
⎣ 30(TR − 1) ⎦
Where:
PF
PR =
PPC
TF
TR =
TPC
Where:
The pseudo critical pressure and temperature is calculated using the following formulae:
Where:
PPc = Pseudo critical pressure in BarA……………………...…..… {Not Available}
TPc = Pseudo critical temperature in °K…………………………... {Not Available}
δS = Gas density at reference conditions………………..…….… {Parameter: <”Prime base density“>}
XB = Percentage of nitrogen in the natural gas (N2)…..……….. {Parameter: <”Norm Nitrogen“>}
XY = Percentage of carbon dioxide in the natural gas (CO2).…. {Parameter: <”Norm CO2“>}
AE = 1.556 * (1 + 0.074 XB) - 3.9 * 10-4T (1-0.68XB)-0.208 δS + (PF / TF)1.43 [384 (1-XB)**(PF / TF)0.8 + 26.4XB]
Where:
⎛ 2 ⎞
Using: Qm =
π
4
* ( 2*g c )
⎜ D * β2
*ρ *⎜
⎜ 1− β4
⎟
⎟ * δP * C f * ε * 3600 * Fa
⎟
⎝ ⎠
If the material expansion coefficients of the pipe and the cone are not the same…
(1 − β ' ) (D * β )
Use: Fa = 1 2 2
#2b
4 2
Where: β ' = Meter beta ratio (no units)………….………….………... {Parameter: <“Mass rate Beta”>}
d' = Cone outside diameter, corrected for expansion…...… {See Equation OVC#4b}
D' = Cone inner diameter, corrected for expansion……..…. {See Equation OVC#4a}
Where: β = Meter beta ratio (no units)……….…………….………... {Parameter: <“Mass rate Beta”>}
d = Cone outside diameter, uncorrected for expansion…... {Parameter: <“Orifice diameter”>}
D = Cone inner diameter, uncorrected for expansion…..…. {Parameter: <“Pipe diameter”>}
Where: D' = Cone inner diameter, corrected for expansion……....… {Parameter: <“Corr pipe diameter”>}
D = Cone inner diameter (in metres), uncorrected……..….. {Parameter: <“Pipe diameter”>}
α = Coefficient for thermal expansion per degree Rankine. {No Parameter}
t = Operating temperature (in degrees Rankine)………….. {Parameter: <”Meter temperature”>}
tc = Calibration temperature (in degrees Rankine)..………. {Parameter: <”Orifice cal temp”>}
Where: d' = Cone outer diameter, corrected for expansion….…..… {Parameter: <“Corr orifice diam”>}
d = Cone outer diameter (in metres), uncorrected……..….. {Parameter: <“Orifice diameter”>}
α = Coefficient for thermal expansion per degree Rankine. {No Parameter}
t = Operating temperature(in degrees Rankine)……….….. {Parameter: <”Meter temperature”>}
tc = Calibration temperature (in degrees Rankine)…..……. {Parameter: <”Orifice cal temp”>}
Using: ε (
= 1 − 0.649 + 0.696β 4 ) Kδ*PP
Where: ε = Expansibility factor......................................................{Menu Data: <“Orif expansibility”>}
β = Meter Beta ratio ..........................................................{See OVC#3b}
δP = Differential pressure (in Bar).......................................{Menu Data: <“Diff pressure value”>}
P = Line pressure (in Bar Absolute) ..................................{Menu Data: <“Meter pressure”>}
K = Isentropic exponent (no units)…......…....................… {See OVC#11a or OVC#11b}
⎛ 4 * QV ⎞
Use: E = ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟
⎝ π * D2 ⎠
Use: Red =
(D * E * ρ)
μ
Where: Red = Reynolds number……………………………………….. {Parameter: <”Reynolds number”>}
E = Velocity of approach factor………………………..…… {See Equation OVC#6}
D = Cone inner diameter, uncorrected for expansion..…. {Parameter: <“Pipe diameter”>}
μ = Dynamic viscosity………………………………………. {See Equation OVC#10}
ρ = Density of measured gas (in Kg/m3).........…...…........ {Parameter: <“Prime density value”>}
⎡ PR ² ⎤
μ = 3.24 * [(TF 0.5 + 1.37 - 9.09δS0.125) / ( δS0.5 + 2.08 - 1.5(XB + XY))] * ⎢1 + ⎥
⎣ 30 (TR − 1) ⎦
Where:
PF
PR =
PPC
TF
TR =
TPC
Where:
The pseudo critical pressure and temperature is calculated using the following formulae:
Where:
PPc = Pseudo critical pressure in BarA………………………..……….. {Not Available}
TPc = Pseudo critical temperature in °K……………………………..… {Not Available}
δS = Gas density at reference conditions…………………….………. {Parameter: <”Prime base density“>}
XB = Percentage of nitrogen in the natural gas (N2)…………..……. {Parameter: <”Norm nitrogen“>}
XY = Percentage of carbon dioxide in the natural gas (CO2)………. {Parameter: <”Norm CO2“>}
AE = 1.556 * (1 + 0.074 XB) - 3.9 * 10-4T (1-0.68XB)-0.208 δS + (PF / TF)1.43 [384 (1-XB)**(PF / TF)0.8 + 26.4XB]
Where:
Calibration
Certificate
HI
2 4 5 6 25 55
Kf Calibration
K Factor Indicated Certificate
PULSE 26 tr Kt KP
FREQUENCY 1 f Calculation Volume Rate
(from Pulse Input) (Conversion) Calculation 4 27 28 47 50 51 52 53 55
f
48
3 Error % Corrections Corrected
f
Menu Data List / Parameter List: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes? Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes?
- Select flow meter cÖf 30 Mtr curve flowrate 2 cÖf
1 Flow meter frequency * cÖf 31 MtrError deviation 2 cÖf
2 Meter freq HI lmt cÖf D 32 Mtr curve flowrate 3 cÖf
3 Meter flow stop lmt cÖf 33 MtrError deviation 3 cÖf
4 Correction method cÖf B 34 Mtr curve flowrate 4 cÖf
5 Mtr K curve points 35 MtrError deviation 4 cÖf
6 Mtr K curve freq 1 cÖf 36 Mtr curve flowrate 5 cÖf
7 Meter K factor 1 cÖf 37 MtrError deviation 5 cÖf
8 Mtr K curve freq 2 cÖf 38 Mtr curve flowrate 6 cÖf
9 Meter K factor 2 cÖf 39 MtrError deviation 6 cÖf
10 Mtr K curve freq 3 cÖf 40 Mtr curve flowrate 7 cÖf
11 Meter K factor 3 cÖf 41 MtrError deviation 7 cÖf
12 Mtr K curve freq 4 cÖf 42 Mtr curve flowrate 8 cÖf
13 Meter K factor 4 cÖf 43 MtrError deviation 8 cÖf
14 Mtr K curve freq 5 cÖf 44 Mtr curve flowrate 9 cÖf
15 Meter K factor 5 cÖf 45 MtrError deviation 8 cÖf
16 Mtr K curve freq 6 cÖf 46 Mtr curve flowrate 10 cÖf
17 Meter K factor 6 cÖf 47 MtrError deviation 10 cÖf
18 Mtr K curve freq 7 cÖf 48 Meter % error * cÖf
19 Meter K factor 7 cÖf 49 Indicated vol rate * cÖf
20 Mtr K curve freq 8 cÖf 50 Meter correct select cÖf
21 Meter K factor 8 cÖf 51 Meter temp reference cÖf
22 Mtr K curve freq 9 cÖf 52 Meter temp correct cÖf
23 Meter K factor 9 cÖf 53 Meter press correct cÖf
24 Mtr K curve freq 10 cÖf 54 Corrected vol rate * cÖf
25 Meter K factor 10 cÖf 55 Rate flowstop action cÖf C
26 Meter K factor * cÖf - Flow mode cÖf C
27 Mtr err curve points P Meter pressure * cÖf P. 11.59
28 Mtr curve flowrate 1 cÖf t Meter temperature * cÖf P. 11.57
29 MtrError deviation 1 cÖf
Notes are on page 11.30. cÖf = Multi-stream/run type data (page 11.6) (X) = Indirect reference in Note X
57
56
Input
HART Inputs Qm
Selection
58 59
CORRECTED
54 Qv
VOLUME RATE Limits &
Mass Rate Method MASS
Qm Qm Fallback 62
Calculation Selection Qm RATE
Checks
PRIME DENSITY 55 ρ
60 61
Modbus Qm
Menu Data List / Parameter List: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes? Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes?
- Flow meter cÖf 59 Mass rate LO limit cÖf A
54 Corrected vol rate * cÖf 60 Mass rate FB type cÖf
55 Prime density value * cÖf 61 Mass rate FB value * cÖf
56 Turb mass flow calc cÖf E 62 Mass rate * cÖf (E)
57 Mass rate HART chl cÖf - Rate flowstop action cÖf C
58 Mass rate HI limit cÖf A - Flow mode cÖf C
Notes: cÖf = Multi-stream/run type data (page 11.6) (X) = Indirect reference in Note X
A Keep both ‘HI’ and ‘LO’ values ‘Set’ to 0 if this alarm limit checking is not required.
C The <“Flow mode”> menu, within the INFORMATION (‘i’) key menu, shows if the Flow Computer considers
there to be normal flow or zero flow in the stream/run pipe.
• Flow stop (zero flow) thresholds, such as <“Meter flow stop”>, are used to force live flow rates to 0, therefore
freezing flow totals even when there is negligible flow. The parameter <“Flow mode”> will then show the
state of “Flow stopped”. However, negligible flow rate values may still be displayed if enabled by the <“Rate
flowstop actions”> parameter.
• In the case of a Turbine Flow Meter, the pulse frequency must be greater than the setting for <“Meter flow
stop”> for normal flow, whereby <“Flow mode”> will show the state of “Flowing”.
E When Density is selected, the mass rate is calculated from prime density (page 11.60) and the corrected
volume flow rate (page 11.30).
When Modbus is selected, the ‘intelligent’ transmitter monitor (ITM) feature can be set-up to supply the mass
flow rate. For all details of the ITM feature, refer to Chapter 7, Addendum E.
When HART is selected, the mass rate is supplied by a HART transmitter. In addition, the corrected volume rate
is then calculated from mass irrespective of configuration. For all details of HART support, see Chapter 16.
The raw data on the certificate has to be turned into corrected values by the 7955. To do this, a single curve profile
must be set-up in the following way:
Corrected values are not displayed by the 7955 but the calculations used are as follows:
⎛ V * Ea ⎞
Vt = ⎜ a ⎟ + Va
⎝ 100 ⎠
Et =
(Vt * Va ) * 100
Va
Where:
Vt = Corrected volume from test flowmeter
Va = Actual volume (e.g. 100 from the above data)
Et = Corrected percentage error in test turbine reading
Ea = Actual error in Vt reading (e.g. -0.24 from the above data)
The 7955 calculations (for Vt and Ve) use the configured (‘Set’) curve profile to get a modified curve profile:
Flow rate (m3/h) 400.44 280.476 160.096 99.76
Error % 0.1098 0.1697 0.05996 -0.241
With a ‘Live’ (or ‘Set’) Indicated Volume flow rate, an error percentage can be interpolated from the modified
curve. The error percentage is then used to adjust the Corrected Volume flow rate value.
The 7955 can perform the following calculations for Turbine Flow Metering:
⎛ f ⎞
Using: VU = ⎜⎜ ⎟ * 3600
⎟
⎝Kf ⎠
Where: VU = Indicated Volume rate per hour (un-corrected)……... {Parameter: <“Indicated vol rate”>}
f = Flow meter frequency (pulses per second).....…….... {Parameter: <“Flow meter frequency”>}
Kf = ‘K- factor’ (pulses per m3)............................……........ {Parameter: <“Meter K factor”>}
−K ed
Using: VC1 = VU +
100
Where: VC1 = Corrected Volume flow rate (in m3/hour).................... {Parameter: <“Corrected vol rate”>}
VU = Indicated volume flow rate per hour (un-corrected).... {See Equation TU#1}
K ed = Turbine error deviation result...................................... {Parameter: <“Meter % error”>}
Where: VC2 = Corrected Volume flow rate (in m3/hour).................... {Parameter: <“Corrected vol rate”>}
VC1 = Corrected volume flow rate (in m3/hour)..................... {See Equation TU#2}
Kt = Turbine temperature correction factor........................ {Parameter: <“Meter temp Correct”>}
t = Meter temperature...................................................... {Parameter: <“Meter temperature”>}
tr = Turbine reference temperature................................... {Parameter: <“Meter temp reference”>}
Using: (
VC3 = VC2 * 1 + K p * (P − 1.01325 ) )
Where: VC3 = Corrected Volume flow rate (in m3/hour).................... {Parameter: <“Corrected vol rate”>}
VC2 = Corrected Volume flow rate (in m3/hour).................... {See Equation TU#3}
KP = Turbine pressure correction factor.............................. {Parameter: <“Meter press correct”>}
P = Meter pressure........................................................... {Parameter: <“Meter pressure”>}
PULSE 25 26 23 24
Flow Stop
COUNT Indicated +QIV t r Pr
Threshold
Volume Rate Interim
Calculation -QIV Results
Kf 17 37
MF
QCV
+QIV Error % Corrected Flow υ
18 Calculation 34 Volume Rate 35 Velocity 36
-QIV (Flow v Error) Calculation Calculation
Err%
11 12 28 33 34 37 21
D
Fwd/Rev QCV
Curve Profile Conversion
XX Index for use with listed parameters
Factor 38
QIV 18 |QCV - QIV|
Curve profile values are normally obtained from the calibration certificate of the flowmeter.
B Identifies a Status Input to be monitored for a ‘reverse flow’ signal. An ‘active’ signal (assuming a positive logic
configuration) will automatically enable a negative flow value and an immediate switchover from normal (forward
flow) totals to a different (reverse flow) set of totals.
E The <“Flow mode”> page, within the INFORMATION (‘i’) key menu, shows if the Flow Computer considers there
to be normal flow or zero flow in the meter-run pipe.
• Flow stop (zero flow) thresholds, such as <“Meter flow stop lmt”>, are used to force live flow rates to 0 and
therefore halt flow totals even when there is negligible flow. <“Flow mode”> will show “Flow stopped”.
However, negligible flow rate values may still be displayed if enabled by the <“Rate flowstop actions”>
menu data.
• In the case of an Ultrasonic Flow Meter, the frequency value must be greater than the setting of parameter
<“Meter flow stop”> for there to be normal flow, whereby <“Flow mode”> will show the state of “Flowing”.
41 37
CORRECTED VOLUME RATE 35 QCV
Mass Rate
Qm
Calculation
PRIME DENSITY 39 ρ
42 43
40 Limits &
Method MASS
Qm Fallback Qm 46
Selection RATE
Source Checks
HART Inputs Qm
Selection
44 45
Modbus Qm
Index for use with
xx listed parameters
Menu Data List / Parameter List: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes? Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes?
- Select flow meter cÖf 43 Mass rate HI limit cÖf A
35 Corrected vol rate * cÖf B, (C) 43 Mass rate LO limit cÖf A
37 Rate flowstop action cÖf C 44 Mass rate FB type cÖf
39 Prime density value * cÖf 45 Mass rate FB value * cÖf
40 Mass rate HART chl cÖf 46 Mass rate * cÖf B,(C),(D)
41 Turb mass flow calc cÖf D
cÖf = Multi-stream/run type data (page 11.6) (X) = Indirect reference in Note X
Notes:
A Keep both ‘HI’ and ‘LO’ values programmed (SET) to 0 if this alarm limit checking is not required.
B Value will be negative when there is reversed flow. See also Flow Direction functionality on page 11.34.
C Flow stop (zero flow) thresholds, such as <“Meter flow stop lmt”>, are used to force live flow rates to 0 and
therefore halt flow totals even when there is negligible flow. However, negligible flow rate values may still be
displayed if enabled by the <“Rate flowstop actions”> parameter.
D When Density is selected, the mass rate is calculated from prime density (page 11.60) and the corrected
volume flow rate (page 11.34).
When Modbus is selected, the ‘intelligent’ transmitter monitor (ITM) feature can be set-up to supply the mass
flow rate. For all details of the ITM feature, refer to Chapter 7, Addendum E.
When HART is selected, the mass rate is supplied by a HART transmitter. For all details of HART support,
see Chapter 16.
⎛f ⎞
Using: Q IV = ⎜ ⎟ * 3600
⎝K ⎠
Where: Q IV = Indicated Volume flow rate (m3 per hour)........ {Parameter: <“Indicated vol rate”>}
f = Ultrasonic frequency (pulses per second)....... {Parameter: <“Flow meter frequency”>}
Kf = ‘K’ factor (pulses per m3)................................. {Parameter: <“Meter K factor”>}
Using: MF ( ) (
= 1 + 3 * CTVsp + 3 * CPVsp )
Where: MF = The ‘Meter Factor’........................................... {Parameter: <“Meter factor”>}
CTVsp = Thermal expansion of spool piece..........…..... {Parameter: <“Thermal expansion”>}
CPVsp = Pressure expansion of spool piece.........…..... {Parameter: <“Pressure expansion”>}
And: CTVsp = α * (t − t r )
⎡ ⎤
= (P − Pr ) * ⎢
D
And: CPVsp ⎥
⎣⎢ 2 * E * h spool ⎦⎥
Where: D = Internal diameter of spool piece (in mm)......... {Parameter: <“Internal diameter”>}
E = Elasticity coefficient......................................... {Parameter: <“Mtr spl elast coef”>}
h spool = Wall thickness of spool piece (in mm)............. {Parameter: <“Mtr spool wall thick”>}
P = Meter pressure (in Bar Absolute).................... {Parameter: <“Meter pressure”>}
Pr = Calibration pressure of spool piece (in BarA).. {Parameter: <“Meter spl cal press”>}
Using: Q CV = (QIV * MF * 24 )
Where: Q CV = Corrected Volume flow rate (in m3/day)............. {Parameter: <“Corrected vol rate”>}
Q IV = Indicated volume flow rate per hour................... {See Equation US#1}
MF = The ‘Meter Factor’.............................................. {See Equation US#2}
Q CV
Using: υ =
π * D 2 * 0.25 * 10 −6
Where: υ = Flow velocity (in m/s)............................................ {Parameter: <“Flow velocity”>}
Q CV = Corrected Volume flow rate.................................. {See Equation US#3}
D = Internal diameter of spool piece (in mm).............. {Parameter: <“Mtr spool inner dia”>}
π = 3.141592654......................................................... {Actual constant used}
19 25
CORRECTED VOLUME RATE 16 QCV
Mass Rate
Qm
Calculation
PRIME DENSITY 17 ρ
20 21
18 Limits &
Method MASS
Qm Fallback Qm 24
Selection RATE
Source Checks
HART Inputs Qm
Selection
22 23
Modbus Qm
Menu Data List / Parameter List: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes? Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes?
- Select flow meter cÖf 15 Linear % error * cÖf E
1 Linear flow i/p chl cÖf A 16 Corrected vol rate * cÖf
2 Linear flow @ 0% cÖf 17 Prime density value * cÖf P.11.60
3 Linear flow @ 100% cÖf 18 Mass rate HART chl cÖf
4 Linear flow HI limit cÖf C 19 Linr mass flow calc cÖf G
5 Linear flow LO limit cÖf C 20 Mass rate HI limit cÖf C
6 Linear flow step lmt cÖf D 21 Mass rate LO limit cÖf C
7 Linear FB type E 22 Mass rate FB type cÖf E
8 Linear FB value cÖf E 23 Mass rate FB value cÖf E
9 Linear value * cÖf B 24 Mass rate * cÖf (G)
10 Linear flow stop cÖf H 25 Rate flowstop actions cÖf F
11 Indicated vol rate * cÖf B - Flow mode cÖf F
12 Linr err CurvePoints
13 Lnr curve flowrate n cÖf n=1..10
14 Linear error dev n cÖf n=1..10
cÖf = Multi-stream/run type data (page 11.6) (X) = Indirect reference in Note X
B Scaled <“Linear value”> value is copied over to a live <“Indicated vol rate”> once every machine cycle.
C Keep both high and low limits programmed (SET) to 0 if these alarm limit checks are not required.
E This can be either be a fixed (SET) value or a ‘Live’ value that is linearised (each cycle) from a user-
configurable ‘flow versus error’ curve. Curve profile values are normally obtained from the calibration
certificate of the flowmeter.
F The <“Flow mode”> menu, within the INFORMATION (‘i’ key) menu, shows if the Flow Computer considers
there to be normal flow or zero flow in the meter-run pipe.
• Flow stop (zero flow) thresholds, such as <“Linear flow stop”>, are used to force live flow rates to 0 and
therefore halt flow totals even when there is negligible flow. <“Flow mode”> will show “Flow stopped”.
However, negligible flow rate values may still be displayed if enabled by the <“Rate flowstop actions”>
menu data.
• In the case of a Linear Flow Meter, the flow value must be greater than the setting of <“Linear flow stop”>
for there to be normal flow. <“Flow mode”> will then show “Flowing”.
G When Density is selected, the mass rate is calculated from prime density (page 11.60) and the corrected
volume flow rate (page 11.34).
When Modbus is selected, the ‘intelligent’ transmitter monitor (ITM) feature can be set-up to supply the mass
flow rate. For all details of the ITM feature, refer to Chapter 7, Addendum E.
When HART is selected, the mass rate is supplied by a HART transmitter. For all details of HART support,
see Chapter 16.
Diagram Note:
1 Q 6 7 19 Calculating the Base Volume
C V
2 t Base Volume
rate with the “Water Correction”
P Flow Rate method is not applicable to
3 Qbv
Calculation Turbine, Orifice or Linear Flow
4 Z (Conversion Factor) Metering.
5 Zb
10 19
8 Qm Base Volume
High Limit
Flow Rate
Qbv 14
Calculation 13
9 RD (Relative Density)
Calculation BASE VOLUME
16 Correction
Selection 17
19 Factor
1 QCV
Base Volume 15
8 Qm
Flow Rate Low Limit
Qbv
Calculation
11 ρB (Base Density)
19
8 Qm Base Volume
Flow Rate
11 ρB Qbv
Calculation
12 (Water Corrected)
Menu Data / Parameter List: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes? Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes?
- Select flow meter cÖf 10 Base density of Air
1 Corrected vol rate * cÖf A 11 Prime base density * cÖf
2 Meter temperature * cÖf P.11.57 12 Water content corr * cÖf D
3 Meter pressure* cÖf P.11.59 13 Base vol calc sel cÖf
4 Cf Line compress * cÖf B 14 Base vol rate HI lmt cÖf E
5 Cf base compress * cÖf B 15 Base vol rate LO lmt cÖf E
- Cf Z calc select (B) 16 Base volume rate * cÖf F
6 Base temp value 17 Correction factor * cÖf
7 Base pressure value 19 Rate flowstop actions cÖf G
8 Mass rate * cÖf A
9 Relative dens value * cÖf C
Notes: cÖf = Multi-stream/run type data (page 11.6) (X) = Indirect reference in Note X
A Refer to relevant Flow Metering reference pages for information on configuring to get Flow Rate values.
Orifice Flow (Page 11.13), Turbine Flow (Page 11.30), Ultrasonic Flow (Page 11.34), Linear Flow (Page 11.38)
B Refer to the Density reference pages (11.60 - 68) for information on configuring to get compressibility values.
(A compressibility calculation is selected ‘locally’ as the source for Z and Zb values)
C Refer to the Energy value (ISO 6976) calculation to see how Relative Density is generated.
D Refer to the Base Volume Rate Equation List (next page) for information on this.
E Optional. Keep both ‘HI’ and ‘LO’ values ‘Set’ to 0 if this (alarm) limit checking is not required.
F Value will be negative when there is reversed flow. (Ultrasonic Flow Metering only)
G By default, a 7955 in a ‘Flow Stop’ state will not show live flow rates with a forced zero value. This feature can
be changed with the <“Rate flowstop actions”> menu data.
⎛ P ⎞ ⎛ TB ⎞ ⎛ ZB ⎞
Using: Q BV = Q CV * ⎜⎜ ⎟ * ⎜⎜
⎟ ⎟⎟ * ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟
⎝ PB ⎠ ⎝ t ⎠ ⎝ Z ⎠
⎛Q ⎞
Using: VB = ⎜⎜ m ⎟ * ucf * Fw
⎟
⎝ ρB ⎠
Where: Fw = Water Content Correction Factor..................…....... {Menu Data: <“Water content corr”>} *
Xw = Mole fraction of water at base conditions.......…...... {Menu Data: <“Base mole frac water”>} *
Wc s
= Total water content at base conditions (in kg/m3).... {Menu Data: <“Base water content”>} *
Wc = Actual water content (in kg/m3)................…............ {Menu Data: <“Meter water content”>} *
B Missing (error) pulses are detectable when using a dual pulse train configuration.
C Alarm condition totalling operates independently of all other totalling. A flow total can be frozen under alarm
conditions when enabled by the corresponding ‘inhibit’ menu data.
D An increment value is calculated by integrating a parameter value, e.g. flow rate, over time. The result is added
to a corresponding total once during every machine cycle.
(a) Orifice or Linear Flow
The time element of the increment calculation is the ‘actual cycle time’. This value is the elapsed time
between a flow measurement. It is available for viewing from within the <“Time”> menu.
(b) Ultrasonic or Turbine Flow
The time element of the increment calculation is the ‘pulse sample time’. It is the period of time that pulses
were accumulated for use in calculating the present value of the Indicated Volume flow rate. This time value
is not available for viewing within the menu system.
Editing an increment value has no effect on the associated total.
E By default, rollover (to zero) limits are ‘Set’ to a large number. However, it is advisable to check that the limit is
sufficient for the metering application.
Flow Total................ 5 x Sub-station Flow Rate based totals for sub-station ‘1’ (i.e. streams/runs 1+2).
5 x Sub-station Flow Rate based totals for sub-station ‘2’ (i.e. streams/runs 3+4).
Alarm Total.……...… 1 x Total for sub-station ‘1’ (streams/runs 1+2).
1 x Total for sub-station ‘2’ (streams/runs 3+4).
This is for alarm-condition totalling of a sub-station flow rate or missing pulses from a pair of
flowmeters. It increments only when there is an ‘active’ alarm.
Error Pulse Total…... 1 x Total for sub-station ‘1’ (streams/runs 1+2).
1 x Total for sub-station ‘2’ (streams/runs 3+4).
This is for totalling of missing pulses from flowmeters of a sub-station. This feature is
permanently enabled.
Ultrasonic flow metering also features 3 complete sets of sub-station ‘1’ flow totals and sub-station ‘2’ flow totals:
5 x Forward Sub-Station Flow Totals, 5 x Reverse Sub-Station Flow Totals and 5 x Net Sub-Station Flow Totals
Forward Flow:
A ‘forward flow’ sub-station total XX Index for use with 6 7
listed parameters FORWARD FLOW
increments only when the Sub-Station Totaliser SUB-STATION
corresponding sub-station flow rate is a SUB- + 3
(Forward Flow) TOTAL
positive value. STATION
FLOW FLOW
6 9
RATES RATE NET FLOW
Reverse Flow: Meter-run Sub-Station Totaliser SUB-STATION
1 2 +/- 5
A ‘reverse flow’ sub-station total Summation (Net Flow) TOTAL
increments only when the
corresponding sub-station flow rate is a 6 8
REVERSE FLOW
negative value. Sub-Station Totaliser SUB-STATION Pulse
- 4
(Reverse Flow) TOTAL Outputs
Net Flow:
A ‘net flow’ sub-station total either ALARM
10 13 to 16
SUB-STATION
increments or decrements depending + Source Sub-Station 11
TOTALS
on whether the corresponding sub- Selection Totaliser 12
station flow rate is a positive or
20 to 23
negative value.
ERROR Sub-Station ERROR PULSE
18
(Individual stream/run flow rates may PULSE 17 Totaliser SUB-STATION TOTALS
be positive or negative depending on COUNT (Missing pulses) 19
the present direction of flow).
Sub-Station ‘1’ Parameter list: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data Menu Data Menu Data Menu Data Menu Data
Index Notes?
(as displayed) (as displayed) (as displayed) (as displayed) (as displayed)
1 Indicated vol rate * Corrected vol rate * Mass rate * Base volume rate * Energy rate * cÖd
2 SubStn1 ind vol r.. * SubStn1 cor vol rate * SubStn1 mass rate* SubStn1 BaseVol r * SubStn1 energy rate * F
3 SubStn1 ind vol tot SubStn1 cor vol tot SubStn1 mass total SubStn1 base vol t.. SubStn1 energy total D, E
4 SubStn1 RevIndTot SubStn1 RevCorVol.. SubStn1 rev mass t. Sub1 rev BaseVol t. SubStn1 RevEnergyT. D, E
5 SubStn1 NetIndVol. SubStn1 NetCorVolT. SubStn1 net mass t. Sub1 net BaseVol t. SubStn1 net engy tot D, E
6 SubStn1 ind vol roll SubStn1 cor vol roll SubStn1 mass roll SubStn1 BaseVol r.. SubStn1 energy roll C
7 Sub1 GrosVolInhib.. Sub1 CorrVolInhibit SubStn1 mass inhi... Sub1 BaseVolInhi.. Sub1 energy inhibit I
8 Sub1RevIndVolInh.. Sub1RevCorVolInhib. Sub1 RevMass inhi.. Ss1RevBaseVolinh.. Sub1RevEnergyInhib. I
9 Sub1NetIndVolInhi.. Sub1NetCorVolInhib.. Sub1 NetMass inhib. Ss1NetBaseVolInhi. Sub1NetEnergyInhib.. I
Notes are on the next page. cÖd = Separate data for stream/runs 1 and 2
Sub-Station ‘2’ Parameter list: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data Menu Data Menu Data Menu Data Menu Data
Index Notes?
(as displayed) (as displayed) (as displayed) (as displayed) (as displayed)
1 Indicated vol rate * Corrected vol rate * Mass rate * Base volume rate * Energy rate * eÖf
2 SubStn2 ind vol r.. * SubStn2 cor vol rate * SubStn2 mass rate* SubStn2 BaseVol r * SubStn2 energy rate * F
3 SubStn2 ind vol tot SubStn2 cor vol tot SubStn2 mass total SubStn2 base vol t.. SubStn2 energy total D
4 SubStn2 RevIndTot SubStn2 RevCorVolT. SubStn2 rev mass t. Sub2 rev BaseVol t. SubStn2 RevEnergyT. D
5 SubStn2 NetIndVol. SubStn2 NetCorVolT. SubStn2 net mass t. Sub2 net BaseVol t. SubStn2 net engy tot D
6 SubStn2 ind vol roll SubStn2 cor vol roll SubStn2 mass roll SubStn2 BaseVol r.. SubStn2 energy roll C
7 Sub2 GrosVolInhib.. Sub2 CorrVolInhibit SubStn2 mass inhi... Sub2 BaseVolInhi.. Sub2 energy inhibit I
8 Sub2RevIndVolInh.. Sub2RevCorVolInhib. Sub2 RevMass inhi.. Ss2RevBaseVolinh.. Sub2RevEnergyInhib. I
9 Sub2NetIndVolInhi.. Sub2NetCorVolInhib.. Sub2 NetMass inhib. Ss2NetBaseVolInhi. Sub2NetEnergyInhib.. I
Notes are listed below. eÖf = Separate data for stream/runs 3 and 4
Sub-Stations ‘1’ & ‘2’ Parameter list: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes? Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes?
10 Alarm total src ptr 17 Meter error pulses cÖf, B
11 SubStn1 alarm total A, D 18 SubStn1 MeterErr tot D
12 SubStn2 alarm total A, D 19 SubStn2 MeterErr tot D
13 SubStn1 alarm inc H 20 SubStn1 MeterErr inc H
14 SubStn2 alarm inc H 21 SubStn2 MeterErr inc H
15 SubStn1 alarm roll C 22 SubStn1 MeterErrRoll C
16 SubStn2 alarm roll C 23 SubStn2 MeterErrRoll C
Notes:
A The alarm condition-based total increments even if there is ‘reverse flow’.
B Missing (error) pulses are detectable when using a dual pulse train configuration.
C By default, rollover (to zero) limits are ‘Set’ to a large number. However, it is advisable to check that the limit is
sufficient for the metering application.
D A sub-station total is a normal-mode total. There is no equivalent maintenance-mode total. Increments for a
sub-station total only involve stream/runs that are not operating in maintenance-mode.
F * Sub-station ‘1’ flow rate = (Stream/run ‘1’ flow rate + Stream/run ‘2’ flow rate)
* Sub-station ‘2’ flow rate = (Stream/run ‘3’ flow rate + Stream/run ‘4’ flow rate)
H An increment value is calculated by integrating a parameter value, e.g. flow rate, over time. The result is added
to a corresponding total once during every machine cycle.
(a) Orifice or Linear Flow
The time element of the increment calculation is the ‘actual cycle time’. This value is the elapsed time
between a flow measurement. It is available for viewing from within the <“Time”> menu.
(b) Ultrasonic or Turbine Flow
The time element of the increment calculation is the ‘pulse sample time’. It is the period of time that pulses
were accumulated for use in calculating the present value of the Indicated Volume flow rate. This time value
is not available for viewing within the menu system.
Editing an increment value has no effect on the associated total.
I A flow total can be frozen under alarm conditions, if enabled by the corresponding ‘inhibit’ parameter.
Notes:
A By default, corresponding values from all individual streams/runs are added together to get the station value.
This summation process can be changed for all station totals, with immediate effect, by adding/removing
streams/runs from the totalising process.
Always check the stream/run ID on display line 4 before making any changes with this parameter.
C Missing (error) pulses are detectable when using a dual pulse train configuration.
D By default, rollover-to-zero limits are ‘Set’ to a large number. However, it is advisable to check that the limit is
sufficient for the metering application.
E A Station total is a normal-mode total. There is no equivalent maintenance-mode total. Increments for a
Station total will only involve streams/runs that are not operating in maintenance-mode. See also page 11.43.
F Calculated increments for station totals are not displayed within the menu system.
G An increment value is calculated by integrating a parameter value, e.g. flow rate, over time. The result is added
to a corresponding total once during every machine cycle.
H A flow total can be frozen under alarm conditions if allowed to by the corresponding ‘inhibit’ parameter.
Flow Total ................ 5 x flow rate based totals for each stream/run.
Each total is enabled by configuring the associated meter-run flow rate.
Alarm Total .............. 1 x Total for each stream/run. This is for alarm condition totalling of either a flow rate or
missing pulses from a flowmeter. It increments only when there is an ‘active’ alarm.
Error Pulse Total ...... 1 x Total for each stream/run. This is for totalling of missing pulses from a flowmeter.
This feature is permanently enabled by 7955.
B Missing (error) pulses are detectable when using a dual pulse train configuration.
C A flow total can be frozen under alarm conditions if enabled by the corresponding ‘inhibit’ parameter.
D An increment value is calculated by integrating a parameter value, e.g. flow rate, over time. The result is added
to a corresponding total once during every machine cycle.
E By default, roll-over (to zero) limits are ‘Set’ to a large number. However, it is advisable to check that the limit is
sufficient for the metering application.
Flow Total................ 5 x Sub-station Flow Rate based totals for sub-station ‘1’ (i.e. streams/runs 1+2).
5 x Sub-station Flow Rate based totals for sub-station ‘2’ (i.e. streams/runs 3+4).
Error Pulse Total…... 1 x Total for sub-station ‘1’ (i.e. streams/runs 1+2).
1 x Total for sub-station ‘2’ (i.e. streams/runs 3+4).
This is for totalling of missing pulses from flowmeters, paired by sub-stations. This feature is
permanently enabled.
SUB-STATION
FLOW FLOW
RATE 4 5 6
RATES FORWARD FLOW
Meter-run Sub-station Totaliser SUB-STATION
1 2 + 3
Summate (Forward Flow) TOTAL
ALARM
7 10 to 13
SUB-STATION
8
XX Index for use with + Source Sub-station TOTALS Pulse
listed parameters Selection Totaliser Outputs
9
17 to 20
ERROR ERROR PULSE
Sub-station Totaliser 15
PULSE 14 SUB-STATION
(Missing pulses) 16 TOTALS
COUNT
Sub-Station ‘1’ Parameter list: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data Menu Data Menu Data Menu Data Menu Data
Index Notes?
(as displayed) (as displayed) (as displayed) (as displayed) (as displayed)
1 Indicated vol rate * Corrected vol rate * Mass rate * Base volume rate * Energy rate * cÖd, G
2 SubStn1 ind vol r.. * SubStn1 cor vol rate * SubStn1 mass rate* SubStn1 BaseVol r * SubStn1 energy ra. * F
3 SubStn1 ind vol tot SubStn1 cor vol tot SubStn1 mass total SubStn1 base vol t.. SubStn1 energy total D
4 SubStn1 ind vol roll SubStn1 cor vol roll SubStn1 mass roll SubStn1 BaseVol r.. SubStn1 energy roll C
5 Sub1 GrosVolInhib.. Sub1 CorrVolInhibit SubStn1 mass inhi... Sub1 BaseVolInhi.. Sub1 energy inhibit
6 SubStn1 ind vol inc SubStn1 corr vol inc SubStn1 mass inc SubStn1 base vol i.. SubStn1 energy inc
Notes are on the next page. cÖd = Separate data for streams/runs ‘1’ and ‘2’
Sub-Station ‘2’ Parameter list: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Menu Data Menu Data Menu Data Menu Data Menu Data
Index Notes?
(as displayed) (as displayed) (as displayed) (as displayed) (as displayed)
1 Indicated vol rate * Corrected vol rate * Mass rate * Base volume rate * Energy rate * eÖf, G
2 SubStn2 ind vol r.. * SubStn2 cor vol rate * SubStn2 mass ra.. * SubStn2 BaseVol r * SubStn2 energy ra. * F
3 SubStn2 ind vol tot SubStn2 cor vol tot SubStn2 mass total SubStn2 base vol t.. SubStn2 energy total D
4 SubStn2 ind vol roll SubStn2 cor vol roll SubStn2 mass roll SubStn2 BaseVol r.. SubStn2 energy roll C
5 Sub2 GrosVolInhib.. Sub2 CorrVolInhibit SubStn2 mass inhi... Sub2 BaseVolInhi.. Sub2 energy inhibit I
6 SubStn2 ind vol inc SubStn2 corr vol inc SubStn2 mass inc SubStn2 base vol i.. SubStn2 energy inc H
Notes are on the next page. eÖf = Separate data for streams/runs ‘3’ and ‘4’
Sub-Stations ‘1’ & ‘2’ Parameter list: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes? Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes?
7 Alarm total src ptr 14 Meter error pulses cÖf B
8 SubStn1 alarm total A, D 15 SubStn1 MeterErr tot D
9 SubStn2 alarm total A, D 16 SubStn2 MeterErr tot D
10 SubStn1 alarm inc H 17 SubStn1 MeterErr inc H
11 SubStn2 alarm inc H 18 SubStn2 MeterErr inc H
12 SubStn1 alarm roll C 19 SubStn1 MeterErrRoll C
13 SubStn2 alarm roll C 20 SubStn2 MeterErrRoll C
Notes:
A The alarm based station total increments even if there is ‘reverse flow’.
B Missing (error) pulses are detectable when using a dual pulse train configuration.
C By default, rollover (to zero) limits are ‘Set’ to a large number. However, it is advisable to check that the limit is
sufficient for the metering application.
D A sub-station total is a normal-mode total. There is no equivalent maintenance-mode total. Increments for a
sub-station total only involve ‘stream/runs’ that are not operating in maintenance-mode.
F * Sub-station ‘1’ flow rate = (Stream/run ‘1’ flow rate + Stream/run ‘2’ flow rate)
* Sub-station ‘2’ flow rate = (Stream/run ‘3’ flow rate + Stream/run ‘4’ flow rate)
H An increment value is calculated by integrating a parameter value, e.g. flow rate, over time. The result is added
to a corresponding total once during every machine cycle.
(a) Orifice or Linear Flow
The time element of the increment calculation is the ‘actual cycle time’. This value is the elapsed time
between a flow measurement. It is available for viewing from within the <“Time”> menu.
(b) Ultrasonic or Turbine Flow
The time element of the increment calculation is the ‘pulse sample time’. It is the period of time that pulses
were accumulated for use in calculating the present value of the Indicated Volume flow rate. This time value
is not available for viewing within the menu system.
Editing an increment value has no effect on the associated total.
I A flow total can be frozen under alarm conditions, if enabled by the corresponding ‘inhibit’ parameter.
STATION
FLOW 15 FLOW 4 5 6
RATES RATE FORWARD FLOW
Meter-run Station Totaliser STATION TOTAL
1 2 + 3
Add/Sub (Forward Flow)
ALARM
7 9 10 STATION
XX Index for use with + Source Station
8
TOTAL Pulse
listed parameters Selection Totaliser Outputs
13 14 ERROR PULSE
ERROR STATION TOTAL
Station Totaliser
PULSE 11 12
(Missing pulses)
COUNT
cÖf = Multi-stream/run type data (page 11.6) (X) = Indirect reference in Note X
B By default, corresponding values from all individual streams/runs are added together to get the station value.
This summation process can be changed for all station totals, with immediate effect, by adding/removing
streams/runs from the totalising process.
Always check the stream/run ID on display line 4 before making any changes with this parameter.
C Missing (error) pulses are detectable when using a dual pulse train configuration.
D By default, rollover (to zero) limits are ‘Set’ to a large number. However, it is advisable to check that the limit is
sufficient for the metering application.
E A Station total is a normal-mode total. There is no equivalent maintenance-mode total. Increments for a
Station total will only involve streams/runs that are not operating in maintenance-mode. See also page 11.49.
F An increment value is calculated by integrating a parameter value, e.g. flow rate, over time. The result is added
to a corresponding total once during every machine cycle.
(a) Orifice or Linear Flow
The time element of the increment calculation is the ‘actual cycle time’. This value is the elapsed time
between a flow measurement. It is available for viewing from within the <“Time”> menu.
(b) Ultrasonic or Turbine Flow
The time element of the increment calculation is the ‘pulse sample time’. It is the period of time that pulses
were accumulated for use in calculating the present value of the Indicated Volume flow rate. This time value
is not available for viewing within the menu system.
Editing an increment value has no effect on the associated total.
G A flow total can be frozen under alarm conditions, if enabled by the corresponding ‘inhibit’ parameter.
TARIFF TOTALISING
Tariff totalisers produce separate flow totals, each associated with a different flow rate band (A, B, C and D).
The philosophy is based upon being billed at different rates for gas depending on the rate of consumption. Users are
generally charged at higher rates if the flow rate exceeds various levels or bands.
Setting up involves:
• Selecting the type of flow rate (Energy, Mass, Standard Volume, etc.)
• Programming limits for flow rate bands A, B, C and D – see “Flow rate bands”.
• Selecting a tariff mode (how tariff totaliser will operated) – see “Tariff modes”.
18 Band
Menu Data / Parameter List: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes? Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes?
1 Tariff total src cÖf 10 Tariff band A total cÖf
2 Tariff calc method cÖf A 11 Tariff band B total cÖf
3 Tariff switch AB cÖf 12 Tariff band C total cÖf
4 Tariff switch BC cÖf 13 Tariff band D total cÖf
5 Tariff switch CD cÖf 14 Tariff bandA tot inc cÖf
6 Tariff band A factor cÖf B 15 Tariff bandB tot inc cÖf
7 Tariff band B factor cÖf B 16 Tariff bandC tot inc cÖf
8 Tariff band C factor cÖf B 17 Tariff bandD tot inc cÖf
9 Tariff band D factor cÖf B 18 Tariff band cÖf
cÖf = Multi-stream/run type data (page 11.6) (X) = Indirect reference in Note X
Notes:
A Tariff mode selection: For capped mode, select “Full flow rate”. For individual mode, select “Excess flow rate”.
Also, see “Tariff modes”.
B Use this parameter to add a premium to the associated band total. The increment is multiplied by the factor
before being added to the total.
C The tariff totals can be logged in the normal way, and have the same attributes as the main fiscal totals. For
further details, see Chapter 9 (Archiving). Also, see “Analogue Output” and “Pulse Output” pages in this chapter.
TARIFF TOTALISING
In this example, Band A covers 0 to 400 SM3/Hr, B covers 400 to 600 and C covers 600 to infinity. Band D is not
used in this case, but would be used from the upper limit of Band C to infinity if Band C had an upper limit.
If any band has an upper limit of zero, as Band C in this example, it is treated as an infinite flow rate and the
associated tariff total for the next band is not used. In this case, the tariff total for Band D is not used.
Each band has its own tariff total, which is separate from the main fiscal totals. The tariff totaliser totalises in the units
as presently selected for the flow rate (Energy, Mass, etc.) In addition, each tariff total has a programmable (SET)
factor, the default of which is 1.0. This factor can be used to add a premium to each total.
Tariff modes
There are two tariff modes :-
“Capped” In Capped mode, if the flow exceeds the upper limit of a band (e.g. 400 – Band A), the total for
that band continues to count at the maximum rate (e.g. 400). The next band (e.g. B) then totalises
just the flow above the maximum rate (> 400). See “Example 1” below.
“Individual” In Individual mode, only one totaliser increments at any time. If the flow rate is above the upper
limit for Band A and below the upper limit for band B, ONLY the total Band B will increment, and
it will count all of the flow (applying the relevant tariff totaliser factor as required).
Should the rate increase further above the upper limit for Band B and into the range for Band C,
the tariff total for Band B will freeze and the tariff total for Band C will start to increment recording
all of the flow. (See “Example 2” below.)
In the following examples, changes of flow are shown every hour for simplicity. In reality, the tariff totals will be
calculated and incremented every machine cycle as normal for fiscal totals.
Hour Flow rate Tariff total band A Tariff total band B Tariff total band C Tariff total band D
Hour Flow rate Tariff total band A Tariff total band B Tariff total band C Tariff total band D
TEMPERATURE
Measurements: (Turn to page 11.58 for the Equation List)
• Meter temperature – from scaled mA Input, RTD/PT100 Input, HART transmitter or via Modbus.
• (Stream/run 1) Density Temperature ‘1’ – from scaled mA Input, RTD/PT100 Input, HART input or via Modbus.
• (Stream/run 2) Density Temperature ‘2’ – from scaled mA Input, RTD/PT100 Input, HART input or via Modbus.
• (Stream/run 3) Density Temperature ‘3’ – from scaled mA Input, RTD/PT100 Input, HART input or via Modbus.
• (Stream/run 4) Density Temperature ‘4’ – from scaled mA Input, RTD/PT100 Input, HART input or via Modbus.
2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11
1
P
Analogue Inputs Temperature Referral Limits &
Source Method Apply
mA Calculation 5 Calc. Fallback 15 TEMPERATURE
HART Inputs Selection Selection Offset
(Scaling) (Orifice) Checks
12 13 14
HART or RTD/PT100
Modbus
Menu Data / Parameter List: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Index Meter Temperature Parameters Notes? Index ‘Density Loop’ Temperature ‘n’ Notes?
1 Meter temp ain/hart cÖf A 1 Dens temp n ain/hart n=1..4 A
2 Meter temp @ 100% cÖf 2 Dens temp n @100% n=1..4
3 Meter temp @ 0% cÖf 3 Dens temp n @ 0% n=1..4
4 Meter temp source E 4 Dens temp n source n=1..4 E
5 Meter temp at sensor cÖf (E) 5 Dens temp n value n=1..4 E
6 Meter temp offset cÖf 6 Dens temp n offset n=1..4
7 Meter temp position cÖf C 7 Dens temp n position n=1..4 C
8 Temp referral KTe C 8 Temp referral KTe C
9 Pressure loss cÖf C 9 Pressure loss cÖf C
P Meter pressure * cÖf P Meter pressure * cÖf
10 Meter temp FB type 10 Dens temp n FB type n=1..4
11 Meter temp FB value cÖf 11 Dens temp n FB value n=1..4
12 Meter temp HI limit cÖf B 12 Dens temp n HI limit n=1..4 B
13 Meter temp LO limit cÖf B 13 Dens temp n LO limit n=1..4 B
14 Meter temp step lmt cÖf B 14 Dens temp n step lmt n=1..4 B
15 Meter temperature * cÖf C, (E) 15 Density n temperature * n=1..4 D
Notes: cÖf = Multi-stream/run type data (page 11.6) (X) = Indirect reference in Note X
A Ensure that the basic configuration of the analogue or HART input has been completed.
mA: Refer to the “Analogue Input” reference page (11.7) for basic configuration details.
HART: Refer to Chapter 16 for basic configuration details.
B Alarm limits are optional.
HI/LO: Keep both high and low limits ‘Set’ to 0 if this alarm limit checking is not required.
STEP: Keep the step limit ‘Set’ to 0 if this alarm limit checking is not required.
C Orifice calculations expect temperature readings from the flow point (e.g. orifice plate). Temperature transmitter
measurements have to be adjusted by a referral calculation when the flow point and the Temperature Field
Transmitter are not positioned together.
D Temperature measurements at the gas density measurement point are used by the 7955 to correct density
measurements for temperature effects. (See reference page 11.60)
E When Modbus is selected, the ‘intelligent’ transmitter monitor (ITM) feature can be set-up to supply the
temperature measurement. For all details of the ITM feature, refer to Chapter 7, Addendum E.
When Analog/HART is selected, the temperature measurement is supplied by a HART transmitter or by an
analogue transmitter. You must also select a HART Input or Analogue Input. See also Note A.
TEMPERATURE
Equation List:
(Note: Meter temperature parameters are used here but also applicable to Density Temperature.)
−Kte
⎛ P ⎞
Using: Td = Tu * ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟
⎝ P − PL ⎠
PRESSURE
Measurements:
• Stream/run pressure – from a scaled mA Input, HART Input or via Modbus.
• Atmospheric Pressure – from a scaled mA Input, HART Input or via Modbus.
7 8 9
HART
Modbus
Menu Data / Parameter List: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Index Meter Pressure Parameters Notes? Index Atmospheric Pressure Param. Notes?
1 Meter press ain/hart cÖf A 1 Atmos press ain/hart A
2 Meter pressure @ 100% cÖf 2 Atmos p 100% value
3 Meter pressure @ 0% cÖf 3 Atmos p 0% value
4 Meter press source D 4 Atmos press source D
5 Meter press FB type 5 Atmos p FB type
6 Meter press FB value cÖf 6 Atmos p FB value
7 Meter press HI limit cÖf B 7 Atmos press HI limit B
8 Meter press LO limit cÖf B 8 Atmos press LO limit B
9 Meter press step lmt cÖf B 9 Atmos p step limit B
10 Meter pressure * cÖf C, (D) 10 Atmospheric pressure * (D)
cÖf = Multi-stream/run type data (page 11.6) (X) = Indirect reference in Note X
Notes:
A Ensure that the basic configuration of the Analogue/HART Input has been completed.
mA: Refer to the “Analogue Input” reference page (11.7) for basic configuration details.
HART: Refer to Chapter 16 for basic configuration details.
D When Modbus is selected, the ‘intelligent’ transmitter monitor (ITM) feature can be set-up to supply the
pressure measurement. For all details of the ITM feature, refer to Chapter 7, Addendum E.
DENSITY
Measurements and Features: (Turn to page 11.64 for the “Equation List”)
• Gas Density A (Streams/runs 1 - 4) – from density transducers (1 - 4).
• Gas Density B (Streams/runs 1 - 4) – from mA input, HART input, PTZ1 (p.11.66) or PTZ2 (p.11.68).
• Prime Density (Streams/runs 1 - 4) – from Gas density A, Gas density B or Fallback function.
1 10 11 12
3 17
Time Period Input 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 13 14 15 16 18 19 (ρA)
Time Period Input 2 Time (μS) Apply
Density A Temperature VOS Density
Period 2
Calculation Correction Correction
Density
Referral
20 GAS DENSITY 'A'
Time Period Input 3 Selection Offset
Time Period Input 4 HI
t 'A' P
26 29
SG δP
Prime
PRIME
A#B 28 Density 33
HART DENSITY
Selection
27
22 23 30 31 32
21 24
LO F/B
mA Inputs Source
Density B (ρB)
mA Calculation
HART inputs Selection Density B
(Scaling)
Method 25 GAS DENSITY 'B'
(ρB) Selection
Modbus (ρB)
Menu Data / Parameter List (1 of 3): * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Index Menu Data Menu Data Menu Data Menu Data Notes?
1 Mtr dens A Tpin src Mtr dens B Tpin src Mtr dens C Tpin src Mtr dens D Tpin src A
2 Time period input n * Time period input n * Time period input n * Time period input n * B, (C), D
See next page for notes:
Menu Data / Parameter List (2 of 3): * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Index Transducer ‘1’ Transducer ‘2’ Transducer ‘3’ Transducer ‘4’ Notes?
3 Mtr dens1 glitch lmt Mtr dens2 glitch lmt Mtr dens3 glitch lmt Mtr dens4 glitch lmt (B), C
4 Transducer 1 K0 Transducer 2 K0 Transducer 3 K0 Transducer 4 K0
5 Transducer 1 K1 Transducer 2 K1 Transducer 3 K1 Transducer 4 K1
6 Transducer 1 K2 Transducer 2 K2 Transducer 3 K2 Transducer 4 K2
7 Density 1 correction Density 2 correction Density 3 correction Density 4 correction
8 Transducer 1 K18 Transducer 2 K18 Transducer 3 K18 Transducer 4 K18
9 Transducer 1 K19 Transducer 2 K19 Transducer 3 K19 Transducer 4 K19
10 Mtr dens 1 VOS type Mtr dens 2 VOS type Mtr dens 3 VOS type Mtr dens 4 VOS type
11 Density Transducer 1 Density Transducer 2 Density Transducer 3 Density Transducer 4
12 Transducer 1 K3 Transducer 2 K3 Transducer 3 K3 Transducer 4 K3
13 Transducer 1 K4 Transducer 2 K4 Transducer 3 K4 Transducer 4 K4
14 Transducer 1 K5 Transducer 2 K5 Transducer 3 K5 Transducer 4 K5
15 Transducer 1 K6 Transducer 2 K6 Transducer 3 K6 Transducer 4 K6
16 Transducer 1 gamma Transducer 2 gamma Transducer 3 gamma Transducer 4 gamma
17 Density 1 offset Density 2 offset Density 3 offset Density 4 offset
18 Density 1 position Density 2 position Density 3 position Density 4 position
See next page for notes:
DENSITY
Menu Data / Parameter List (3 of 3): * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Index Parameter Notes? Index Parameter Notes?
19 Density referral Kde 31 Prime dens FB type I
20 Meter dens A value * cÖf 32 Prime density FB val cÖf I
21 Mtr dens B Ain/H src cÖf H 33 Prime density value * cÖf
22 Meter density B 100% cÖf t ‘A’ (a) Density1 temperature * (c ) P. 11.57
23 Meter density B 0% cÖf (b) Density2 temperature * (d ) P. 11.57
24 Meter dens calc sel cÖf E (c) Density3 temperature * (e ) P. 11.57
25 Meter dens B value * cÖf (d) Density4 temperature * (f ) P. 11.57
26 Meter dens prime sel cÖf F P Meter pressure * cÖf P. 11.59
27 Meter dens selected SG SG prime value * cÖf P. 11.77
28 Meter dens cmp lmt cÖf A#B δP Diff pressure value * cÖf P. 11.13
29 Meter density HI lmt cÖf G
30 Meter density LO lmt cÖf G
- Meter dens step lmt cÖf
cÖf = Multi-stream/run type data (page 11.6) (X) = Indirect reference in Note X
Notes:
A Select a transducer by nominating the time period input 2 being used by that transducer. [Menu (1)]
This flexibility extends to, and directly affects, the use of time period inputs by gas specific gravity transducers.
See table below for suggested allocations of transducers and time period inputs.
Key:
N
=DT Connect density transducer ‘n’ to Time Period Input ‘n’.
n=SG Connect SG transducer ‘n’ to Time Period Input ‘n’.
TPIN Time Period Input.
9 Time period input is used.
8 Time period input is not used.
B Limit is applied to raw periodic time values from the selected transducer. [Menu (1)]
C A frequency measurement ‘glitch’ is an anomalous reading that is unusually different to previous readings.
Anomalous readings can be filtered out by the 7955 before use in calculations. A user-defined tolerance for a
frequency change is used to distinguish between good and anomalous readings. A frequency change that is
above the tolerance limit means that the frequency is anomalous. Following an anomalous reading, there must
be three consecutive “good” readings within the tolerance limit before the frequency is acceptable. An alarm is
raised whenever there are five consecutive anomalous readings; it can be cleared at any time.
2
Time Period Inputs (or Periodic Time Inputs) are referred to as “Density inputs” in rear panel pin designations. (See Chapter 2).
DENSITY
Note continued…
D Time Period Input 1 is associated with the Density Input 1 rear panel connections. Likewise, Time Period Input 2
corresponds to the Density Input 2 rear panel connection. (See Chapter 2 for Density Input connections.)
E When Modbus is selected, the ‘intelligent’ transmitter monitor (ITM) feature can be set-up to supply the density
B measurement. For all details of the ITM feature, refer to Chapter 7, Addendum E.
When PTZ 1 is selected, density B is calculated using the PTZ1 method. (See page 11.66 for details).
When PTZ 2 is selected, density B is calculated using the PTZ2 method. (See page 11.68 for details).
F Select the logic table for the prime density (channel) selection. (See also “Re-selection Procedure” below).
G High and low limits are for the selected prime density. Keep them ‘Set’ to 0 if no limit checking is required.
H Ensure that the basic configuration of the Analogue/HART Input has been completed.
mA: Refer to the “Analogue Input” reference page (11.7) for basic configuration details.
HART: Refer to Chapter 16 for basic configuration details.
I Fallback is not optional with Density measurements. By default, a ‘Set’ fallback value of 0 is copied to the prime
data in the event of a fallback situation. See “Prime re-selection procedure” for further information.
DENSITY
• The logic table below is shown in full for the “Automatic A” configuration option. (Density ‘A’ is given preference.)
Density ‘A’ Density ‘B’ A#B (Comp) Density ‘A’ Density ‘B’ Prime Density
out of limit out of limit out of limit input failed input failed Selected
YES YES YES - - FB
- YES YES - - A Key:
YES - YES - - B A = Density ‘A’,
- - YES - - B B = Density ‘B’,
YES YES - - A
- YES - - A FB = Fallback
YES - - - B
- - - - A Notes:
YES YES YES YES - FB
1. The “Automatic B”
- YES YES YES - FB
YES - YES YES - B
configuration option uses
- - YES YES - B the same logic table
YES YES - YES - B except Density ‘B’ is the
- YES - YES - FB preferred channel.
YES - - YES - B This preference
- - - YES - B reverses the A and B
YES YES YES - YES FB selection in the last
- YES YES - YES A
column of this table.
YES - YES - YES FB
- - YES - YES A
YES YES - - YES FB
2. “Out of limit” columns
- YES - - YES A 1 and 2 are concerned
YES - - - YES FB with the HI or LO alarm
- - - - YES A limits.
YES YES YES YES YES FB
- YES YES YES YES FB 3. “Input failed” columns
YES - YES YES YES FB are concerned with
- - YES YES YES FB ‘Live’ inputs.
YES YES - YES YES FB
- YES - YES YES FB
YES - - YES YES FB
- - - YES YES FB
Logic table for the “Density A” configuration option (Density ‘B’ is not involved)
Logic table for the “Density B” configuration option (Density ‘A’ is not involved)
DENSITY
Notice
As an example, parameters shown here are for calculating Metering gas density
‘A’ from a gas density transducer that is wired to Time Period Input ‘1’.
Using: D (
= K 0 + (K1 * t ) + K 2 * t 2 )
Where: D = Density (uncorrected).........………………………............... {Parameter: <“Meter dens A value”>}
K0 = Calibration factor K0 ............……………………….............. {Parameter: <“Transducer 1 K0”>}
K1 = Calibration factor K1 ......………………………..................... {Parameter: <“Transducer 1 K1”>}
K2 = Calibration factor K2.........………………………................... {Parameter: <“Transducer 1 K2”>}
t = Periodic time from transducer (μs)………………………...... {Parameter: <“Time period input 1”>}
Equation DE#2: Density from a transducer with the correction for temperature effects
Equation DE#3: Density from a transducer with the correction for the effect of V.O.S.
⎛ 2 ⎞
⎜ ⎛ K ⎞ ⎟
⎜ 1 + ⎜⎜ ⎟
⎟ ⎟
Using: ρ = ρ'*⎜⎜ ⎝ τ * Cc ⎠ ⎟
2 ⎟
⎜ ⎛ K ⎞ ⎟
⎜ ⎟
⎜⎜ 1 + ⎜ τ * C ⎟ ⎟⎟
⎝ ⎝ g⎠ ⎠
Where: ρ = Metering density..….......……………………………………... {Parameter: <“Meter dens A value”>}
ρ ' = Density (uncorrected or temperature corrected)……...…… {See Equation DE#1 or DE#2}
Cc = V.O.S. of calibration gas (m/s)..........………………...…...... {See Appendix ‘F’}
Cg = V.O.S. of measured gas (m/s)......………………….…......... {See Appendix ‘F’}
K = Density transducer VOS constant
= 2.10 * 104 for a 7812 Gas density transducer
= (1.35 * 104 for a 7810 Gas density transducer)
= (2.62 * 104 for a 7811 Gas density transducer)
τ = Periodic time of density transducer output signal (μs).…... {Parameter: <“Time period input 1”>}
DENSITY
⎛ Z0 * tb ⎞ ⎛ P * ρb ⎞
Using: ⎜ ⎟ * ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟
⎜ P ⎟
⎝ b ⎠ ⎝ Z*t ⎠
tb Pb 1 2
3 4 5 The following compressibility sources for PTZ1 are
t supported by the 7955:
P M 6
Cv/m Compressibility • S-GERG 1988
CO2 Calculation Z0 • AGA-NX19 (Standard or surface fit)
(S-GERG)
N2 • AGA-NX19Mod
Z
SG • AGA-NX19Mod3h
• AGA-8
tb Pb 1 9 • Linear Interpolation
10 11
t
'Z' Factor M 6
P
Cv/m* Calculation
(NX19, Z0
CO2 NX19mod, 1
N2 NX19mod3h*) Z Z
7 Density B
SG Source ρB Calculation 43
GAS
8 Selection Density 'B'
(PTZ1)
Z0
Gas Composition
(Normalised)
Menu Data / Parameter List 1 of 2: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes? Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes?
t Meter temperature * cÖf P.11.57 5 SGERG ref conditions
tB Base temp value M, 6 Meter mass of gas * cÖf C
P Meter pressure * cÖf P.11.59 Z0, 7 Meter density Zbase * cÖf
PB Base pressure value Z, 8 Meter density ZMeter * cÖf
SG SG prime value * cÖf P.11.77 9 Mass of air
Cv/m Energy value * cÖf P.11.80 10 Tor temp offset B
1 Meter PTZ 1 calc sel 11 AGA-NX19 method A
2 H2 cÖf D 12 AGA8 Z uncertainty cÖf
3 SGERG selector 13 AGA8 compositn range
4 SGERG report errors 14 Norm Methane E
See next page for notes. cÖf = Multi-stream/run type data (page 11.6) (X) = Indirect reference in Note X
Menu Data / Parameter List 2 of 2: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes? Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes?
15 Norm Ethane cÖf E 30 Norm Oxygen cÖf E
16 Norm Propane cÖf E 31 Norm CO cÖf E
17 Norm n-Butane cÖf E 32 Norm Hydrogen cÖf E
18 Norm i-Butane cÖf E 33 Norm Argon cÖf E
19 Norm n-Pentane cÖf E N2, 34 Norm Nitrogen cÖf E, F
20 Norm i-Pentane cÖf E CO2, 35 Norm CO2 cÖf E, F
21 Norm n-Hexane cÖf E 36 AGA8 Z base value * cÖf
22 Norm n-Heptane cÖf E 37 AGA8 Z value * cÖf
23 Norm n-Octane cÖf E 38 AGA8 M value * cÖf
24 Norm n-Nonane cÖf E 39 Linear Z K10 cÖf
25 Norm n-Decane cÖf E 40 Linear Z K11 cÖf
26 Norm C6+ cÖf E 41 Linear Z K12 cÖf
27 Norm H2S cÖf E 42 Linear Z K13 cÖf
28 Norm Water cÖf E 43 Meter dens B value * cÖf
29 Norm Helium cÖf E ρB Prime base density * cÖf
cÖf = Multi-stream/run type data (page 11.6) (X) = Indirect reference in Note X
Notes:
A This parameter (menu data) is not applicable to AGA-NX19mod and AGA-NX19mod3h calculations.
C Molecular weight of measured gas. This is used when deriving Gas density B from PTZ2.
E Raw gas constituent that has been normalised on-demand (by manipulating menu data) or normalised
automatically if received from a Chromatograph. Refer to Chapter 7 for information on Chromatograph support.
(MENU: <”Health Check”>/<”Normalise gas data”>)
F Raw N2 and CO2 values can be obtained from mA-type field transmitters instead of a Chromatograph.
Associated parameters (Menu Data) are located under <”Configure”>/<”Transmitter detail”>.
Gas Composition
(Normalised) Gas Composition (Normalised)
14 to 35
% Methane % Neo-Octane
% Nitrogen % Neo-nonane
M 38
'Z' Factor % Carbon Dioxide % Neo-Decane
t
Calculation Z0 36 7 % Ethane % Hydrogen Sulphide
P (AGA8)
Z 37 % Propane % Water
12 13 % Neo-Butane % Helium
tb Pb 1 % Iso-Butane % Oxygen
% Neo-Pentane % Carbon Monoxide
% Iso-Pentane % Hydrogen
% Neo-Hexane % C6+
% Neo-Heptane % Argon
A This parameter (menu data) is not applicable to AGA-NX19mod and AGA-NX19mod3h calculations.
C Molecular weight of measured gas. This is used when deriving Gas density B from PTZ2.
E Raw gas constituent that has been normalised on-demand (by manipulating menu data) or normalised
automatically if received from a Chromatograph. Refer to Chapter 7 for information on Chromatograph support.
(MENU: <”Health Check”>/<”Normalise gas data”>)
F Raw N2 and CO2 values can be obtained from mA-type field transmitters instead of a Chromatograph.
Associated parameters (Menu Data) are located under <”Configure”>/<”Transmitter detail”>.
BASE DENSITY
Measurements and Features:
• Base density A (streams/runs 1 - 4) – from calculation using Prime Specific Gravity.
• Base density B (streams/runs 1 - 4) – from mA Input, HART Input, PTZ1 (p.11.73), PTZ2 (p.11.75) or via Modbus.
• Prime Base density (streams/runs 1 - 4) – from Base density A, Base density B or Fallback function.
Menu Data / Parameter List: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes? Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes?
1 SG prime value * cÖf P.11.77 10 Base dens prime sel cÖf C
2 Base density of Air 11 Base den selected cÖf
3 Base density A value * cÖf 12 Base density HI lmt cÖf A
4 Base dens B input chl cÖf (D), E 13 Base density LO lmt cÖf A
5 Base density B 100% cÖf 14 Base density stp lmt cÖf A
6 Base density B 0% cÖf 15 Base density FB type B
7 Base dens calc sel cÖf D 16 Base density FB val cÖd B
8 Base density B value * cÖf (D) 17 Prime base density * cÖf
9 Base density cmp lmt cÖf A
Notes: cÖf = Multi-stream/run type data (page 11.6) (X) = Indirect reference in Note X
A Optional feature. By default, alarm limit checking is not enabled. ‘Set’ values to enable checking.
HI/LO LIMIT: Keep both limits ‘Set’ to 0 if this alarm limit checking is not required.
STEP LIMIT: Keep limit ‘Set’ to 0 if this alarm limit checking is not required.
COMPARISION LIMIT: Keep limit ‘Set’ to 0 if this alarm limit checking is not required.
High and low limits are for the selected prime base density. Step limit is for both Base density A and B values.
B Fallback feature is not optional with Base Density measurements. By default, a ‘Set’ fallback value of 0 is
copied to the prime data in the event of a fallback situation. See also “Prime re-selection procedure”.
C Selects the logic table for the prime base density (channel) selection. (See “Re-selection Procedure” below)
D When Modbus is selected, the ‘intelligent’ transmitter monitor (ITM) feature can be set-up to supply the Base
density B measurement. For all details of the ITM feature, refer to Chapter 7, Addendum E.
When PTZ 1 is selected, Base density B is calculated using the PTZ1 method. (See page 11.73 for details).
When PTZ 2 is selected, Base density B is calculated using the PTZ2 method. (See page 11.75 for details).
When Analog Input is selected, Base density B is supplied by a HART transmitter or by an analogue
transmitter. You must also select a HART Input or Analogue Input, whichever is appropriate. See also Note E.
E Ensure that the basic configuration of the Analogue/HART Input has been completed.
mA: Refer to the “Analogue Input” reference page (11.7) for basic configuration details.
HART: Refer to Chapter 16 for basic configuration details.
BASE DENSITY
Prime Base Density Re-Selection Procedure
In the event of a base density input channel (e.g. Base Density ‘A’) failing or returning to a live state, the 7955 will
perform a re-selection procedure for obtaining a live Prime Base Density value. This procedure involves evaluating a
user-selected logic decision table to determine where to get the prime value.
• The logic table below is shown in full for the “Automatic A” configuration option, where Base Density ‘A’ is preferred)
• The logic table below is shown in full for the “Base Density A” option, where Base Density ‘B’ is not involved.
• The logic table below is shown in full for the “Base Density B” option, where Base Density ‘A’ is not involved.
BASE DENSITY
⎛ Pb ⎞ ⎛ ρ * Z * t ⎞
Using: ρb = ⎜⎜ ⎟*⎜
⎟ ⎟
⎝ Z0 * t b ⎠ ⎝ P ⎠
Mb * Pb
Using: ρb =
R
Z0 * tb *
100
1 9 What to do
t b Pb
10 11 1. Configure a compressibility source. (Configuration may
t have already been done for Line Density)
'Z' Factor M 6
P 2. Configure Base Density ‘B’ to use PTZ2 method.
Cv/m* Calculation
(NX19, Z0
CO2 tb Pb
NX19mod, 1
N2 NX19mod3h*) Z Z
SG OR 7 ρ Base Density B
Source Gas Base
t Calculation 43 Density 'B'
Selection
OR 8 P (PTZ1)
Gas Composition Z0
(Normalised)
14 to 35
M 38 6 Gas Composition (Normalised)
'Z' Factor
t
Calculation Z0 36 % Methane % Neo-Octane
P (AGA8)
Z 37 % Nitrogen % Neo-nonane
12 13 % Carbon Dioxide % Neo-Decane
tb Pb 1 % Ethane % Hydrogen Sulphide
% Propane % Water
t b Pb % Neo-Butane % Helium
1
% Iso-Butane % Oxygen
t
'Z' Factor Z0 % Neo-Pentane % Carbon Monoxide
P Calculation
Z % Iso-Pentane % Hydrogen
ρB (Linear)
% Neo-Hexane % C6+
39 40 41 42
% Neo-Heptane % Argon
A This parameter (menu data) is not applicable to AGA-NX19mod and AGA-NX19mod3h calculations.
C Molecular weight of measured gas. This is used when deriving Gas density B from PTZ2.
E Raw gas constituent that has been normalised on-demand (by manipulating menu data) or normalised
automatically if received from a Chromatograph. Refer to Chapter 7 for information on Chromatograph support.
(MENU: <”Health Check”>/<”Normalise gas data”>)
F Raw N2 and CO2 values can be obtained from mA-type field transmitters instead of a Chromatograph.
Associated parameters (Menu Data) are located under <”Configure”>/<”Transmitter detail”>.
Gas Composition
(Normalised) Gas Composition (Normalised)
14 to 35 % Methane % Neo-Octane
Mb 38
% Nitrogen % Neo-nonane
'Z' Factor % Carbon Dioxide % Neo-Decane
t
Calculation Z 37 8
P (AGA8) % Ethane % Hydrogen Sulphide
Z0 36 % Propane % Water
12 13 % Neo-Butane % Helium
tb Pb 1 % Iso-Butane % Oxygen
% Neo-Pentane % Carbon Monoxide
% Iso-Pentane % Hydrogen
% Neo-Hexane % C6+
% Neo-Heptane % Argon
A This parameter (menu data) is not applicable to AGA-NX19mod and AGA-NX19mod3h calculations.
C Molecular weight of measured gas. This is used when deriving Gas density B from PTZ2.
E Raw gas constituent that has been normalised on-demand (by manipulating menu data) or normalised
automatically if received from a Chromatograph. Refer to Chapter 7 for information on Chromatograph support.
(MENU: <”Health Check”>/<”Normalise gas data”>)
F Raw N2 and CO2 values can be obtained from mA-type field transmitters instead of a Chromatograph.
Associated parameters (Menu Data) are located under <”Configure”>/<”Transmitter detail”>.
SPECIFIC GRAVITY
Measurements and Features:
• Specific Gravity A (Streams/runs 1 - 4) – from Specific gravity transducers (1 - 4).
• Specific Gravity B (Streams/runs 1 - 4) – from Prime base density, scaled mA Input or Chromatograph (Modbus).
• Prime Specific Gravity (Streams/runs 1 - 4) – from Specific gravity A, Specific gravity B or Fallback facility.
K0 K2
1
3 4 5
Time Period Input 1
Time (μS) S.G. A
SGA
Time Period Input 2
Period 2 Calculation 6
Time Period Input 3 Selection (Transducer)
Time Period Input 4
8 12 15 16 17 18
A#B 14
S.G. B Prime Limits & PRIME
ρB 7 Calculation S.G. Fallback 22 SPECIFIC
(Base Density) Selection Check GRAVITY
21
19 20
10 11
9 S.G. B
mA Inputs S.G. B Method
Source Selection
Calculation 13
HART Inputs Selection
(mA Scaling)
SGB
Menu Data / Parameter List (1 of 2): * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Index Menu Data Menu Data Menu Data Menu Data Notes?
1 SG A Timeperiod Src SG B Timeperiod Src SG C Timeperiod Src SG D Timeperiod Src A
2 Time Period Input 1 Time Period Input 2 Time Period Input 3 Time Period Input 4 B, C, D
3 SG 1 glitch limit SG 2 glitch limit SG 3 glitch limit SG 4 glitch limit B, C
4 SG 1 K0 SG 2 K0 SG 3 K0 SG 4 K0
5 SG 1 K2 SG 2 K2 SG 3 K2 SG 4 K2
Menu Data / Parameter List (2 of 2): * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Index Menu Data Notes? Index Menu Data Notes?
6 SG 1 value * cÖf SG A 15 Prime SG sel cÖf G
7 Prime base density * cÖf P.11.70 16 SG HI limit cÖf H
8 Base density of air 17 SG LO limit cÖf H
9 SG 2 analog source cÖf F 18 SG step limit cÖf H
10 SG 100% cÖf 19 Prime SG FB type
11 SG 0% cÖf 20 Prime SG FB value cÖf
12 SG B calc select cÖf E 21 SG selected cÖf
13 SG 2 value * cÖf SG B 22 SG prime value * cÖf
14 SG comparison limit cÖf A#B
See next page for notes. cÖf = Multi-stream/run type data (page 11.6) (X) = Indirect reference in Note X
SPECIFIC GRAVITY
Notes:
A Select a transducer by nominating the time period input 3 being used by that transducer. [Menu (1)]
This flexibility extends to, and directly affects, the use of time period inputs by gas density transducers. See
table below for suggested allocations of transducers and time period inputs.
B Limit is applied to raw periodic time values from the selected transducer. [Menu (1)]
C A frequency measurement ‘glitch’ is an anomalous reading that is unusually different to previous readings.
Anomalous readings can be filtered out by the 7955 before use in calculations. A user-defined tolerance for a
frequency change is used to distinguish between good and anomalous readings. A frequency change that is
above the tolerance limit means that the frequency is anomalous. Following an anomalous reading, there must
be three consecutive “good” readings within the tolerance limit before the frequency is acceptable. An alarm is
raised whenever there are five consecutive anomalous readings; it can be cleared at any time.
D Time Period Input 3 is associated with the Density Input 3 rear panel connections. Likewise, Time Period Input 4
corresponds to the Density Input 4 rear panel connection. (See Chapter 2 for Density Input connections.)
E When Base Density is selected, Specific gravity B is calculated from Prime base density.
When Analogue Input is selected, Specific gravity B is supplied by a HART transmitter or by an analogue
transmitter. You must also select a HART Input or Analogue Input, whichever is appropriate. See also Note F.
When Chormat is selected, Specific gravity B is supplied by a Chromatograph. Refer to Chapter 7 for
information on the 7955 support for Chromatographs.
F Ensure that the basic configuration of the Analogue/HART Input has been completed.
mA: Refer to the “Analogue Input” reference page (11.7) for basic configuration details.
HART: Refer to Chapter 16 for basic configuration details.
H Use this to select a logic table for the Prime specific gravity selection. (See “Re-selection Procedure” below).
3
Time Period Inputs (or Periodic Time Inputs) are referred to as “Density inputs” in rear panel pin designations.
SPECIFIC GRAVITY
Prime SG Re-Selection Procedure
In the event of a SG input channel (e.g. SG ‘A’) failing or returning to a live state, the 7955 will perform a re-selection
procedure for obtaining a live Prime SG value. This procedure involves evaluating a user-selected logic decision
table to determine where now to get the prime value.
• The logic table below is shown in full for the “Automatic A” configuration option, where SG ‘A’ is preferred.
SG ‘A’ SG ‘B’ A#B (Comp) SG ‘A’ input SG ‘B’ input Prime SG
out of limit out of limit out of limit failed failed Selected
YES YES YES - - FB Key:
- YES YES - - A
A = SG ‘A’,
YES - YES - - B
- - YES - - B B = SG ‘B’,
YES YES - - A FB = Fallback
- YES - - A
YES - - - B Notes:
- - - - A
YES YES YES YES - FB 1. The “Automatic B”
- YES YES YES - FB configuration option
YES - YES YES - B uses the same logic
- - YES YES - B
table except SG ‘B’ is
YES YES - YES - B
the preferred stream.
- YES - YES - FB This preference
YES - - YES - B reverses the A and B
- - - YES - B selection in the last
YES YES YES - YES FB column of this table.
- YES YES - YES A
YES - YES - YES FB
2. “Out of limit”
- - YES - YES A
columns 1 and 2 are
YES YES - - YES FB concerned with the HI
- YES - - YES A or LO alarm limits.
YES - - - YES FB
- - - - YES A
YES YES YES YES YES FB 3. “Input failed”
- YES YES YES YES FB columns are
YES - YES YES YES FB concerned with ‘Live’
- - YES YES YES FB
inputs.
YES YES - YES YES FB
- YES - YES YES FB
YES - - YES YES FB
- - - YES YES FB
• The logic table below is shown in full for the “SG A” configuration option, where SG ‘B’ is not involved
SG ‘A’ SG ‘A’ input Prime SG
Out of limit failed Selected
- - A
- YES FB
YES - A
YES YES FB
Key: A = SG ‘A’, FB = Fallback
• The logic table below is shown in full for the “SG B” configuration option, where SG ‘A’ is not involved
SG ‘B’ SG ‘B’ input Prime SG
Out of limit failed Selected
- - B
- YES FB
YES - B
YES YES FB
Key: B = SG ‘B’, FB = Fallback
ENERGY
Measurements: (Note: Turn to page 11.82 for the Equation List)
• Energy Value (Streams/runs 1 - 4) – from ISO 6976 (1995), AGA5 (1981), scaled mA Input or a Chromatograph.
• Energy flow rate (Streams/runs 1 - 4)
Gas Composition
Index for use with (Normalised)
XX list of associated data
1 To 24
30 Relative Density
Energy Value
35 36 37 38
34 Calculation 31 Wobbe
CO2 Value Fallback (ISO 6976)
mA
mA Inputs Calculation & Limits
Selection 33 25 26 27
(Scaling) Check Key:
28 29 66 Cv = Calorific value in Volume units
39 40 OR 41
Cv/m = Calorific value either in Volume or Mass units
CO2
CO2 direct from
Chromatograph
Energy Value
44 45 46 47 SG 32 Calculation
43 61
N2 Value Fallback (AGA 5) Cv/m QBV 56
mA Energy
mA Inputs Calculation & Limits Value 63
Selection Cv Energy
(Scaling) Check Method Energy
N2 62 Flow Rate 65
Direct from 51 Cv
Selection Rate
48 49 OR 50 64 Calculation
Chromatograph
Qm
N2 direct from 42
Chromatograph 53 54 55 56 57 Cv/m
52
Energy Value Fallback
Source
mA Inputs Calculation & Limits 60
Selection
(Scaling) Check
58 59
Menu Data / Parameter List 1 of 2: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes? Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes?
1 Norm Methane E 23 Norm n-Undecane E
2 Norm Ethane E 24 Norm n-Dodecane E
3 Norm Propane E 25 Absolute zero Menu(4)
4 Norm n-Butane E 26 Combustion temp G
5 Norm I-Butane E 27 Base temp value H
6 Norm n-Pentane E 28 Gas const R J/mol.K Menu(5)
7 Norm I-Pentane E 29 Mass of air D
8 Norm n-Hexane E 30 Relative Dens value * cÖf
9 Norm n-Heptane E 31 Wobbe index cÖf
10 Norm n-Octane E 32 SG prime value * cÖf P.11.77
11 Norm n-Nonane E 33 CO2 live input src A
12 Norm n-Decane E 34 Live CO2 input chl
13 Norm C6+ E 35 Live CO2 @ 100%
14 Norm H2S E 36 Live CO2 @ 0%
15 Norm water E 37 Live CO2 HI limit B
16 Norm Helium E 38 Live CO2 LO limit B
17 Norm Oxygen E 39 Live CO2 FB type
18 Norm CO E 40 Live CO2 FB value
19 Norm Hydrogen E 41 Live CO2 value * Menu(2)
20 Norm Argon E 42 N2 live input source A
21 Norm Nitrogen E 43 Live N2 input chl
22 Norm CO2 E 44 Live N2 @ 100%
Abbreviations: “norm” = normalised. “HI” = High, “LO” = Low, “temp” = temperature, “Dens” = Density, “src” = source
See next page for notes. cÖf = Multi-stream/run type data (page 11.6) (X) = Indirect reference in Note X
ENERGY
Menu Data / Parameter List 2 of 2: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes? Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes?
45 Live N2 @ 0% 56 Live energy HI limit B
46 Live N2 HI limit B 57 Live energy LO limit B
47 Live N2 LO limit B 58 Live energy FB type
48 Live N2 FB type 59 Live energy FB value
49 Live N2 FB value 60 Live energy value * Menu(2)
50 Live N2 value * Menu(2) 61 Energy calc selector cÖf I
51 Chromat energy * C 62 Energy value * cÖf
52 Live energy input A 63 Base volume rate * cÖf F
53 Live energy 100% 64 Mass rate * cÖf F
54 Live energy 0% 65 Energy rate * cÖf
55 Energy type selector 66 ISO6976 CV type J
Abbreviations used: “chl” = channel, “calc” = calculation, “SG” = Specific Gravity, “Dens” = Density, “src” = source
“const” = constant, “FB” = Fallback, “HI” = High, “LO” = Low
Notes: cÖf = Multi-stream/run type data (page 11.6) (X) = Indirect reference in Note X
A Ensure that the basic configuration of the Analogue/HART Input has been completed.
mA: Refer to the “Analogue Input” reference page (11.7) for basic configuration details.
B Optional feature. Keep both high and low limits ‘Set’ to 0 if this alarm limit checking is not required.
C Ensure that the menu data is ‘Live’ and a value is being received from a Chromatograph.
Refer to Chromatograph support reference pages in Chapter 7 for further configuration information.
(MENU: <”Health Check”>/<”Normalise gas data”>/<”Live inputs”>)
D This parameter is applicable to the “ISO 6967 MJ/m3” and the “ISO 6967 MJ/kg” calculation methods.
E Raw gas constituent that has been normalised on-demand (by manipulating menu data) or normalised
automatically if received from a Chromatograph. Refer to Chapter 7 for information on Chromatograph support.
(MENU: <”Health Check”>/<”Normalise gas data”>)
F Refer to the “Flow Metering” reference pages for information on this flow rate.
Orifice Flow (Page 11.13), Turbine Flow (Page 11.30), Ultrasonic Flow (Page 11.34), Linear Flow (Page 11.38)
G The combustion reference condition for Table 3 of ISO 6976:1995:E. It can be ‘Set’ to 0°C, 15°C, 20°C or 25°C.
When ‘Set’ to other temperatures, an alarm is raised and the ISO 5967 (MJ/m ) calculation uses 15°C
3
H The base temperature reference condition for Table 2 of ISO 6976:1995:E. It can be ‘Set’ to 0°C, 15°C or 20°C.
When ‘Set’ to other temperatures, an alarm is raised and the ISO 5967 (MJ/m ) calculation uses 15°C
3
J Choose if the Superior or Inferior calorific value is output by the ISO 6976 calculation.
ENERGY
Using: Cm = 0.02035 +
(0.001970 − MX )
SG
Where: MC = Percentage of CO2 in measured gas composition……… {Parameter: <”Live CO2 value”>}
MN = Percentage of Nitrogen in measured gas composition…. {Parameter: <”Live N2 value”>}
j =n
Where: HV(Ideal ) = ∑X
j=0
j * H j = Ideal volumetric calorific value (Cv)
Using: RDreal =
(RDIdeal * Z Air )
Z mix
Where: RDreal = Relative density of gas composition……………….…. {Parameter: <“Relative Dens value”>}
ZAir = Compression factor of air
ZMix = See Equation EN#2
j =n
∑X *M
j=0
j j
And: RDreal =
M Air
ENERGY
Equation EN#4a: Energy Flow Rate from Calorific value (mass units)
Using: QE = QE * Cm
Equation EN#4b: Energy Flow Rate from Calorific value (volume units)
Using: QE = QBV * Cm
ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
Feature:
• Live analogue outputs supported by 7955:
mA output channels (Analogue inputs 1 to 8)
What to do:
Use this reference page to find out how to configure each analogue output channel that is to transmit values to
external devices once every machine cycle.
After configuring the necessary parameter for a channel and for the parameter, check that a satisfactory live reading
is displayed by the corresponding “Analog out value” parameter.
Menu Data / Parameter List: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Analogue Channel Analogue Channel
(and signal types) Menu Data (as displayed) (and signal types) Menu Data (as displayed)
Note:
A The <“mA out user source”> parameter is for selecting a parameter that is not readily available with the normal
‘source’ parameter. It is necessary to select the “USER” option for <”mA output source”> and then program
“mA out user source” with the unique identification number of the parameter.
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
Feature:
• Digital outputs supported by the 7955:
Status output channels 1 to 25
What To Do:
This reference page will assist when configuring basic data (see list below) for all the Status Output channels that are
being used. Later tasks will expect this data to be already configured.
By default, the first 3 Status Outputs are reserved for the ALO - Alarm Logger Output - feature, as described in
Chapter 8. The rest of the status outputs are available for use as listed in Chapter 3.
Menu Data / Parameter List: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Status O/P Menu Data Status O/P Menu Data Status O/P Menu Data
Channel (as displayed) Channel (as displayed) Channel (as displayed)
1 Status out 1 logic 11 Status out 11 logic 21 Status out 21 logic
2 Status out 2 logic 12 Status out 12 logic 22 Status out 22 logic
3 Status out 3 logic 13 Status out 13 logic 23 Status out 23 logic
4 Status out 4 logic 14 Status out 14 logic 24 Status out 24 logic
5 Status out 5 logic 15 Status out 15 logic 25 Status out 25 logic
6 Status out 6 logic 16 Status out 16 logic
7 Status out 7 logic 17 Status out 17 logic
8 Status out 8 logic 18 Status out 18 logic
9 Status out 9 logic 19 Status out 19 logic
10 Status out 10 logic 20 Status out 20 logic
Note:
A Status Outputs 1 to 3 are reserved for use by the Alarm Logger Output feature. This is the reason why there is
a permanent “XXX” seen in the first three digits of the parameter <“Status out 1-16”>.
PULSE OUTPUTS
Features:
• Live pulse outputs supported by 7955:
Pulse output channels 1 to 5
What To Do:
Use this page to configure basic information for the pulse output channels. A channel can be set-up to transmit each
increment to a normal mode total as a pulse train, suitable for an external counter.
Each output pulse has a significance that equates to a certain mass or volume in the units of measurement already
selected for the associated flow rate. As an example, consider a flow total increasing at a steady rate of one gallon
every second and significance that is programmed with a value of six, representing six gallons. This would typically
result in a single pulse being transmitted every 6 seconds, depending on the actual machine cycle time (see note B).
Pulse duration (on-time) can be programmed to be any value from 50milliseconds. There is no upper limit. Each
pulse output has a parameter <Pulse output n duration> to edit the pulse duration.
By default, totals are not pre-allocated to pulse outputs. Pulse outputs are also not pre-allocated to a stream/run.
Notes:
A If the pulse frequency exceeds 10Hz (10 complete pulses per second), a ‘reservoir’ is used to keep a count of
the excess. Always SET a large enough pulse significance to avoid this occurring; if there is an excess,
increase the significance value and wait for things to calm down again. Alternatively, all reservoirs can be
cleared immediately by selecting the “Clear” command through the <“Clear pulse outputs”> parameter.
B Pulses are transmitted at evenly calculated intervals within the ‘window’ of a machine cycle. As the actual
machine cycle time always varies, the calculated interval between pulses will vary even when the value from
the Pulse Output Source (e.g. a flow rate) has not changed.
0.525s 0.6s
C The ‘Pulse Output Stream’ parameter is for further identifying a total after making a selection for the source.
* “Station” option: Station total
* “Stream 1” option: Stream/run 1 total
* “Stream 2” option: Stream/run 2 total
* “Stream 3” option: Stream/run 3 total
* “Stream 4” option: Stream/run 4 total
SPECIAL EQUATIONS
Feature:
• Special Equation Type One
⎛ a * (b + X * c )) ⎞
R = A + B⎜⎜ ⎟
(
⎝d* e+ Y * f ⎠
⎟)
Where: A, B = Constants
a-f = Pointers
X, Y = Constants
R = Result
A A facility is provided whereby a text title can be edited to identify the calculation. Changing the default text will
alter the on-screen description of the result menu data.
B Edit the value with the identification number of the menu data (parameter) to be used for this term. Identification
numbers can be seen on-screen by locating the data in the menu system and then pressing the ‘a’-key. Re-
press the ‘a’-key to remove the number from the display. With this type of menu data, the word “off” is seen
when not in use.
C There is a collection of unused data locations within the custom equation menu. These are provided for defining
constants that could be identified as equation terms ‘a’, ‘b’, etc.
SPECIAL EQUATIONS
Feature:
• Special Equation Type Two
R = e(A + (B * t )+ (C * t ))
2
Where: R = Result
A, B, C = Constants
t = Pointer
A A facility is provided whereby a text title can be edited to identify the calculation. Changing the default text will
alter the on-screen description of the ‘result’ menu data.
B Edit the value with the identification number of the menu data (parameter) to be used for this term. Identification
numbers can be seen on-screen by locating the data in the menu system and then pressing the ‘a’-key. Re-
press the ‘a’-key to remove the number from the display. With this type of menu data, the word “off” is seen
when not in use.
C There is a collection of un-used data locations within the custom equation menu. These are provided for
defining constants that could be identified as equation terms ‘a’, ‘b’, etc.
The following pages explain how the 7955 can set-up to restrict access to facilities.
The table below lists what facilities each of these groups can access.
You can, if you wish, have the same password for more than one level. This gives you access to the facilities
of all the levels covered by that password.
• Use the <“Enter Password”> parameter screen for entering a password to change security level.
By default, this security feature is not active. To activate, the length of time for the period must be ‘set’ to a value
more than zero. Passwords to change security level are as already defined.
By default, this feature is not active. To activate it, the length of time must be set to a value more than zero.
To re-enable information access through the communication ports after a time-out, the “Communications”
password needs to be entered in (or written to) the “Enter comms password” parameter.
MULTI-PAGE MULTI-VIEW
What is Multi-View?
Multi-View (often referred to as the “User Display”) is a single-key activated display that you can define to
show whatever information you want. It consists of one or more pages with the four lines on each page
comprising of either or both of:
You can change the configuration of a Multi-View display whenever you wish. An example of a typical multi-view
display is shown below.
Use the DOWN-ARROW key to page down through other multi-view displays. The message “Invalid MultiView Page”
appears to indicate that no further pages are defined. Use the UP-ARROW to reverse through the display pages.
Configuring Multi-view
Follow this procedure for configuring Multi-view:
MULTI-PAGE MULTI-VIEW
If the data is live but the value appears to be unusually high or low, this may be because the external
connection is not working properly.
Reports can be enhanced to include more information. Refer to Chapter 9 for a guide on available
enhancements.
The “World” security level prevents everyone from requesting a report to be printed. All other levels can be
used to request any of the reports that are listed above. To find out about how to change security level,
refer to the “Security” section in Chapter 11.
4. Change the option (value) to one of the report descriptions in the fixed list.
It will be necessary to know the location number of “Print Report” for part of the
command sequence. This can be done by pressing the PRINT MENU key, searching
the menu structure and then, once found, pressing the ‘a’-key.
2. Ensure that the Status Input is suitably wired to the system that will activate it.
It is possible to allocate this remote print function to another Status Input but care is needed to avoid
clashes with Prover Inputs (Chapter 16) and the input allocated to “Maintenance mode”.
Either way, the same instructions will still apply. See menu: <“Configure”>/<IO physical alloc”>
To allocate an identifier:
1. Select the Tag number option on the Main Menu.
2. Press the b-key. The cursor shifts to the left of the screen.
3. Key in the identifier you want. This over-types any existing identifier.
4. Press the b-key again. The new details shift back to the right of the display.
To allocate an identifier:
1. Select the Stream tag number option on the Main Menu.
3. Press the b-key. The cursor shifts to the left of the screen.
4. Key in the identifier you want. This over-types any existing identifier.
5. Press the b-key again. The new details shift back to the right of the display.
Note:
• Use the “Health Check” facility on the 7955 to monitor a variety of measurement parameters,
including time period inputs, analogue inputs and status inputs and outputs. This can be
used as a diagnostic aid if the system seems to be faulty.
PROBLEM:
A reading from
a transmitter is
not displayed
Has it Is the
NO Check the field wiring transmitter's NO Wire the transmitter
ever been
against the wiring field wiring up according to the
displayed
schedule correct wiring schedule
?
?
YES YES
Is the
transmitter NO 7955's Connector/
receiving power Power Supply Board Change the
from the is probably faulty Connector Board
7955
?
YES
Is the
transmitter NO The transmitter or Refer to the
sending current its configuration transmitter's manual
to the 7955 is probably faulty for more information.
?
YES
Is
the 7955 NO Correct the
configured configuration
correctly
?
YES
The 7955's input Replace the 7955's
circuit is probably Connector/Power
faulty Supply Board
PROBLEM:
The display is blank
Is the
power to NO
the 7955 Turn the power ON
ON
?
YES
Has
Is the
the fuse YES NO
7955's supply Adjust the voltage so
in the 7955
voltage within that it is within spec
blown
spec
?
?
YES
The 7955's Display
Replace the 7955's
Module is probably
Display Module
faulty
Front Panel
Assembly
PL1 PL2
1. Undo and remove the four screws which secure the Bezel to the case. Withdraw the Front Panel
Assembly to the limits of the connecting wiring then lay it on top of the case.
2. Partially withdraw the Processor Board then disconnect the two connectors from the Processor Board.
The Front Panel Assembly is now free.
3. Replace all items by reversing this procedure. Take great care to ensure that the cables are not pinched
on re-assembly.
14.2 Display
1. Remove the Front Panel Assembly as explained in Section 14.1.
2. Undo and remove the four screws and washers which attach the display to the Front Panel Assembly.
2. Undo the four screws and washers which attach the display to the bezel. Remove the display.
3. Un-solder the flexi-cable from the key switch. Remove the spring clip from the switch then withdraw the
switch from the case.
4. Undo and remove the four nuts and washers which attach the Switch Panel to the bezel. Lift the Switch
Panel away.
5. Replace all items by reversing this procedure.
PL1 PL2
Figure 14.3: Removing the Processor Board and Power Supply Board
3. Unscrew the threaded hexagonal spacers on top of the Connector Board, then lift the Connector Board
off the studs.
4. Replace all items by reversing this procedure. Take great care to ensure that the cables are not pinched
on re-assembly.
14.7 Fuse
1. Undo and remove the four screws which secure the Bezel to the case. Withdraw the Front Panel
Assembly to the limits of the connecting wiring then lay it on top of the case.
3. Referring to the diagram, find the fuse and gently prise it out of the fuse holder.
4. Press the replacement fuse into the fuse holder. Make sure that the fuse is of the correct type and rating
as specified in Chapter 14.
5. Replace all items in the reverse order of removal. Take great care to ensure that the cables are not
pinched on re-assembly.
Top of
instrument
case
Power
Socket Rear Supply Mother
Fuse SK1 Panel Board Board
Figure 14.4: Where to find the fuse on the Power Supply Board
2. Ensure that a new battery and a thin edged, non-conductive implement are within easy reach.
3. Remove the Front Panel Assembly from the unit as explained in Section 14.1.
4. Remove the Processor Board from the unit as explained in Section 14.4.
5. Referring to the diagram below, use the non-conductive implement to gently lever the battery upwards
from near the rear of the clip. As soon as the battery lifts up a small amount, gently ease the battery in a
horizontal direction away from the holder and the clip. Keep the battery in contact with the clip.
DO NOT LIFT UP THE CLIP MORE THAN ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY.
6. Keep the battery in contact with the clip until you are prepared to insert the new one.
When the clip looses contact with the battery, there is a maximum of 10 seconds before all configuration
and database information is lost.
7. Once prepared, remove existing battery and then slide the new one under the clip and into the holder -
observing the polarity symbols. Complete this action within 10 seconds.
8. Re-assemble the 7955 instrument
Part of Battery
Processor
Board
Clip/
contact
Battery
holder
Figure 14.5: Where to find the back-up battery on the Processor Board
The instructions given below should only be carried out if it is absolutely necessary.
Processor
Board
Rear Panel
Assembly
fixing screws
(4 off)
2. Pull the Processor Board forwards so that it disengages from the connector at the back of the case.
Withdraw the board from the case.
3. Pull the Power Supply Board forwards so that it disengages from the connector at the back of the case.
Withdraw the board from the case.
4. Remove the four screws which secure the Rear Panel Assembly into the case.
5. Withdraw the Rear Panel Assembly from the case, taking care not to bend the metal spring clips on the
top and bottom of the Connector Board.
6. Replace all items by reversing this procedure. Take great care to ensure that the cables are not pinched
on re-assembly, and ensure that the metal clips are not bent or damaged.
2. Referring to the diagram, undo and remove the six screws and washers which fix the Mother board to
the rest of the Rear Panel Assembly.
3. Using a straight pull, carefully lift the Mother Board clear of its four connections to the connector board.
The Mother Board is now free.
4. Replace all items by reversing this procedure. Take great care to ensure that the cables are not
pinched on re-assembly, and ensure that the metal clips are not bent or damaged.
1. Ensure jumpers on the Ethernet board are configured correctly. Use Table 14.11.1 to verify this. (Figure 14.9
shows where to find these jumpers)
4. Locate connectors PL12, PL13 and PL14 on the processor board. They are used for attaching the Ethernet
board to the processor board. Remove any bridges you may see covering pins of PL12 – PL14. (Figure 14.11
indicates where to find the connectors).
5. If vibration is significant where the 7955 instrument is to be sited, you should plug in a plastic post, similar to
Figure 14.8, into a hole on the processor board. The location of the hole is indicated in Figure 14.11
The plastic post is supplied with the Ethernet board. Fitting it is optional but will prevent the Ethernet board from
shaking loose when the 7955 instrument is sited in an area with vibrations.
6. When ready, bring the Ethernet board to just above the processor board
7. Align the connector blocks underneath the Ethernet board with PL12, PL13 and PL14 on the processor board.
(Figure 14.10 shows the connector blocks). If using the plastic post (from step 5), it should now be naturally
aligned with the hole on the Ethernet Board. (The hole is shown in Figure 14.9)
8. Check visually for a good alignment and then apply a gentle pressure from above, but only over the connection
points
9. Once the Ethernet board begins to engage onto the processor board, re-check the alignment at all the
connecting points. If okay, apply further pressure until it is fully engaged. Otherwise, disengage carefully and
return to step 6. If the plastic post (from step 5) has engaged, you may need to simultaneously squeeze the
anchored tip and lift board up to disengage.
JP1 JP2 JP3 JP4 JP5 JP6 JP7 JP8 JP9 JP10 JP11
2-3
Made Open Open Made Open Made Open Open Open Open
Made
Note: “Made” – Bridge covers pins 1 and 2 unless specified otherwise, “Open” – No bridge covers the pins
Note: The PL5 and JP8-11 connectors on the top surface are for factory testing
To identify an item:
1. Find the item on the appropriate assembly drawing (Figure 15.1).
2. Note the Item Number by the side of it.
3. look up the Item Number on the parts list (Table 15.1)
The parts list tells you:
the Part Number for the item
a description of the item
the quantity of the item that appears on the drawing
2 79513703 Bezel 1
22 360106230 2A glass 1
Important Notice
This chapter is only relevant to 7955’s with the “HART” add-on board installed.
Warning!! Each network loop must have no more than five “SMART” field transmitters connected at
any one time. Exceeding this number will damage add-on boards.
The following “safe area only” diagram shows all the HART network loops with the maximum number of
“SMART” field transmitters connected to each loop. In practice, far fewer transmitters are used.
Take note of the warnings - above and below. Section 16.3 has details of external wiring involving the 7955.
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5
a
HART Channel 1 HART 1 Value HART Channel 3
0.125 b
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5
Warning!! Connecting up “SMART” transducers has to be done with great care. Powering-up more than
one point-to-point configured transmitter on a HART network loop can produce an electrical
current (20mA per transmitter) that can damage the 7955.
The communications standard for each network loop is the HART§ Protocol**. A full technical discussion of
this standard is outside the scope of this operating manual. There is a detailed discussion of the HART
protocol in the Rosemount booklet entitled “HART Field Communications Protocol - A Technical
Description”. However, particularly important aspects involving the 7955 are covered in later section as
they are needed.
†
A “SMART” transmitter is said to be intelligent because it contains a micro-processor that provides extra functionality. This may
take various forms, such as on-board calculations, handling multiple sensors, combining types of measurement. measurement
integrity indicators, and so on. “SMART” is also used for the ability to re-use existing field wiring.
‡
Part number is 79557
§
This is an acronym for “Highway Addressable Remote Transducer”. HART is a registered trademark of the HART
Communication foundation.
**
Implementation conforms to revision 5.5 of the HART protocol specification.
Application software is able to request data from dynamic variables that are kept and maintained by a
“SMART” transmitter. These dynamic variables can be thought of as being very much like 7955 type data
locations. Four dynamic variables per “SMART” field transmitter can be requested. A total of sixteen
dynamic variables can be input to the 7955. Configuration details concentrate on setting up the 7955 to
obtain up to eight (the maximum) measurement values.
HART HART
7955 HART Inputs Transmitter Transmitter
HART 1 Variables Variables
Primary Primary
HART 2
Secondary Secondary
HART 7
HART network loop 1
HART 8
HART 9
HART network loop 2
HART 10
HART 11
HART HART
HART 12 Transmitter Transmitter
HART 13 Variables Variables
Primary Primary
HART 14 Secondary Secondary
Fourth Fourth
HART 16
Address = 1 Address = 8
7955
Figure 16.2: “SMART” Analogue input on the HART add-on board (Internally powered)
Every analogue input on the 7955 Flow Computer utilises a internal 100Ω current sense resistor. The circuitry
for the “SMART” analogue inputs on the HART add-on board use a 100Ω current sense resistor in series with
an active impedance. The total impedance is then sufficient for reliable operations at HART signal
frequencies, while minimising the dc voltage drop across the 7955 Flow Computer terminals. This allows a
sufficient voltage at the field transmitter even when powered through I.S. Barriers (or Isolators).
Parameter notes:
1. At d.c., the voltage drop at the maximum current of 22mA is 3.4V
2. Minimum impedance in the HART extended frequency band (500 -10khz) is 330Ω
3. Maximum impedance in the HART extended frequency band (500 -10khz) is 480Ω
HART network loop 1 (Analogue input 13):
D-Type D-Type Pin
Pin function Pin no. Designation
+24V d.c. (isolated supply) SK3/34 +24V Analogue
Analogue input signal + SK3/40 Analog i/p 13 +
Analogue input signal - SK3/39 Analog i/p 13 -
0V d.c. (isolated supply) SK3/18 0V Analogue
Important Notice
The “HART” add-on board provides 4 HART channels that utilise existing Analogue
Inputs (13, 14, 15 and 16). This allows SMART and Non-SMART instruments to use an
analogue input at the same time. However, the F.S.K. signal produces random errors
on the analogue signal which affect the normal accuracy (See Appendix ‘C’).
We strongly recommend that analogue inputs being used for HART loop inputs should
only be used for HART communications.
We can provide multi-pair cable that has a maximum capacitance of 115 pF/m. The following table shows
the recommended maximum cable lengths for typical HART network loops with this cable.
A discussion of cable choices can be found in the Rosemount booklet entitled “HART Field
Communications Protocol - A Technical Description”.
Important Notice:
Field transmitters in hazardous areas
Always follow wiring instructions provided by manufacturers of the field transmitters.
Example 1
A HART network loop with one “SMART” static pressure field transmitter is attached to analogue input 15.
The objectives of this example are:
• to set a multi-drop address
• to get static pressure from the fourth dynamic variable (on the transmitter) into the first HART data
location dedicated to holding input values
• to allocate the first HART data location to the Line pressure calculation
1. Press the MENU key so that page 1 of the main menu appears.
Go to the wizard selection
menu 2. Use the DOWN-ARROW key until the “Configure” main menu option is
displayed.
3. Press the blue key that is alongside the “Configure” option
4. Press the ‘a’ key twice.
5. Press the ‘b’ key and then use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through a
Select the Hart inputs
list of wizards.
wizard
6. Press the ‘b’ key when “Hart inputs” appears on the display.
Select HART Input 1 7. Press the ‘d’ key to answer “yes” to the prompt.
8. “HART 1 PhyLinkNo” is set to “HART link 1” by default. This example
Choose the HART network
involves HART network loop 1 (i.e. HART link 1) so there is no need to
loop
change the setting.
However, If anything other than “HART link 1” is shown:
• Press the ‘b’ key and then use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll
through the options.
• Press the ‘b’ key when “HART link 1” is displayed.
9. Press the ENTER key to continue to the next step.
10. Press the ‘b’ key
Choose the address of the
“Field transmitter” 11. Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the options until
“HART address 5” is shown.
12. Press the ‘b’ key to confirm this selection
13. Press the ENTER key to continue to the next step.
Choose the fourth dynamic 14. Press the ‘b’ key
variable 15. Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the options until
“Fourth variable” is shown.
16. Press the ‘b’ key to confirm this selection
17. Press the ENTER key to continue to the next step.
Choose the type of 18. Press the ‘b’ key
dynamic variable 19. Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the options until
“Static press (G)” is shown.
20. Press the ‘b’ key to confirm this selection.
21. Press the ENTER key to continue to the next step.
Select the averaging mode 22. Press the ENTER key to keep existing setting and continue to next step.
(End of Example)
To view results after exiting the wizard, look in the menu :<“Health check”>/<“Inputs”>
These records are called ‘Batch Transaction Records’ but may sometimes be referred to as ‘Quantity
Transaction Records’ (QTR) and typically contain totals, start/stop time/date and conditions, together with
weighted averages.
(2) Timed
This type of batch commences when a programmed (SET) date and time matches that of the Flow
Computer calendar clock. Time is the primary parameter for completing a batch. The duration of a
batch is a fixed, user-programmed period. Batches are always back-to-back and have to be halted on-
demand by a menu-based command selection or by pressing the BOTTOM-BLANK (application
specific) front panel key.
Alternatively, the BOTTOM-BLANK (application specific) front panel key can start / stop a batch.
Menu Data List (1 of 2): * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes? Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes?
1 Timed Batch start 12 Prime base density * cÖf G
2 Timed batch interval 13 SG prime value * cÖf G
3 Timed batch control B, D 14 Energy value * cÖf G
4 Manual batch enable B, D 15 Meter density ZLine * cÖf G
5 Man Stn batch enable B, D 16 Meter density ZBase * cÖf G
6 Daily contract hour 17 Diff pressure value * cÖf G
7 Daily batch enable B, D 18 Meter factor * cÖf G
8 Batch auto print E 19 Meter K factor * cÖf G
9 Meter temperature * cÖf G - Flow status cÖf (A)
10 Meter pressure * cÖf G - Operating mode cÖf A
11 Prime density value * cÖf G
cÖf = Multi-stream/run data type (See Chapter 11 for explanation)
Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes? Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes?
CURRENT BATCH TRANSACTION RECORD PREVIOUS BATCH TRANSACTION RECORD
20a Batch number cÖf F 20b Batch number cÖf (= 20a)
21a Batch status cÖf 21b Batch status cÖf (= 21a)
22a Batch start time cÖf C: 7 22b Batch start time cÖf (= 22a)
23a Batch start temp cÖf C: 2 23b Batch start temp cÖf (= 23a)
24a Batch start press cÖf C: 3 24b Batch start press cÖf (= 24a)
25a Batch start density cÖf C: 8 25b Batch start density cÖf (= 25a)
26a Start vol total cÖf C: 1 26b Start vol total cÖf (= 26a)
27a Start mass total cÖf C: 1 27b Start mass total cÖf (= 27a)
28a Start bvol total cÖf C: 1 28b Start bvol total cÖf (= 28a)
29a Start energy total cÖf C: 1 29b Start energy total cÖf (= 29a)
30a Start ivol total cÖf C: 1 30b Start ivol total cÖf (= 30a)
31a Start rev vol total cÖf C: 1 31b Start rev vol total cÖf (= 31a)
32a Start rev mass total cÖf C: 1 32b Start rev mass total cÖf (= 32a)
33a Start rev bvol total cÖf C: 1 33b Start rev bvol total cÖf (= 33a)
34a Start rev energy tot cÖf C: 1 34b Start rev engy total cÖf (= 34a)
35a Start rev ivol total cÖf C: 1 35b Start rev ivol total cÖf (= 35a)
36a Start net vol total cÖf C: 1 36b Start net vol total cÖf (= 36a)
37a Start net mass total cÖf C: 1 37b Start net mass total cÖf (= 37a)
38a Start net bvol total cÖf C: 1 38b Start net bvol total cÖf (= 38a)
39a Start net energy tot cÖf C: 1 39b Start net engy total cÖf (= 39a)
40a Start net ivol total cÖf C: 1 40b Start net ivol total cÖf (= 40a)
41a Batch ivol total ** cÖf C: 1 41b Batch ivol total ** cÖf (= 41a)
42a Batch vol total ** cÖf C: 1 42b Batch vol total ** cÖf (= 42a)
43a Batch bvol total ** cÖf C: 1 43b Batch bvol total ** cÖf (= 43a)
44a Batch energy total ** cÖf C: 1 44b Batch energy total ** cÖf (= 44a)
45a Batch rev vol total cÖf C: 1 45b Batch rev vol total cÖf (= 45a)
46a Batch rev mass total ** cÖf C: 1 46b Batch rev mass total ** cÖf (= 46a)
47a Batch rev bvol total ** cÖf C: 1 47b Batch rev bvol total ** cÖf (= 47a)
48a Batch rev energy tot ** cÖf C: 1 48b Batch rev energy tot ** cÖf (= 48a)
49a Batch rev ivol total ** cÖf C: 1 49b Batch rev ivol total ** cÖf (= 49a)
50a Batch net vol total ** cÖf C: 1 50b Batch net vol total ** cÖf (= 50a)
51a Batch net mass total ** cÖf C: 1 51b Batch net mass total ** cÖf (= 51a)
52a Batch net bvol total ** cÖf C: 1 52b Batch net bvol total ** cÖf (= 52a)
53a Batch net energy tot ** cÖf C: 1 53b Batch net energy tot ** cÖf (= 53a)
54a Batch net ivol total ** cÖf C: 1 54b Batch net ivol total ** cÖf (= 54a)
55a Batch alarm total cÖf C: 1 55b Batch alarm total cÖf (= 55a)
56a Stn batch vol total C: 1 56b Stn batch vol total (= 56a)
57a Stn batch mass total C: 1 57b Stn batch mass total (= 57a)
58a Stn batch bvol total C: 1 58b Stn batch bvol total (= 58a)
59a Stn batch energy tot C: 1 59b Stn batch energy tot (= 59a)
60a Stn batch ivol total C: 1 60b Stn batch ivol total (= 60a)
61a Stn bch rev vol tot C: 1 61b Stn bch rev vol tot (= 61a)
62a Stn bch rev mass tot C: 1 62b Stn bch rev mass tot (= 62a)
63a Stn bch rev bvol tot C: 1 63b Stn bch rev bvol tot (= 63a)
64a Stn bch rev engy tot C: 1 64b Stn bch rev engy tot (= 64a)
65a Stn bch rev ivol tot C: 1 65b Stn bch rev ivol tot (= 65a)
66a Stn bch net vol tot C: 1 66b Stn bch net vol tot (= 66a)
67a Stn bch net mass tot C: 1 67b Stn bch net mass tot (= 67a)
68a Stn bch net bvol tot C: 1 68b Stn bch net bvol tot (= 68a)
69a Stn bch net engy tot C: 1 69b Stn bch net engy tot (= 69a)
70a Stn bch net ivol tot C: 1 70b Stn bch net ivol tot (= 70a)
71a Stn batch alarm tot C: 1 71b Stn batch alarm tot (= 71a)
72a Batch av temp ** cÖf C: 2 72b Batch av temp cÖf (= 72a)
73a Batch av den temp ** cÖf C: 4 73b Batch av den temp cÖf (= 73a)
74a Batch av press ** cÖf C: 3 74b Batch av press cÖf (= 74a)
75a Batch av meter dens ** cÖf C: 8 75b Batch av meter dens cÖf (= 75a)
76a Batch av base dens ** cÖf C: 9 76b Batch av base dens cÖf (= 76a)
77a Batch av SG ** cÖf C: 5 77b Batch av SG cÖf (= 77a)
78a Batch av energy ** cÖf C: 6 78b Batch av energy cÖf (= 78a)
79a Batch av DP ** cÖf C:11 79b Batch av DP cÖf (= 79a)
80a Batch av Z ** cÖf C:10 80b Batch av Z cÖf (= 80a)
81a Batch av base Z ** cÖf C:10 81b Batch av base Z cÖf (= 81a)
82a Batch av MF ** cÖf C:12 82b Batch av MF cÖf (= 82a)
83a Batch av K factor ** cÖf C:12 83b Batch av K factor cÖf (= 83a)
84b Batch end date/time cÖf C: 7
85b Batch end meter temp cÖf C: 2
86b Batch end meter pres cÖf C: 3
87b Batch end meter dens cÖf C: 8
88b End vol total cÖf C: 1
89b End mass total cÖf C: 1
90b End bvol total cÖf C: 1
91b End energy total cÖf C: 1
92b End ivol total cÖf C: 1
93b End rev vol total cÖf C: 1
94b End rev mass total cÖf C: 1
95b End rev bvol total cÖf C: 1
96b End rev energy tot cÖf C: 1
97b End rev ivol total cÖf C: 1
98b End net vol total cÖf C: 1
99b End net mass total cÖf C: 1
100b End net bvol total cÖf C: 1
101b End net energy tot cÖf C: 1
102b End net ivol total cÖf C: 1
** Continuously updated during batch. cÖf = Multi-stream/run data type (See Chapter 11 for explanation)
Abbreviations used:
“temp” = temperature, “pres” or “press” = pressure”, “ivol” = indicated volume, “bvol” = base volume, “av” = average,
“Stn” = station, “Bch” = batch, “den” or “dens” = density, “DP” = differential pressure, “rev” = reverse, “tot” = total and
“MF” = meter factor.
Notes:
A Batch transactions require the 7955 Flow Computer to be operating in “Normal” mode. This parameter can
be found in the ‘i’-key menu, along with the flow status parameter. The operating mode can only be
changed when flow status shows “stopped”. For further details, see “Totals” sections of Chapter 11.
B Activating another batch type will immediately terminate all existing batch activities.
C:<n> Use Table 17.1 to help identify the initial data source for batch transaction record parameters
D Terminating a running batch will leave both current and previous batch records with identical values until a
new batch is started.
E Enables or prevents an automatic printout of the batch report immediately on completion of a batch. A serial
communication port will need to be configured for a connection to an ASCII compatible device e.g. printer.
F This parameter cannot be reset to zero on-demand but will rollover to zero after exceeding 4.95 billion.
What to do:
Read the Overview and then browse through the Operation Events list and Menu Data / Parameter list
for this example.
Overview:
Figure 17.2 gives a graphical overview for the example. It shows single-shot batches, each varying in
duration and, consequently, varying the quantity delivered. These batches are unaffected by the flow
conditions, which are reasonably stable in this case. The Flow Computer does not control product flow.
A station mode batch transaction uses both streams/runs 1 and 2 for a single batch. Station totals in the
current record are updated during each cycle. Individual stream/run totals are not updated.
(Opening/Closing totals are unaffected by the mode).
The single stream/run mode involves an individual stream/run being used for an individual batch,
allowing up to two batches to be recorded at the same time. Individual stream/run totals in the current
batch record are updated once every cycle. Station totals are not updated. (Opening/Closing totals are
unaffected)
Time
B1 B2
(Tank A) (Tank B)
"Run" "Halt" "Run" "Halt"
(Enable & Trigger)
Menu Data / Parameter List: (The associated menus are listed on page 18.2.)
Menu Data (as displayed) Value/Option Comment
• Use command for enabling and triggering the
Manual batch enable * “Run”
non-station batch (i.e. stream/run 1, 2, 3 or 4).
• Use command for enabling and triggering a
Man Stn batch enable * “Run”
station batch (i.e. streams/runs 1-4 summation).
Batch status ** (See “Operation Events”) • Useful for monitoring the batch operation.
* “Halt” is the command for completing a batch and deselecting the batch type.
** Viewed from within the current batch transaction record.
What to do:
Read the Overview and then browse through the Operation Events list for this example.
Overview:
Timed batches operate in station mode only, whereby both streams/runs 1 and 2 are used for a single
batch. During a batch, the Station totals in the current batch record are updated once every machine
cycle. The individual stream/run totals in the current record are not updated.
Figure 17.3 gives a graphical overview for the example. It shows a series of back-to-back batches; each is
programmed to last 300 seconds. The first batch commences - triggers - when the 7955 calendar clock
matches a programmed (SET) date and time, “12-10-2003 08:00:00”. Timed batch operations are
unaffected by flow conditions, which are reasonably stable in this example. Batch Bn is interrupted 200
seconds after starting, following the selection of a “halt” command.
Flow
(m3/hour)
"In progress"
"Complete"
Time
B1 B2 B3 Bn
(300s) (300s) (300s) (n-1)*300s (200s)
12-10-2003 12-10-2003 "Halt"
07:51:00 08:00:00
"Run" (Trigger)
(Enabled)
Menu Data / Parameter List: (The associated menus are listed on page 18.2.)
Menu Data Value/Option Comment
Timed batch interval 300.0 (s) • 300 seconds per station batch.
Timed batch control “Run” • Command for enabling the timed batch type.
Timed batch start * 12-10-2003 08:00:00 • Trigger for 1st batch is 12th October 2003 at 8am.
Batch status ** In Progress Ù Compete • Useful for monitoring the general batch operation
* “00-00-0000 00:00:00” = Start 1st batch immediately after editing duration, then selecting “Run” command.
** Viewed from within the current batch transaction record (menu: <Batching>/<”Current batch”>)
Configuration Option:
The date element of <”Batch start time“> is optional. It can be “00-00-00” if commencing with the first batch on the
present day. The time element must always be specified since “00:00:00” is treated by the 7955 as midnight.
What to do:
Read the Overview and then browse through the Operation Events list and Menu Data / Parameter list
for this example.
Overview:
Daily batches operate in station mode only, whereby both streams/runs 1 and 2 are used for a single
batch. During a batch, the Station totals in the current batch record are updated once every machine
cycle. The individual stream/run totals in the current record are not updated.
Figure 17.4 gives a graphical overview of this example. It shows two back-to-back batches, each batch
lasting 24 hours. The first 24-hour batch B1 commences - triggers - when the “Run” command is selected.
The batch operation is unaffected by the flow conditions, which are reasonably stable in this case. Batch
B1 ends automatically after 24 hours has elapsed. The second batch B2 then commences automatically.
Batch B2 ends automatically after 24 hours has elapsed. This time, a “Halt” command is selected and this
prevents more batches.
Flow
(m3/hour)
"In progress"
"Complete"
Time
B1 B2
13-10-2003 (24 hours)
(24 hours) 08:00:00
"Run" "Halt"
12-10-2003 14-10-2003
08:00:00 08:00:00
Menu Data / Parameter List: (The associated menus are listed on page 18.2.)
Menu Data
Value/Option Comment
(as displayed)
Daily contract hour “0800” • Select “0800” as contract hour.
Control “Run” • Command for starting the 24-hour batches.
Control “Halt” • Command for stopping the 24-hour batches
1. Method: On-demand
This feature requires no configuration apart from setting up an RS232C port, as guided in Chapter 7.
To activate, press the PRINT-MENU key and then select the “Print report” menu option. Now choose a
report by selecting from the multiple-choice options. Table 17.2 shows the relevant options for the
batch reports. The report format can be seen on pages 18.11 onwards.
Activation instructions:
1. Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”><”Batching”>/<”Automatic print”>
2. Select the “On” option
All methods require a RS232C communications port to be set-up for connection to a printer or other
ASCII compatible output device. Printed reports are transmitted in an ASCII format through the port
configured exclusively for this type of connection.
When a batch report is first printed, it is stamped with “ORIGINAL”. All subsequent printouts of the same
report will be stamped with “DUPLICATE”. However, the “current” batch report is stamped with
“DUPLICATE” only if the report values have not changed.
Tag number
Batch number X
Batch status XXXXXXXXXXXX
Cumulative Totals
-----------------
Start vol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
End vol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Start mass total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg
End mass total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg
Start bvol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
End bvol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Start energy total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX MJ
End energy total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX MJ
Batch Totals
------------
Batch vol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Batch mass total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg
Batch bvol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Batch energy total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX MJ
Batch alarm total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
Weighted Averages
-----------------
Batch av temp X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX Deg.C
Batch av den temp X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX Deg.C
Batch av press X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX bar abs
Batch av meter dens X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg/m3
Batch av base dens X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg/m3
Batch av SG X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
Batch av energy X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX MJ
Batch av Z X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
Batch av base Z X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
Alarm Counts
------------
Alarms during batch X X X X
If alarm count is not zero refer to alarm history log to obtain alarm details.
Alarm count is valid only if alarm history log is not full.
Tag number
Batch number X
Batch status XXXXXXXXXXX
Cumulative Totals
-----------------
Start ivol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
End ivol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Start vol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
End vol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Start mass total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg
End mass total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg
Start bvol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
End bvol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Start energy total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX MJ
End energy total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX MJ
Batch Totals
------------
Batch ivol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Batch vol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Batch mass total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg
Batch bvol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Batch energy total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX MJ
Batch alarm total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
Batch turbine errors X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
Weighted Averages
-----------------
Batch av temp X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX Deg.C
Batch av den temp X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX Deg.C
Batch av press X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX bar abs
Batch av meter dens X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg/m3
Batch av base dens X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg/m3
Batch av SG X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
Batch av energy X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX MJ
Batch av Z X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
Batch av base Z X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
Batch av MF X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
Batch av K factor X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX pulse/m3
Alarm Counts
------------
Alarms during batch X X X X
If alarm count is not zero refer to alarm history log to obtain alarm details.
Alarm count is valid only if alarm history log is not full.
Tag number
Batch number X
Batch status XXXXXXXXXXX
Cumulative Totals
-----------------
Start ivol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
End ivol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Start vol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
End vol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Start mass total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg
End mass total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg
Start bvol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
End bvol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Start energy total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX MJ
End energy total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX MJ
Batch Totals
------------
Batch ivol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Batch vol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Batch mass total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg
Batch bvol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Batch energy total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX MJ
Batch rev ivol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Batch rev vol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Batch rev mass total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg
Batch rev bvol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Batch rev energy tot X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX MJ
Batch net ivol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Batch net vol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Batch net mass total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg
Batch net bvol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Batch net energy tot X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX MJ
Weighted Averages
-----------------
Batch av temp X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX Deg.C
Batch av den temp X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX Deg.C
Batch av press X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX bar abs
Batch av meter dens X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg/m3
Batch av base dens X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg/m3
Batch av SG X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
Batch av energy X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX MJ
Batch av Z X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
Batch av base Z X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
Alarm Counts
------------
Alarms during batch X X X X
If alarm count is not zero refer to alarm history log to obtain alarm details.
Alarm count is valid only if alarm history log is not full.
Tag number
Batch number X
Batch status XXXXXXXXXX
Cumulative Totals
-----------------
Start ivol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
End ivol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Start vol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
End vol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Start mass total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg
End mass total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg
Start bvol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
End bvol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Start energy total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX MJ
End energy total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX MJ
Batch Totals
------------
Batch ivol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Batch vol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Batch mass total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg
Batch bvol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Batch energy total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX MJ
Batch alarm total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
Batch turbine errors X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
Weighted Averages
-----------------
Batch av temp X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX Deg.C
Batch av den temp X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX Deg.C
Batch av press X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX bar abs
Batch av meter dens X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg/m3
Batch av base dens X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg/m3
Batch av SG X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
Batch av energy X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX MJ
Batch av Z X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
Batch av base Z X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
Batch av MF X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
Batch av K factor X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX pulse/m3
Alarm Counts
------------
Alarms during batch X X X X
If alarm count is not zero refer to alarm history log to obtain alarm details.
Alarm count is valid only if alarm history log is not full.
Note: It is assumed that the readership has a working knowledge of a Windows-based PC, is
reasonably familiar with interconnecting the PC and Flow Computer and has some experience with
computer programming.
18.1 Introduction
18.1.1 What is FC-Basic?
FC-BASIC is the 7955 flow computer version of the traditional computer programming language known as
BASIC (Basic All-purpose Symbolic Instruction Code). Although not grabbing headlines in recent years,
those who owned microcomputers in the 1980’s will still fondly remember BASIC.
Functional Overview
Lines of FC-BASIC language are typically edited on a PC (or similar system) to form a program script. If
using a PC running Windows, you may wish to use the Notepad program as the editor. Once you have
finished editing, save the program script as a text file.
The next step is to transfer the program script (text file), to the flow computer through an RS-232 serial
cable, interconnecting PC serial port and 7955 serial port. If using a PC running Windows, you may wish to
use Terminal (Windows 3.1) or Hyperterm for carrying out the transfer. No more than one program script
can be stored in the 7955. The length of script is limited by memory availability.
You may also use the same PC application to enter FC-BASIC commands directly: LIST, DELETE and
VERIFY. For information on these commands, turn to page 19.3.
Note: Before running the FC-BASIC script, you will need to be at PROGRAMMER security level.
Once transferred to the flow computer, the FC-BASIC script can be run. Assuming there are no errors, it
executes repeatedly once every machine cycle.
Listed below are the calculations that can source a result from a FC-BASIC program (see Chapter 11). That
associated parameter (location) can be made “Live”, and the result from the FC-BASIC program can be put
into the live location without the possibility of another part of the 7955 overwriting the value. Any floating-point
parameter can be written into by a FC-BASIC program.
• Base Density B.
• Density B.
• Dynamic viscosity.
• Energy.
• Isentropic.
• Line pressure.
• SG B.
Apart from basic 7955 communication parameters, there are a few FC-BASIC simple set-up parameters:
FC-BASIC
<Cycle timeout> This defines the maximum period a program is allowed to execute before it
is suspended and a new machine cycle is begun. At the end of the next
machine cycle the program is allowed to execute from the line at which it
was suspended.
<Program timeout> This defines the maximum period a program is allowed to execute before it
is terminated and a timeout alarm is generated. At the end of the next
machine cycle program execution begins again from line one.
SERIAL PORTS
1. One 7955 serial port connection will be required for issuing direct commands (e.g. LIST) and the
transfer of FC-BASIC program script (text file) from an external system (e.g. PC, MAC, etc.) to the
7955. Basic communication parameters are as guided in Chapter 7, for RS-232 set-up. The exception
is <Function>, which must be “FC Basic”.
2. To view the output of a FCBasic program print statement, it is necessary to set-up a serial port as
“Printer”. Any ASCII compatible device, such as a printer or a PC acting as a terminal (See Chapter 7.)
can be attached to the serial port. If a program contains a print statement then a port must be
configured before the FCBasic program is verified.
LIST Lists all lines of the FC-BASIC script currently stored in the 7955.
DELETE Deletes the entire FC-BASIC script currently stored in the 7955.
VERIFY The FC will execute a program only after this command has been entered. The FC will check
the program for errors. If there are no errors then <Health check><FC Basic><Status> will show
“Success” and the program will be executed at the end of the next machine cycle. Otherwise an
error message will be generated at the serial port configured for FCBasic, and FCBasic status
will show “Program not ready”.
18.3.1 STATEMENTS
REM (REMark)
Purpose: It allows a script to be documented. All characters on the line, beyond the REM command,
have no effect on the FC-BASIC program.
Example1: 10 B = 1
20 IF B <> 2 THEN B = B + 1
Example2: 10 A = 1
20 IF A <> 2 THEN
30 A = A + 1
40 ELSE
50 A = A + 2
60 ENDIF
Purpose: Transfers ‘interpret and execute’ control directly to another line in the same program script.
Example: 10 GOTO 50
20 REM *** LINE 20 IS NEVER REACHED ***
:
50 REM *** JUMPED HERE FROM LINE 10 ***
GOSUB, RETURN
Purpose: GOSUB temporarily transfers program control directly to another line in the same program
script. When the RETURN is encountered, program control reverts back to the next
statement line following the original GOSUB.
Note: This FC-BASIC statement can be nested, and recursive, limited only by memory availability.
Example: 10 GOSUB 50
20 REM *** LINE 20 IS REACHED ***
:
50 REM *** TEMPORARY JUMP HERE FROM LINE 10 ***
60 A = A + 1
70 B = B + 1
80 RETURN
90 REM *** NEVER REACH LINE 90 SINCE CONTROL ALWAYS
100 REM *** RETURNS TO LINE 20
The variable X, an integer value, is initialised with the value of Y, which can be a constant or a
variable. W is optional and may be positive or negative. If missing, the value 1 is assumed.
The loop stops when X is equal to or greater than Z. On exiting the loop, X contains the
value last used for the comparison.
Example: 10 B = 0
20 FOR A = 1 TO 10
30 B = B + A
40 NEXT
WHILE, WEND
Purpose: Executes a loop of statement(s) until a Boolean expression evaluates to FALSE. The loop
does not execute unless the Boolean expression initially evaluates to TRUE.
The WHILE is always followed by a Boolean expression. Statement lines between WHILE
and WEND will be executed as long as the expression evaluates to TRUE. When the
expression evaluates to false, ‘interpret and execute’ control continues with the next
statement line following WEND.
Example: 10 A = 1
10 WHILE A < 10
20 A = A +1
30 WEND
STOP
Purpose: Stops the program script execution at this line.
Example: 10 STOP
TIME
Purpose: Obtains the seconds value from an internal clock timer. The value can be used in
calculations within the program script. It is useful for tracking the elapsed time between
loops. TIME will return a 6 element array containing 0=seconds, 1=minutes, 2=hours,
3=day, 4= month and 5=year.
TIMER(1...8)
Purpose: There are up to 8 countdown timers available. They can be assigned a period of seconds in
32
the range of 0 to (2 –1)/1000. The timers run backwards, decreasing by each cycle. On
reaching zero, ONTIMER GOSUB is invoked.
To cancel a timer, set the period to 0 (zero seconds).
ONTIMER(1...8), GOSUB
Purpose: When a particular timer reaches 0 (zero seconds), program control is transferred directly to
another line in the script. As with all GOSUB statements, there must be a RETURN.
Note: It is only ever invoked when the particular timer reaches 0, irrespective of where it is
positioned in the script.
200 REM *** JUMPS HERE ONLY WHEN TIMER(1) REACHES ZERO ***
210 A = A + 1
220 poke(LOC_SP_EQU1_A, A)
230 timer(1) = 10 ! reinitialise timer
240 return
Purpose: Declares a variable as a one-dimensional (flat) array of a specified size. A variable array
can store values of floating-point numbers or integers in particular positions (spaces).
Note: Array declarations do not directly affect program control or the way a script is executed.
PRINT
Purpose: A means to output simply formatted data through a serial port that has been configured for
connection to an ASCII compatible device, such as a printer.
Two special formatting functions, SPC and TAB, as provide for use in PRINT statements.
SPC(n) is used to insert space characters in the output, where n is the number of spaces
required.
TAB(N) is used to position the insertion point to an absolute column number, where n is the
column number. Use TAB with no argument to position the insertion point at the beginning
of the next print zone.
Note: If a ‘;’ is used as a separator, the next print item is output in the next print zone.
FALSE 0
LIVE 0
SET 1
FAIL 2
FB 3
GETSTATUS(X) Read status of location X. Returns a numeric value, equal to one of the pre-
defined constants: LIVE, SET, FAIL or FB
SETSTATUS(X, N) Write status of location X. The N is a numeric value, equal to one of the pre-
defined constants: LIVE, SET, FAIL or FB
2100 LOC_OPT_ENERGY_CALC_SEL = 41
2110 LOC_LIVE_CO2_VALUE = 901
2120 LOC_LIVE_N2_VALUE = 909
2130 LOC_SG_PRIME_VALUE = 718
2140
2150 rem Select Energy Calc From FCBasic (must use loc for option locations)
2160 loc(LOC_OPT_ENERGY_CALC_SEL) = DBM_OPT_ENERGY_FCBASIC
2170
2180 rem Sensible initial values (must use loc for live/set locations)
2190 loc(LOC_LIVE_CO2_VALUE) = 0.00201
2200 loc(LOC_LIVE_N2_VALUE) = 0.00139
2210
2220 InitFlag = 1
2999 return
Verify
2160 LOC_ENERGY_TOTAL_ROLLOVER = 93
2170
2180 LOC_LINE_TEMP_VALUE = 416
2190 LOC_DENS_TEMPA_VALUE = 438
2200 LOC_LINE_PRESS_VALUE = 321
2210 LOC_DIFF_PRESS_VALUE = 339
2220 LOC_LINE_DEN_PRIME_VALUE = 677
2230
2240 rem FC Basic Location Numbers For Gas App 1540
2250 rem ------------------------------------------
2260 LOC_FCBASIC_REAL_1 = 2407
2270 LOC_FCBASIC_REAL_2 = 2408
2280 LOC_FCBASIC_REAL_3 = 2409
2290 LOC_FCBASIC_REAL_4 = 2410
2300 LOC_FCBASIC_REAL_5 = 2411
2310 LOC_FCBASIC_REAL_6 = 2412
2320 LOC_FCBASIC_REAL_7 = 2413
2330 LOC_FCBASIC_REAL_8 = 2414
2340 LOC_FCBASIC_REAL_9 = 2415
2350 LOC_FCBASIC_REAL_10 = 2416
2360 LOC_FCBASIC_REAL_11 = 2417
2370 LOC_FCBASIC_REAL_12 = 2418
2380
2390 rem Simulated Locations
2400 rem -------------------
2410 LOC_BASE_VOL_MONTH_TOTAL = LOC_FCBASIC_REAL_1
2420 LOC_ENERGY_MONTH_TOTAL = LOC_FCBASIC_REAL_2
2430
2440 LOC_BASE_VOL_LAST_MONTH_TOTAL = LOC_FCBASIC_REAL_3
2450 LOC_ENERGY_LAST_MONTH_TOTAL = LOC_FCBASIC_REAL_4
2460
2470 rem Initialise Non-Zero Program Variables
2480 rem -------------------------------------
2490 BaseVolMonthTotal = peek(LOC_BASE_VOL_MONTH_TOTAL)
2500 EnergyMonthTotal = peek(LOC_ENERGY_MONTH_TOTAL)
2510 LastMonth = time(4)
2520
2530 rem Initialise Arrays
2540 rem -----------------
2550 LocIds(1) = LOC_LINE_TEMP_VALUE
2560 LocIds(2) = LOC_DENS_TEMPA_VALUE
2570 LocIds(3) = LOC_LINE_PRESS_VALUE
2580 LocIds(4) = LOC_DIFF_PRESS_VALUE
2590 LocIds(5) = LOC_LINE_DEN_PRIME_VALUE
2600
2610 for i = 1 to NUMBER_OF_MAXMIN
2620 Max(i) = 0
2630 Min(i) = 0
2640 Samples(i) = 0
2650 next i
2660
2670 InitFlag = 1
2680
2690 return
5040
5050 print " "
5060 print " MONTHLY REPORT"
5070 print " =============="
5080 gosub 6000 ! print date/time
5090 print " "
5100 print "Month Total"
5110 print "-----------"
5120 print "Base vol total "; BaseVolMonthTotal, "std m3"
5130 print "Energy total "; EnergyMonthTotal, "MJ"
5140 print " "
5150 print "Maxima"
5160 print "------"
5170 print "Meter temperature "; Max(LINE_TEMP_INDEX)
5180 print "Density1 temperature "; Max(DENS_TEMPA_INDEX)
5190 print "Meter pressure "; Max(LINE_PRESS_INDEX)
5200 print "Diff pressure "; Max(DIFF_PRESS_INDEX)
5210 print "Prime density "; Max(LINE_DENS_INDEX)
5220 print " "
5230 print "Minima"
5240 print "------"
5250 print "Meter temperature "; Min(LINE_TEMP_INDEX)
5260 print "Density1 temperature "; Min(DENS_TEMPA_INDEX)
5270 print "Meter pressure "; Min(LINE_PRESS_INDEX)
5280 print "Diff pressure "; Min(DIFF_PRESS_INDEX)
5290 print "Prime density "; Min(LINE_DENS_INDEX)
5300 print " "
5310 print "************* END OF REPORT ******************"
5320
5330 BaseVolMonthTotal = 0
5340 EnergyMonthTotal = 0
5350 poke(LOC_BASE_VOL_MONTH_TOTAL, BaseVolMonthTotal)
5360 poke(LOC_ENERGY_MONTH_TOTAL, EnergyMonthTotal)
5370
5380 for i = 1 to NUMBER_OF_MAXMIN
5390 Max(i) = 0
5400 Min(i) = 0
5410 Samples(i) = 0
5420 next i
5430
5440 return
6000 rem **** Subroutine Print_DateAndTime ****
6010
6020 day = time(3)
6030 month = time(4)
6040 year = time(5)
6050
6060 hours = time(2)
6070 mins = time(1)
6080 secs = time(0)
6090
6100 print day; "/"; month; "/"; year, hours; ":"; mins; ":"; secs
6110
6120 return
Verify
Appendix A Glossary
A
ADC See Analogue to digital converter
Alarm An indicator which shows when a failure has occurred. Alarms are
classified as System, Input or Limit.
Analogue to digital converter A circuit that converts analogue voltages or currents into digital (usually
binary) numbers which can then be processed by computers. The
digital signal gives the amplitude of the analogue signal at a particular
instant. See also Digital to analogue converter.
AUI Short for Attachment Unit Interface, the portion of the Ethernet standard
that specifies how a cable is to be connected to a transceiver that plugs
into a 15-pin socket
B
5 2
Bar A unit of pressure. 1 bar = 10 Nm .
Base condition Base or Standard Conditions give the volume which would have been
transferred if the temperature were at a pre-defined figure. The actual
values for base temperature and pressure vary from country to country.
British Thermal Unit The energy required to raise the temperature of one pound of water
through one degree Fahrenheit.
C
Calibrate To assess the performance of an item of equipment against that of
another one whose accuracy is known.
Calibration certificate Each transducer is calibrated before it leaves the factory. The details
(together with the transducer’s serial number) are recorded on a
Calibration Certificate.
Calibration constant Among the information given on the calibration certificate are some
constants (unique to that transducer) which compare the transducer’s
actual performance against a standard. The signal converter must
know these constants before it can calculate accurate results.
Chassis earth In a large installation where the chassis and instrumentation are
earthed separately, this is the “dirty” earth to which instrument chassis
are connected.
Connector The part of a cable that plugs into a port or interface to connect one
device to another. Most connectors are either male (containing one or
more exposed pins) or female (containing holes in which the male
connector can be inserted).
2. The method by which transducers and other inputs and outputs are
physically connected to the 7955
Conventional pipe prover This has a volume between detectors that permits a minimum
accumulation of 10,000 direct (unaltered) pulses from the meter under
test.
Crystal factor A multiplying factor which accounts for the difference between the
actual frequency of a particular crystal and its theoretical frequency.
D
DAC See Digital to analogue converter
Degree API Used in the petroleum industry to describe the density of petroleum
products. A degree API is given by:
Values lie within the range -1 to +101, the larger the number the lighter
the oil.
Degree Baume A unit on an arbitrary scale which can be converted into actual SG
values. Used when describing the sugar content of aqueous solutions.
Degree Brix A unit on an arbitrary scale which can be converted into actual SG
values. Used when describing the sugar content of aqueous solutions.
Digital to analogue converter A circuit that converts digital signals into analogue equivalents. See
also Analogue to digital converter.
E
EMC Electro-Magnetic Compatibility
Event A change in the system operation. Events may be caused by the user
(such as setting a parameter or changing the security) or by alarms (if,
for example, a fallback is invoked when the system fails).
External connection A generic term which covers: inputs, outputs, power supplies and serial
communications; in short, anything connected to the 7955.
F
Fallback mode A description of the system when it is using a Fallback value.
Fallback value A value used as a temporary substitute for a parameter when a live
input which is used to calculate the parameter fails.
Flow computer An instrument which monitors flow rates and densities of gases and
liquids. It does this by communicating with transmitters such as
pressure, temperature, level, flow, density and analytical instruments.
These measurements are then corrected for temperature, pressure and
velocity of sound.
FS Full scale.
H
Hazardous area An area where there is a risk of fire or explosion.
Health check a check that all inputs and devices connected to the 7955 are operating
normally.
I
Instrumentation earth In a large installation where the instrumentation and chassis are
earthed separately, this is the “clean” earth to which the instrumentation
is connected.
J
J See Joule.
2
Joule The unit of work. 1J = 1N/m .
K
K-factor The K-factor relates the output from a flow meter to a specific set of
units. For volume output meters such as turbines, it is often quoted as
pulses per meter cubed.
Kinematic viscosity The ratio of the dynamic viscosity of a fluid to its density.
L
LED See Light-emitting diode.
Light-emitting diode A diode which light up when current flows through it. LED’s are usually
used as indicator lights on instruments.
Limit Limits are upper and lower values between which a measured
parameter is expected to be. If the parameter is outside these limits, it
can trigger an alarm if you have set the system to do so.
M
Mass flow rate The rate at which a given mass of fluid flows through a transducer.
P
Pa See Pascal.
2
Pascal The unit of force. 1 Pa = 1N/m
Percent mass The percentage that the mass of a substance has compared to the total
mass for a mixture of substances of which it is a part.
Periodic time The duration of one cycle of a wave-form, equal to the inverse of the
frequency.
Platinum resistance thermometer A highly-accurate thermometer, based around a coil of very pure
platinum wire, which is extremely stable over time. It can be used
instead of an analogue input to the signal converter or flow computer.
Power-on self test A standard routine which an item of equipment goes through when it is
powered up to make sure that it is operating correctly. The progress of
the test is usually shown on the instrument display.
Pulse output An output of single pulses, sent to equipment such as pulse summators
or electro-mechanical totalizers.
R
Radio frequency interference Interference from sources which transmit at radio frequencies; that is,
frequencies in the range of about 100kHz to about 300GHz.
vl ρvl
Reynolds number A dimensionless constant given by Re = =
ν μ
Where: μ = fluid viscosity
l = length
ν = kinematic viscosity
ρ = density
RFI See Radio frequency interference
S
Saybolt viscosity A viscosity measured using methods developed by the Saybolt
company. It is obtained by timing how long the fluid takes to flow out of
a cup through a hole of known size. The viscosity is expressed in units
of time.
Security code A code or password which a user must key in before being allowed
access to all or part of a system.
Set A value is SET if it is keyed in by the user and does not change unless
the user changes it. (See also: Live.)
Signal converter A device which converts one signal into another. Its main use is in
quality measurement systems such as brewing where the output is
used by a control or monitoring system.
Status The condition of part of a system; for example, whether it is on, off, and
so on.
Status display A display which summarises the contents of the Historical log and gives
an indication of the current status of the system.
T
TCP/IP Abbreviation for Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol, the
suite of communications protocols used to connect hosts on the
Internet. TCP/IP uses several protocols, the two main ones being TCP
and IP. TCP/IP is built into the UNIX operating system and is used by
the Internet, making it the de facto standard for transmitting data over
networks. Even network operating systems that have their own
protocols, such as Netware, also support TCP/IP.
Temperature correction Transducers are typically designed to work at 20°C. A correction must
be applied when working at other temperatures.
Text descriptor Text which you can enter into the signal converter. Typically, this is a
parameter name when you configure Multiview.
Therm Unit of heat. 1 therm is the heat required to raise 1000 pounds of water
through 100°F.
U
Upload To receive data or programs from another instrument. (Opposite of
Download).
V
Viscosity In a liquid, the resistance to that force which tends to make the liquid
flow.
Volume flow rate The rate at which a given volume of fluid flows through the system.
W
Wizard One of the “standard” configurations whch you can select instead of
configuring the 7955 from scratch. You can edit the resulting
configuration to meet your requirements.
Wobbe index A measure of the amount of heat released by a gas burner of constant
orifice. It indicates the quality of the gas and is given by the expression
1
−
Vρ 2
Where:
Page B.3
Appendix B Blank wiring schedule
Status One of two levels, to show the state of some part of the
system, such as whether a valve is open or closed.
Outputs d.c. only. These provide power within the 7955 and to
some other external devices such as transducers.
Inputs
Analogue 16 0 0 0 0
HART 0 0 4 0 0
Pulse 5 0 0 0 0
Time period 4 0 0 0 0
Status 24 0 0 2 2
Outputs
Analogue 4 4 0 0 0
Pulse 5 0 0 0 0
Status 25 0 0 0 0
RS232 1 0 0 0 0
RS232/485 2 0 0 2 2
10Mb/s Ethernet ports 0 0 0 0 1
Note: Option board kit numbers are referred to without the “050” e.g. 79556
C.4 Specification
General
Environmental Operating temperature 0 to +50°C (-4 to +158°F)
Storage temperature -20 to +70°C (-32 to 122°F)
Relative humidity Up to 90% non-condensing
Bump BS 2011 test Eb
Vibration Tested to IEC publication 68-2-6, Part II,
frequency 10 to 150Hz,
2
maximum acceleration 20m/s
Weight 3.5kg
Inputs
o o
Analogue 4-20mA input accuracy without HART ±0.008% of full scale at 25 C ± 0.001%/ C
active
o o
4-20mA inputs (13, 14, 15 & 16) ±0.1% of full scale at 25 C ± 0.001%/ C
accuracy with HART active
4-20mA input resolution Better than 4 parts per million
o o o
PT100 accuracy (-50 to +200 C) ±0.05ºC ±0.01 C/ C
PT100 resolution Better than 0.02ºC
PT100 energisation <1mA average
(Meets BS1904 & IEC751, <1mW in the PT100)
Long term drift <20ppm per 1000 hours for first 1000 hours,
subsequently far less
Quantity 16 off :
First four are selectable as PT100, 0-20mA or 4-20mA.
Remainder are selectable as 0-20mA or 4-20mA.
Scan time 60ms per channel
Options None
Pulse Frequency range DC to 5kHz (dual pulse train) or 10kHz (single pulse
train); minimum pulse width 125s
Input trigger level 0.5V (1.2V p-p)
Quantity 5 off single or dual-pulse turbine
Options None
Outputs
o
Analogue Base board device accuracy (12-bit) ±0.075% of full scale (24mA) +/- 0.00075%/ C
Base board device resolution 1 part in 3500
Long term drift <20ppm per 1000 hours for first 1000 hours,
subsequently far less
Quantity 4 off
Update time 0.1s minimum, software dependent
Options Option board 79550506 for an extra 4 channels
Special Notices 1. The maximum load impedance that the analogue
outputs can drive is 1K Ohms. This must include any
barrier impedance and the load itself.
2. Analogue outputs are “Active Loops”. (Active loops
are powered by the device providing the current
output. “Passive loops” are powered externally,
usually by the device receiving the current)
Communications
Serial communications Port 1 Physical layer RS232 full duplex
Max. baud rate 19K2
Handshake XON/XOFF
Port 2 Physical layer RS232 full duplex or RS485 half duplex
Max. baud rate 19K2
Handshake XON/XOFF and/or RTS/CTS
Hardware facilities
Keyboard interface Number of keys 30
Key scan time 2ms
Debounce 14ms
Options None
Alarm annunciation Quantity 3 (one each for Input, System or Limit alarms)
Type Red LED
Operation Flash indicates new alarm condition.
Steady indicates accepted alarm.
Options None
Co-processor
Type 80-bit floating point maths co-processor
Options None
Power Supplies
Input 21V-30V dc. 35W maximum. 2A worst-case
start-up current
Output General instrumentation 1 x 24V nominal at 800mA
energisation
Turbine energisation Switchable voltages of 8V or 16V, current limited
to 120mA
DAC energisation Isolated 25V output at 200mA
Options None
C.5 Connections
Table C.1 is a reference for the pins of connectors on the rear panel (Figure C.1 and Figure C.2). You
should note that some connections are not fitted as standard and require an option board to be fitted first.
C.6 Earthing
In addition to earthing the chassis, (described in Chapter 4), you may have to make extra earth connections in some
cases, depending on the installation requirements.
The types of connection can be split into three groups, each of which has different earthing requirements. The
groups are:
Figure C.3 on page C.11 shows you how to earth the external connections.
Protect Ground
Pin 50
SK1
Group 1
(SK1, SK2/14, SK4, SK5 Pin 1 Pulse Output Common
and SK6) Status Output Common
Chassis and Protect Ground
instrumentation are Status Input Common (Opto-isolated)
Pin 50
earthed together unless
you cut Link 1
SK2
0V Ethernet
Protect Ground
Pin 15
Group 3 SK4
(SK3) Pin 1 0V Ethernet
Protect Ground
Connect external
earths as Pin 25
required. SK5
Pin 1
Protect Ground 0V Serial Port
Pin 9
SK6
0V Serial Port
Pin 1
Link
Chassis
Earth
Earth PL1
stud
E E 0v +25V
DC Power
If the 7955 is part of a large installation with separate earths for chassis and
instrumentation:
In this case you may (depending on the overall system requirements) earth the
7955 chassis and instrumentation separately by cutting the link on the
connector board.
If the 7955 is on its own or in a small installation with one common earth for
chassis and instrumentation:
In this case you must leave the link intact so that the chassis and
instrumentation are earthed to the same point.
Top of
instrument
case
1 inch 25.4 mm
Length
1 foot 0.3048 m
1 lb 0.45359237 kg
Mass
1 ton 1016.05 kg
3
1 lb/ft 16.0185 kg/m3
Density 1 lb/gal 99.7763 kg/m3
1 lb/US gal 119.826 kg/m3
2
1 lb/in 68.9476 mbar
1 atm 1.013250 bar
1 MPa 10 bar
Pressure
1 N/m 10-5 bar
1 mm Hg (0o) 1.33322 x 10-3 bar
1 in Hg (0o) 33.8639 x 10-3 bar
3
1 in 16.8371 cm3
3
1 ft 0.0283168 m3
Volume or capacity 1 gal 4.54609 dm3
1 US gal 3.78541 dm3
1 US barrel 0.158987 m3
3
1 ft /min 40.776 m3/day
Volume flow
1 gal/min 6.5463 m3/day
1 BTU 1.05506 kJ
Energy 1 kWh 3.6 MJ
1 therm 105.506 MJ
o
Temperature F (1.8 x oC) + 32
1P 0.1 Pa s
2
Viscosity (dynamic) 1 lbf/(ft s) or 1 pdl s/ft 1.48816 Pa s
1 slug/(ft s) or 1 lbf s/ft2 47.8803 Pa s
2
1 St 1 cm /s
Viscosity (kinematic)
1 ft2/s 9.29030 dm2/s
The two tables above are derived from equations in the Revised Petroleum Measurement Tables (IP 200, ASTM
D1250, API 2540 and ISO R91 Addendum 1).
3
Density of ambient air (in kg/m ) at a relative humidity of 50%
Air Air Temperature (°C)
Pressure
(mb) 6 10 14 18 22 26 30
3
Density of pure water (in kg/m to ITS - 90 Temperature Scale)
Temp
°C 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
0 999.840 999.940 999.972 999.940 999.848 999.699 999.497 999.244 998.943 998.595
20 998.203 997.769 997.295 996.782 996.231 995.645 995.024 994.369 993.681 992.962
40 992.212 991.432 990.623 989.786 988.922 988.030 987.113 986.169 985.201 984.208
60 983.191 982.150 981.086 980.000 978.890 977.759 976.607 975.432 974.237 973.021
80 971.785 970.528 969.252 967.955 966.640 965.305 963.950 962.577 961.185 959.774
100 958.345
K 0 + K1ρ15
α15 =
2
ρ15
Where K 0 and K1 are API factors which are obtained from the table:
Product compressibility
The definition of compressibility used to develop the table in Section 1 of the IP Petroleum measurement
Manual is the isothermal secant compressibility, defined by the equation:
1 ⎡ ∂V1 − ∂V2 ⎤
β=− ⎢ ⎥
V0 ⎣ P1 − P2 ⎦ T
For practical purposes, when the liquid volume changes from V0 to V1 as the gauge pressure changes
from zero (atmospheric) to P1 , the above equation is simplified to:
1 ⎡ ∂V1 ⎤
β=− ⎢ ⎥
V0 ⎣ P1 ⎦ T
ISO Document TC 28/SC3/N248, (Generation of New Compressibility Tables for International Use) gives the
following equations relating β to the compressibility data:
and
β = C × 106 × bar −1
The new equation (from the API Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards, Chapter 11.2.1M) gives
(after converting to units of kg/m and bar):
⎛ 6 3 ⎞
⎜ −1.62080 + 0.00021592 × t + 0.87096 ×10 + 4.2092× t ×10 ⎟
⎜ 2
ρ 15 2
ρ 15 ⎟
β = 10 − 4 e ⎝ ⎠bar −1
Where: T = temperature in °C
r15 = density (in kg/m3) at 15°C and at atmospheric pressure
This equation is valid for the density range of 638 kg/m3 to 1074 kg/m3. For a density range of 350 kg/m3 to
637 kg/m3 refer to Chapter 11.2.2M in the API Manual.
βa = adiabatic compressibility
ρ = density
1. Pressure method
This method is preferred and is for applications where live pressure measurement is available to the 7955.
The 7955 uses the same basic correction equation for both methods:
Equation F.1#1: Density with the correction for the effect of V.O.S.
⎛ 2⎞
⎜ ⎛ K ⎞ ⎟
⎜ 1 + ⎜⎝ τ ⎟
* Cc ⎠ ⎟
Using: ρ = ρ1 * ⎜ ⎟
⎜ ⎛ ⎞
2⎟
⎜ 1+ ⎜ K
⎟ ⎟
⎜ ⎜τ * C g ⎟⎠ ⎟⎠
⎝ ⎝
Where: ρ = True line density (V.O.S. corrected)……..…………… {Menu Data: “Line density A”}
Also for both methods, the velocity of sound of the calibration gas is calculated by the 7955 Flow Computer
using the following equation:
Using: ( )
C C = K A + (K B * ρ 1 ) + K C * ρ 12 + K D * ρ 13
And: K A , K B , K C and K D are coefficients from the appropriate ‘K’ column of table F.1#1 (below).
The 7955 automatically selects the appropriate value for each ‘K’ coefficient by using this table.
Table F.1#1
Notes:
• The density range of the transducer is selected when configuring line density.
• There is no support for other calibration gases.
• Temperature is assumed to be 20°C.
Equation F.1#3a: V.O.S. of the measured gas (pure or composition) for pressure method
γ 0 * P * 10 5
Using: CG = + K 5 * ρ 12 + K 6 * ρ 13
ρ1
And: K 5 , K 5 and γ 0 are constants that must be ‘Set’ into the 7955 Flow Computer.
For a pure gas, values can be taken from the appropriate columns of table F.1#2 (on page F.3).
For gas compositions these (pure gas) constants should be modified in proportion to the
volumetric fraction (percentage) of each gas component.
Air 28.96469
Argon 39.9480 1.677 7.21 * 10-3 -54.7 * 10-6 1.46*10-6 -3*10-6 323.0
Carbon Monoxide 28.01055 1.395 6.14*10-3 -31.0*10-6 - - 347.4
Carbon dioxide 44.00995 1.290 -2.05*10-3 18.7*10-6 -0.38*10-3 2.22*10-6 264.2
Ethane 30.07012 1.194 -42.66*10-3 830*10-6 -0.66*10-3 8.95*10-6 323.0
Ethylene 28.054 1.243 -4.78*10-3 52.9*10-6 5.49*10-3 6.50*10-6 320.0
Helium 4.00260 1.664 77.3*10-3 -782.4*10-6 - - 1006.0
Heptane 100.20557 1.054 0 0 0 0 155.0
Hexane 86.17848 1.063 0 0 0 0 170.0
Hydrogen 2.01594 1.407 0 0 0 0 1297.7
Hydrogen sulphide 34.07994 1.320 0 0 0 0 305.0
Methane 16.04303 1.307 4.75*10-3 0.824*10-6 4.75*10-3 0.824*10-6 442.0
Nitrogen 28.01340 1.400 5.25*10-3 -28.6*10-6 2.66*10-3 -4.49*10-6 349.0
Octane 114.23266 1.048 0 0 0 0 144.0
Oxygen 31.9988 1.397 2.50*10-3 -11.08*10-6 - - 329.0
Propane 44.09721 1.132 -109*10-3 4055*10-6 5.88*10-3 -6.16*10-6 250.0
Propylene 42.081 1.154 -200*10-3 8410*10-6 - - 256.0
ISO-Butane 58.12430 1.097 -2042*10-3 0.4685 10.67*10-3 -13.7*10-6 214.0
Neo-Butane 58.12430 1.095 -2042*10-3 0.4685 10.67*10-3 -13.7*10-6 211.0
ISO-Pentane 72.15139 1.077 0 0 0 0 188.0
Neo-Pentane 72.15139 1.076 0 0 0 0 187.0
Table F.1#2: Gas data and 7955 Flow Computer coefficients for Cg (VOS calculation)
1
at Normal conditions.
Equation F.1#3b: V.O.S. of the measured gas (pure of composition) for S.G. method
K C G1
Using: CG = *
τ ⎛ ⎞
(1 − C G1 ) + ⎜ τ * C
K
⎟
⎝ C ⎠
⎡⎛ ⎛ ⎡ SG ⎤ ⎡ ⎤ ⎞⎟ ⎤
K3 ⎞ SG
And: C G 1 = ⎢⎜ 1 + ⎟ * ⎜⎢ ⎥ −⎢ ⎥ ⎟⎥
⎢⎝ ρ +K4⎠ ⎜ ⎣ λ 0 * 293 ⎦
⎝ ⎣ λ 0 * ( 273 + t ) ⎦ g ⎠ ⎥⎦
⎣ c
And: K 3 and K 4 are constants that must be ‘Set’ into the 7955 Flow Computer. (See notes below).
Notes:
• K3 and K4 are normally taken from the calibration certificate that was issued with the gas density
transducer. Alternatively, the following table has typical values that can be used.
• ‘Ideal’ values for Specific Gravity can be taken from table F.1#2 (on page F.3). In practice, the live
Specific Gravity measurements may be more appropriate.
• For a measured pure gas, a value for γ 0 can be taken from table F.1#2 (on page F.3).
• For a measured composition of gas, a value for γ 0 can be taken from table F.1#2 (on page F.3) but
needs to modified in proportion to the volumetric fraction (percentage) of each gas component.
The Emerson logo is a trade mark and service mark of Emerson Electric Co.
All other marks are the property of their respective owners.
We reserve the right to modify or improve the designs or specifications of product and services at any time without notice.
International:
Emerson Process Management
Remote Automation Solutions
Outgang Lane
Pickering
North Yorkshire, YO18 7JA
United Kingdom
Tel: +44 (0) 1751 471800
Fax: +44 (0) 1751 471801
www.emersonprocess.com/remote